Home

Korg D1200 Musical Instrument User Manual

1. 4 Press the STOP key Playback will stop and the PLAY LED will go dark REW FF lt lt gt gt Ha gt i Pi gt ooo y O SCRUB ON STOP PLAY REC e Quick Start Tutorial To stop the rhythm In the RHYTHM Setup top panel select the Rhythm button and press the ENTER key to turn it Off The heavy line will appear even in sections where you were not actually playing your instrument Counter display move to time p 32 To exit Modeling mode p 47 21 Step 1 Quick recording Step 2 Overdubbing Step 3 Mixing Step 4 Mastering 22 Step 2 Overdubbing 1 Assigning inputs to the mixer In this section you ll connect your keyboard to the INPUT 3 and IN PUT 4 jacks assign the signals to mixer channels 9 and 10 and record the signal on tracks 9 and 10 1 Set the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 TRIM knobs to the minimum posi tion 4 dB lower the MASTER fader and connect your keyboard to the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 jacks 2 Specify the input channels Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch7 12 tab page Select the Ch9 icon and use the VALUE dial to select INPUT 3 In the same way select the Ch10 icon and use the VALUE dial to select INPUT 4 cho Inputs E001 01 000 Olea Chr 3 Chg 16 iChil iz ATES ua Usg
2. 200e2eeeeeeeeee 16 Quick Start Tutorial 17 Step 1 Quick recording cscceeceeeceeeeeeaes 17 Te Getine ready tesacste eat rpomeeniant asians dans ec ast 17 2 Tumne on the powe erida a 17 3 Creating a NeW SONG sirorosarir rrsan antr ainke 18 4 Using the modeling modesina 18 Ds Setting upa Ty UNI een vesessdssacgusa ties E 20 G RECOGE ia 20 Ts Pla ACK oian E 21 Step 2 Overdubbing c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesees 22 1 Assigning inputs to the Mixer eee 22 2 Applying an insert effect to the keyboard 23 De QVCLAUD DIN E ana ia phei tavie aceacinsauvietneeieneres 20 4 Overdubbing additional parts cece 24 Step 3 MIXING se cietitiices tears hace easiness 25 1 Applying an insert effect to a track cee 25 2 Adding EQ equalization to each track 26 3 Applying master effects to all tracks 27 Step 4 Mastering ccceceeeeeeceeseeeeeeaeeeaees 28 Tt Appime the final effeCtesinraniicon ionan 28 2 Creating the Master track oii csessssisscisscsssssestonnsscovess 28 3 Wono TOOD eosina fe merertet erent nr se 29 Operation s0088 31 Song and Locate ccceceeeeeeceeeeeacenaeenacs 31 1 Creating naming and selecting songs 04 31 2 Using the counter display empeinnar oi 32 2 EGIUInS A SONE sey centechce rages testoratsieb user mietealedaats 34 MIX seahstadistianon cent E E att entens 39 1 I
3. EffSnd2 or FinalEff tab page adjust the effect parameters so that CLP does not light If EQ causes distortion make the following adjustments Adjust the gain of the input EQ for an analog input or adjust the gain of the channel EQ for playback p 38 4 O Effects do not apply You may have selected effect program number 00 Set EffectNumber to other than 000 NO EFFECT Insert effects do not apply _ Digital input may be enabled Insert effects cannot be used if Digiln is turned On in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page Turn this setting Off Is the effect inserted at the appropriate location Inthe INSERT EFFECT InsAss tab page set Assign to In if you want to apply the effect to the input sound or to Trk if you want to apply the effect to the play back gt p 42 85 Can t use the expression pedal or MIDI to control an insert ef fect Inthe SYSTEM USB Control tab page has a valid ef fect been selected for Ass Make sure that a valid effect is selected for Select EffType in the INSERT EFFECT InsAss tab page Example Ass may have been set to InsEff3 even though SelectEffType is set to lin2out x2 in which case only InsEff1 and InsEff2 can be used Are you using the correct device for control Use the device that
4. 120 Select SceneFilter InsEtt Mstetiy Mstet2 f Cancel On Filtering will be applied to that channel parameter and the corresponding scene settings will be disabled Off Filtering will be off and the scene settings will be valid 3 SceneNumber cccccccccccccsseees 001 100 The mixer settings of this scene will be recalled to the current location You can also use this field to recall a scene whose name you want to edit or whose location you want to change The time at which the scene is registered is indicated at the right of this area If SceneRead is Off you can use this area to select a desired scene If SceneRead is On the scene for the current location will be selected and cannot be changed manually Sorts the scenes by their order of appearance in the song from beginning to end Normally scenes are arranged in the order in which they were registered However you can sort them so that they will appear in the order of the registered times amp Undo is not available for this Sort operation 5 Rename essessessesessescescescossossessescescssessessesceoceo Edits the name of a scene Use SceneNumber to recall the scene whose name you want to edit press the Rename button to open the dia log box and edit the name You can input a name of up to sixteen characters gt p 31 If you set Select DispParameter to Scene in the SONG
5. 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of High EQ Level Output Level ceseeeeen 0 100 Sets the output level of the compressor Mix Wet Dry cccee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Envelope Select This parameter selects whether the left and right channels are linked to control both signals simultaneously or whether each channel is controlled independently Sensitivity Output Level The Sensitivity parameter sets the sensitivity of the compressor If this parameter is set to a higher value lower level sounds will be boosted With a higher Sensitivity the overall volume level is higher To adjust the final volume level use the Output Level parameter Attack Controls the strength of the attack that is characteristic of a compres sor 22 DY2 St Limiter Stereo Limiter The Limiter regulates the input signal level It is similar to the Compressor except that the Limiter compresses only signals that exceed the specified level to lower unnecessary peak sig nals The Limiter applies a peaking type EQ to the trigger signal which controls the degree of the Limiter effect allowing you to set any band width to be covered This effect is a stereo lim iter You can link left and right channels or use each channel individually Envelp Envelope Select L RMix L Only Selects from linking both channels con R Only Indivi trolling only from left channel
6. Erase all songs that cause this message to appear If this message still appears format the hard disk p 75 When you turn off the power do so using the correct procedure p 15 Illegal Mark Point When you use Disc At Once to write an audio CD you must leave at least four seconds between marks There must also be an interval at least four seconds for the following e From the beginning of the track to the first mark e From the last mark before the end of the track being written to the CD to the end time of the track Illegal To End Time _ When using the track editing command Exp Comp Track the TO and END points specify a region that cannot be executed relative to the IN OUT region Set the TO END region so that it is within 50 200 of the IN OUT region InTime gt OutTime The operation cannot be executed because there is a mis take in the IN and OUT settings you made for track ed iting auto punch in out or loop This will appear if IN is later than OUT or if they are at the same time Set the IN and OUT times correctly Memory Full There is not enough memory for recording or track edit ing Delete unneeded data Alternatively you may be able to obtain more free mem ory by turning the power off and then on again MIDI Overflow AM IDI reception failure occurred while receiving MMC or while recording MIDI clock Set the transmitting device so that
7. LFO Shape Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the feedback amount Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Changing the LFO waveform shape controls the peak sweep of flanging effects Feedback Wet Dry The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value is dif ferent The harmonics will be emphasized when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you set a positive value for both Feed back and Wet Dry and if you set a negative value for both Feedback and Wet Dry High Damp This parameter sets the amount of damping of the feedback in the high range Increasing the value will cut high range harmonics 16 MO3 St Phaser Stereo Phaser This effect creates a swell by shifting the phase It is very effec tive on electric piano sounds This is a stereo effect and you can control the spaciousness of the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other LFO LFO Waveform cccceee TRI SIN Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Phase LFO Phase degree 180 180 Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Manual Manual cccecsssseecen 0 100 Depth DO ssiisicsinsasisrniatitvcansistancivce 0 100 Reso RESOnance cesees 100 100 HiDamp High Damp
8. Press the YES OK key 7 Select the Tempo Track as the tempo source e Access the RHYTHM SetUp tab page Temposource E 001 01 000 Tee i20 64 4 Rhythm H bt Rocki Yol BT Setlip ATmpMap K TmpTrk Eg 3 e Select TempoSource and turn the VALUE dial to specify TempoTrk If MIDI Clock data was not received correctly from your MIDI sequencer recording may stop in the middle of the song Tap tempo You can record the tempo by pressing tapping the PLAY key at the beginning of each measure or on each beat while the song plays You can use a PS 1 foot switch sold separately instead of the PLAY key Tap tempo lets you record the tempo after a song has already been recorded If you record tempo for a song for which you did not originally specify the tempo you will be able to do the following things e Edit tracks in units of measures e Connect and synchronize external MIDI devices 1 Prepare the audio for which you want to record the tempo Record the audio from the beginning of the song When recording from the beginning of the song it is convenient to use Trigger recording p 54 2 Specify the time signature of the song If the time signature changes during the song for which you want to record tempo create a tempo map at the location where the time signature changes A If you want the time signature to change during the song you must cr
9. p 44 To edit an effect 1 Access the page for the effect you want to edit 2 Select EffectNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select the effect program that you want to edit 3 Listen to the sound of the effect program If you select the Bypass button and press the ENTER key bypass will be turned on you will hear the sound without the effect If you then select the Cancel but ton and press the ENTER key bypass will be turned off the effect will be applied once again This lets you compare the sound with and without effects 4 Select the EditEffect button and press the ENTER key The dialog box will appear showing the structure of that effect ox E Blige 01 co Eal JAAG a to E PER ea 6 Turn off each individual effect as necessary Select the Effect On Off button located below each EffectIcon button and press the ENTER key to switch it on highlighted or off 43 Upgrading MIDI USB Drive Data paia be Rhythm i a Ee Mixer pins w the system 44 6 Edit the settings of each effect e Select the EffectIcon button of the effect you want to edit and press the ENTER key e Select a parameter and use the VALUE dial to edit the value For details on each parameter refer to the Effect Parameter List gt p 127 e You can hear the results of the effect by switching the Effect On Off f
10. ssecssescnces 0 100 QDIA DBDIN esscrspacnictdenecncharmdestmnitent 0 100 Reso RESOnance ceee 100 100 Mix Wet Dry ccecceseseees Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Trml Tremolo LFO LFO Waveform cccccee TRI SIN Vintage Up Down Shape LFO Shape 008 100 100 Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Depth DEPIN ruiien eter acirdvavenivieus 0 100 Mt Dly Multitap Delay T1Time Tap1 Time msec 0 680ms T2Time Tap2 Time msec 0 680ms TILVI Tap1 LOW6 I iscscsccscsstinseseieiens 0 100 Fdback Feedback 100 100 HiDamp High Damp seeseee 0 100 Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Reverb Mono Reverb Time Reverb Time sec 0 1 10 0sec HiDamp High Damp 00 0 100 PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200msec EQTrim EQ Trim 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB RevBal Reverb Balance Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Gate Contrl Input Reverb Mix Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Polrty Polarity s Thrshl ThreShold cccccscseceeees 0 100 Attack Attack ccccsssssseseees 1 100 Relse Release ccccessscssssssseeeees 1 100 Selects LFO Waveform Sets the LFO speed Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the reso
11. sseeeeosseeeeooseeccossesecese 01 04 16 16 Specifies the time signature when TempoSource is set to Manual If TempoSource is set to TempoMap or Tem poTrack this area will indicate the time signature for O INSERT I EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL RHYTHM TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO nn METER AUTO IN LOCI UNDO Hreacy view SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP pynicy SCENE MARK apnoea SONG TRACK USB 96 the current time location as specified by the tempo maps you created in the TmpMap tab page SelRhythm cccsccceees Rhythm Pattern Lis Specifies the rhythm pattern if TempoSource is set to Manual If TempoSource is set to TempoMap or Tem poTrack this area will indicate the rhythm pattern for the current time location as specified by the tempo maps you created in the TmpMap tab page Press the button and select a rhythm pattern from the dialog box The available rhythm patterns will depend on the Beat setting EBlank4 Cancel abt Rock RhythmVol ssscssscssssssssescsessseeesees 000 100 Adjusts the rhythm volume that is sent to the master LR bus or the monitor LR bus In the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page you can select the bus to which the rhythm is sent e RAYI sesser E E On Off Switche
12. D eme 0NG Renamesong 116 Creates a new song following the last song Press the New button to open the dialog box nst Make the desired settings for SongType and Mixer Set select the YES OK key and press the ENTER key to create the new song If you want to cancel the operation press the NO CANCEL key Aa Songlype 16Bit 12Track 24Bit 6Track 16Bit 12Track Create a song for 16 bit recording and playback You can use tracks 1 12 A maximum of four tracks can be recorded simultaneously 24Bit 6Track Create a song for 24 bit recording and playback You can use tracks 1 6 Tracks 7 12 will not be available A maximum of four tracks can be recorded simultaneously If you copy audio data from a 16 bit song that data will be handled as 16 bit data p 108 l The SongType Bit Track setting can be changed only when you are creating a new song Ab MixerSet ssccsssscsseeees New PrevSong Select the mixer settings that will be used for the new song New Use the default settings PrevSong Use the mixer settings of the currently selected song EditSong Perform song edit opera tions execute 0071 01 000 B These editing operations apply to the currently selected song amp The Undo command is not available for these opera tions Wis Eain CopySong MoveSong DeleteSong ProtectSong Press the I button to access the dialog bo
13. DIGITAL IN i lt u DIGITAL OUT Monitor speakers etc 1 2 Input audio input connections The D1200 has four channels of analog input and one two channel digital input jack Connecting a guitar e Guitar or bass guitar lt GUITAR IN jack Connecting a mic INPUT 1 e Mic XLR e INPUT 1 INPUT 2 phantom power Connecting a keyboard e Synthesizer etc gt INPUT Q O 1 INPUT 4 jacks 4 TRIM 60 Connecting audio devices e Sub input For details on how to specify the mixer channel to which the input audio will be sent and how to audi tion the input signal refer to p 22 e A guitar or bass guitar routed through a compact effects device can be connected to the INPUT 1 INPUT 4 jacks e If you want to use a stereo input select two adjacent inputs 1 2 or 3 4 so that you can perform track editing more efficiently If you are recording from a mic place the mic sufficient ly far from the D1200 so that it does not pick up noise Connections for digital recording e Digital output jack of a DAT or MD with an optical digital S P DIF output S P DIF IN of the D1200 use an optical digital cable for connections For details on how to specify the mixer channel to which the input audio will be sent and how to audition the in put signal refer to p 35 Computer MIDI sequencer to the AC outlet Power supply co
14. Recording format Recording time Storage capacity Number of songs Length of one song Locate points Mark points Metronome patterns Rhythm patterns MMC functions Synchronization CD R RW functions USB functions Track editing Song editing Counter locate format 96 tracks including virtual tracks 12 tracks simultaneous playback 4 tracks simultaneous recording 16 bit 6 tracks simultaneous playback 4 tracks simultaneous recording 24 bit 24 bit 16 bit uncompressed 44 1 kHz 16 bit recording maximum 122 hours 24 bit recording maximum 61 hours 40 GB hard disk 2 GB is reserved for use with a USB drive 100 songs per drive Max 12 hours Counter display MSM 720 000 000 Four points per song 100 points per song marks can be named 96 215 Transmitted and received MTC transmission reception MIDI Clock transmission Tempo map 200 events per song Sync track one track per song Tempo recording Create audio CD Disc At Once Track At Once backup restore export import WAV file ISO9660 Backup restore FAT 16 WAV file import FAT 16 export FAT 16 Copy tracks can be copied between songs insert erase delete swap reverse time expansion compression fade normalize optimize Copy move delete rename protect Min Sec mSec Meas Beat Tick Min Sec Frame 30 NDF only lt MIDI functionality gt MIDI functionality Mixer control effect control MMC
15. SelSong tab page the scene name will be dis played in that page p 116 6 Editloc een ee er Edits the registered time location of the scene Use SceneNumber to recall the scene whose location you want to change Press the EditLoc button to open the dialog box and edit the location of the scene Move the cursor to the unit of time you want to change and use the VALUE dial to edit the time Press the YES OK key to confirm the change or press the NO CANCEL key to cancel the change EditSceneLocation bl 1 Loc gaa ea B88 CE 7 Delete cccccsscccssscccssccccssccccsscccssscccssceccescees Deletes a scene or all scenes Reference amp Undo is not available for this Delete operation Delete Scene l Arevousure 7a SelectAll ccccccccsssssssssscccceeee On Off All scenes will be selected for deletion ai On All scenes will be selected for deletion The scene number will be indicated as Off The single scene number selected in SceneNumber will be selected for deletion 8 EditFilter cccccsssssccssssscccsssscccssssccccsescosees You can view and edit the Filter settings that are regis tered in each scene Even when you store a scene with filtering applied the parameters at that time are actually saved By changing the filter settings in this page you can recover the state of those parameters at the time
16. amp EraseCD RW cannot be executed on a drive other than a CD RW drive execute 0001 071 000 _ C Insert the CD RW disc into the CD R RW drive 2 Select EraseCD RW e Select SelOperation and use the VALUE dial to select EraseCD RW Execute the erase operation e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Exe EraseCD AC P Are You Sure e Use Quick to select how the disc will be erased If you turn this On the entire CD RW disc will be erased at high speed Normally you will select this If you turn this Off the entire CD RW disc will be erased completely Use this if you experience a prob lem such as if the disc fails to be recognized even after it has been erased with Quick turned On e Press the YES OK key to begin the erasing opera tion e When formatting is finished the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key CD RW discs can also be erased in the CD CDR RW tab page A Drie capa U UUTUUS This section explains how you can make the best use of the D1200 s song drive capacity For explanatory purposes we will assume that you have recorded a song with the follow ing structure fimo A 8 Break Soo Erara The Optimize Track operation described here does not need to be performed often It is sufficient to perform this operation when the DiskBusy indication appears
17. 4 Connect the D1200 s AUX OUT jack to the INPUT jack of the external effect and connect the OUTPUT jacks of the external effect to the D1200 s INPUT 3 jack and INPUT 4 jack 2 Set the send levels for each channel e Access the MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND Aux Send tab page e Select Aux for the channel s that you want to send to the external effect and use the VALUE dial to adjust the send level vet ee Oot 01 000 oa MET eE Enana Eend baussend 3 Return the audio signal from the external effect unit e Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page e Select the SubIn button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Use the In3 4 Fader to adjust the return level and Balance to adjust the return balance p 67 98 Modeling mode The D1200 provides a Modeling mode that makes it easy for you to record using Korg s ToneWorks REMS effects Dedi cated knobs allow you to control the modeling effects as eas ily as if you were using hardware devices Refer to What is REMS p 6 In Modeling mode tracks 1 and 2 are automatically selected and their TRACK STATUS is set to REC lit red You can begin recording immediately simply by pressing the REC key and then the PLAY key l When you overdub be sure to record to different tracks so you don t erase anything you had already recorded Set the TRACK STATUS keys of th
18. Even when the recommended media is used some CD players are unable to play back certain types of CD R media You may be able to play back successfully if you use a different type of CD R media kE Can t back up to CD R RW Are you using blank media If using CD R you must use new unused media If us ing CD RW go to the CD CD R RW tab page and use the Erase button to erase the media before you ex ecute the backup operation WAV Can t preview Is the WAV file in a supported format Select a WAV file of a format that the D1200 supports and preview it gt p 71 113 USB Computer does not recognize the D1200 Is the USB cable connected correctly p 15 _ Is the D1200 set to USB mode gt p 77 Error occurred when you disconnected the D1200 from the computer _ Use the correct procedure to disconnect p 77 When you connected the D1200 the computer asked you to install software or a device driver _ Does the operating system of your computer support the D1200 p 77 Appendix Messages Confirmation messages Completed _ The operation was completed Press the YES OK key Song Full _ You have exceeded the maximum number of songs that can be stored on the drive Delete unneeded songs kkk ing is Copy Write etc _ The operation is being performed Please wait until this display disappears Obey Copyri
19. KORG D1200 will appear on your computer Fie Edit view Favorites Tools Help Q Back v P Search Ir Folders x Gi Address C E KORG Folders x Desktop all BACKUP a WAV My Documents p My Computer mr KORG a 314 Floppy A 32 x 32 Icon amp Local Disk C 4 Sy WXPHFPP_EN D KORG D1200 E 16 O BACKUP D way m Contrnl Panel 4 Use your computer to back up the data When you open the KORG D1200 drive that appeared in step 8 you will see the contents of the USB drive area within the D1200 s internal hard disk Copy the desired data onto your computer You may also copy data from your computer back to the D1200 s USB drive 6 Disconnect the D1200 from your computer Left click the ES icon that is displayed in the right side of your computer s taskbar From the menu that appears left click Stop USB disk drive KORG D1200 Verify that you see a message of Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device Select the Exit button of USB Mode and press ENTER After you have exited USB mode unplug the USB cable from the D1200 If you are using Windows Me USB high capacity stor age device will be displayed as USB drive Macintosh users Mac OS9 0 4 or later 1 Use a USB cable to connect the D1200 to your computer Connect the USB cable from your computer to the D1200 s USB connector Make sure that the connector is orie
20. Off if DiskError is displayed frequently or if you experience problems such as failure to recog nize the disk drive even after it is formatted with Quick turned On e If you turn the Force button On formatting will be executed even if the drive contains a protected song If this is off when you execute formatting and the disk contains a protected song a message of SongProtect will be displayed and the operation will be aborted e Press the YES OK key to begin the formatting operation e When formatting is finished the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key l Executing the format operation with Quick turned Off will require a substantial length of time 40 GB On gt approximately 7 seconds Off gt approxi mately 8 hours l If you continue using the D1200 for an extended period the bottom of the unit may become hot but this is not a problem for operation If you are touching the bottom of the D1200 and find that it has become uncomfortably hot place the unit on a tabletop Data a be eel Rhythm a Effects Mixer r and w 75 Upgrading the system 76 3 Erasing a CD RW disc This operation erases the data that was written on a CD RW disc Erasing a disc lets you use the entire capacity of the disc just as when it was unused blank amp When you execute EraseCD RW all data will be erased from the CD RW disc
21. This location can be specified by using the STORE key and the IN LOC1 key or specified in the Wave dis play OY CUE E E T 000 00 000 Displays the auto punch out time the location at which recording will end This location can be specified by using the STORE key and the OUT LOC2 key or specified in the Wave display 4 RolTime sssccceccescusesenacivactseveseccaneevivevesevesssesesssesess Specifies the pre roll and post roll times used for auto punch in out SetkollTime PreFall Az PostRoll A Unit Meas 4a PreRoll cccccsssscccssssscccssssceees 00 10 Specifies the duration of playback that will precede punch in IN Ab PostRoll cccssscccssssscccsssscceees 00 10 Specifies the duration of playback that will follow punch out OUT 122 4c UN it scscssscsnanseccesssars Second Meas Measure Selects the unit for setting the pre roll and post roll times You can choose Second or Meas measure Press the YES OK key to apply the specified pre roll and post roll times or press the NO CANCEL key to cancel any changes PreRoll IN LOC 1 OUT LOC 2 PostRoll Poe Start recording Stop recording Auto punch in out recording LOOP recording repeat this region Here you can view the audio waveform and set IN and OUT locations more precisely you can also use the Play From Play To and Slow Play functions gt
22. Undo button and press ENTER The selected take will be recalled 5 Listen to the recorded content e Press the PLAY key to play back and listen to the recorded content If AutoPunch is On playback will begin at the begining of the pre roll time and continue to the end of the post roll time Rhythm i a Effects Mixer r and w N 5 N e Q Q oz lt F MIDI USB Drive Data Dai Upgrading the system 55 56 e Repeat this procedure to find the best take If you are satisfied with the selected take press the YES OK key to return to the previous screen If you want to select the most recent recording select the Redo button and press the ENTER key to return to the Level00 take D Playback U U UUU UU This page explains how to perform basic playback and how to use program playback 2 1 Playback 1 Select the track s that you want to play For each track that you want to play press the TRACK STATUS key to set it to PLAY mode LED lit green 2 Move to the counter location from which you want to play For details on how to move to a new location refer to p 32 3 Begin playback Press the PLAY key The PLAY LED will light e Apply EQ to the playback p 37 e Adjust the level and pan of the playback p 37 e Apply effects to the playback p 42 e Play the built in rhythm along with the playback p 48 4 Stop playback Pr
23. cccccccccssssssccccccceeees PunchInOut Play Stop Mark Selects the function that will be controlled by the foot switch PunchIn Out Perform manual punch in and punch out i e switch between recording and playback Set the TRACK STATUS key of the desired track to REC and begin playback Recording will begin the moment you press the foot switch and will end when you press the foot switch once again p 53 Play Stop Switch between playback start and stop Press the foot switch to start playback and press it again to stop playback Mark Register a mark When you press the foot switch a mark will be registered at that time location l While this tab page is displayed the foot switch is used to detect the polarity and the function selected here will not operate Also while recording tap tempo the foot switch will be used for tap tempo input regardless of the setting you specify here p 52 3 Device CtriChgDevice sssccsssssccesssceeseees Pedal A Touch PitchBend Velocity NoteNum CC 000 119 Selects the external device that will control one of the D1200 s internal effects The effect you specify in Ass can be controlled in realtime Pedal An expression pedal will control the effect Con nect an expression pedal such as the separately sold XVP 10 or EXP 2 to the EXPRESSION PEDAL jack and move the pedal to control the effect A Touch PitchBend Velocity NoteNum MIDI after
24. AreYouSure press the YES OK key to begin loading erg Loading Warning Do not disconnect power Flease wait restart l If the power is turned off or fails due to an unexpected accident while the system is being loaded the D1200 may no longer operate correctly If this occurs contact your Korg distributor 3 If the system file was loaded correctly the D1200 will begin updating the system The TRACK STATUS LEDs will successively light from 1 to 11 12 First the green LEDs will successively light from CH1 to CH11 12 and then the red LEDs will successively light from CH1 to CH11 12 Then the D1200 will automati cally restart and will begin operating with the new sys tem If the system file is found to be invalid the TRACK STATUS LED will not light and the D1200 will restart After the D1200 restarts perform the system update once again If the update fails again please contact your Korg distributor MIDI USB Drive Data paia be ee Rhythm a Effects Mixer M and m D g D a the system 8 82 Reference This section contains a detailed explanation of each screen that appears in the display when you press a key EMS v RECORDING INPUT INSERT niri e osoro SYSTEM USB a ET OUT r at C MASTER EFFECT TEn EE C_ CT ae METER LESENNE ivaeta care E E E A A 84 Counter Counter display sssssissiisessrsicisusisirsssisercinssaisasssesrse 8
25. COUNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO F9 METER AUTO N LOCI SYSTEM UNDO ps SCRUB m LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB OO 84 COUNTER Counter Counter display The counter in the upper right of each page indicates the cur rent location in the song SelectTimeDisg HEY 001 t 881 HEWSONG E Tempo Manu 120 add Metrod 1 1 Select TimeDisp Type csssccssssccsssscessceees Select the tA button to open the Select TimeDisp Type dialog box Select the type of counter to be shown in the display and press the YES OK key Select TimeDisp Type 2X m Q80 06 08F Py 240 00F ree Freelime MSF __ __ MBT The current location will be shown as the number of measures from the beginning of the song From the left the values indicate Measures Beats and Ticks 1 96th beat _ _ MSM The current location will be shown as the absolute time from the beginning of the song From the left the values indicate Minutes Seconds and Milliseconds 1 1000th second __ __F MSF The current location will be shown as the absolute time and number of frames from the beginning of the song You will normally use this when synchronizing with MTC From the left the values indicate Minutes Seconds and Frames 1 30th second _ _ Free FreeTime The remaining available record ing time on the hard disk will be shown From the left the values indicates Minutes
26. Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page Since the output level will differ depending on the equipment that is connected use the TRIM knobs to make adjustments as described in steps 8 and of Connecting a guitar to the GUITAR IN jack assign ing it to mixer channel 1 and adjusting the levels p 35 To adjust the overall volume level Use the MASTER fader to adjust the volume of the master LR bus that is output from the headphones and the MASTER OUT jacks 2 2 Adjusting the pan Use the PAN or BALANCE knobs to adjust the location of each channel in the stero field e When pairing is on the knob of the odd numbered channel can be used as a BALANCE knob to adjust the position of the sound p 38 e Pan settings can be registered in a scene p 39 Channel 1 6 PAN knobs Turn the knob toward L to move the sound left or toward R to move the sound right Channel 7 12 BALANCE knobs Turn the knob toward L to increase the volume of the odd numbered channel Turn the knob toward R to increase the volume of the even numbered channel Normally you will pan the vocals and bass to the center and spread the other instruments out across the stereo field As an example guitar might be to panned to the left with the piano balancing it on the right When recording in stereo If you want to input a stereo source to tracks 7 8 11 12 and record it in stereo set the channel 7 8 11 12 BAL ANCE knobs to
27. Even if this is turned On recording will not begin if the input level does not exceed the threshold level while in record ready mode In this case press the STOP key or REC key to cancel record ready mode and then adjust the Threshold setting 2 Threshold ccccccccssssssssccccccseeees 000 100 Specifies the threshold level for the input signal at which recording will be triggered when the trigger recording function is used Recording will begin when the input level exceeds this setting Normally you should set this as low as possible without allowing recording to be triggered by noise The appro priate level will depend on the input source Re adjust this setting if recording begins too early or too late 3 PreTrigTime eee cvesceceeceeecseccsyss crseces 000 700ms Specifies the length of sound prior to the record start time that will be captured when using trigger recording Trigger recording will start recording when the input signal exceeds the Threshold level but depending on the threshold setting and on the type of source the ini tial attack of the first note may be lost In such cases you can set the PreTrigTime so that the lower level portion 12 INSERT I EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL RHYTHM TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO oO METER AUTO N LOCI SYSTEM UNDO ps SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TR
28. Popup buttons and dialog boxes Use the popup button to open the dialog box and spec ify the parameter value p 12 e Use the CURSOR keys to move the cursor to the popup button and press the ENTER button to open the dialog box Listening to the demo song 13 14 1 Connections Here are some examples of basic connections for recording with the D1200 As necessary substitute the equipment you are using for the devices named here CDRW 1 connections For details on installing the CDRW 1 CD R RW drive option refer to p 149 You must make all connections with the power turned off Making connections with the power turned on may damage your speaker system or cause malfunctions 1 1 Output audio output connections In order to hear the sounds recorded on the D1200 you will need to connect it to a monitor speakers speakers with an in ternal amp or other audio equipment or use headphones Connecting audio equipment for monitoring e Use RCA phono cables to connect monitor speakers to the MONITOR OUT L R jacks e If you will use headphones for monitoring connect your headphones with a phone plug to the PHONES jack Use the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the volume The audio signal that is output from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and the PHONES jack can be selected in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page p 100 Master recorder Analog cassette tape recorder etc
29. PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200ms Thru Pre Delay Thru s seececees 0 100 ERLvI ER Level siscistantisntoivimaive 0 100 RvbLvl Reverb Level 0 100 EQTrim EQ Trim 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Mix Wet Dry cecceee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet ER Level Reverb Level Sets the reverberation time Sets the damping amount in the high range Sets the delay time from the dry sound Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound Sets the level of early reflections Sets the reverberation level Sets the EQ input level Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds These parameters set the early reflection level and reverb level Changing these parameter values allows you to simulate the type of walls in the room That is a larger ER Level simulates a hard wall and a larger Reverb Level simulates a soft wall 7 RV7 Early Reflection This effect is only the early reflection part of a reverberation sound and adds presence to the sound You can select one of the four decay curves Type TYPO ecsesecsseeeeeees Sharp Loose Modula Revers ERTime ER Time msec 10 800ms PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200ms EQTrim EQ Trim 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0
30. e Turn the VALUE dial to set PreRoll to the length that will play before recording begins and set PostRoll to the length that will play after recording ends Use Unit to select the unit by which to set to pre roll and post roll times You can select either Second seconds or Meas measures e When you have finished making your settings press the YES OK key to return to the previous page 6 Begin recording e When you press the REC key you will move to a point earlier than the specified punch in point by the distance of the pre roll time and enter record ready mode LED blinking e When you press the PLAY key playback will begin The track will play back during the pre roll time and recording will begin at the punch in IN point The REC LED will be lit T Stop recording e Recording will stop when you reach the punch out OUT point and switch to play back The REC LED will blink e After the post roll time has elapsed playback will stop and you will automatically return to the point specified by the pre roll time Listen to the re recorded results Loop recording When using auto punch in out recording you can switch the Loop function on so that the IN OUT region will be re corded repeatedly as a loop When you are finished recording you can use the Undo Redo function to compare the takes that you recorded and select the best one Loop recording proce
31. 6 Import the file e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key e The display will ask AreYouSure Press the YES OK key to execute the operation e When the operation is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key A The longer the file being imported the longer this oper ation will take until the Completed display appears D Move the time location to the beginning of the song and check that the file was imported correctly Importing a WAV file into the middle of a track Here s how to import a stereo WAV file named D1200_ST WAV from the USB drive and paste it in to tracks 1 and 2 at the TO location the location registered in the TO LOC3 key execute 001 071 0000 Ti Import File Erec 4 Select the Import command Access the TRACK Import tab page 2 Select the import source drive e Select the DriveList button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box e Select U USB DOS and press the YES OK key 3 Select the WAV file that you want to import e Select the WavFileList button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box E D12600 ST w v Cancel D12600_02 WAY Select D1200_ST WAV and press the YES OK key 4 Select the clipboard as the import destination track Set DestTrack to Clip2 The number indicates the number of tracks in the clip board In the case of a mon
32. 8X The disc will be written at 8X speed Quick Start Tutorial If you select Current your mix will be recorded on the same virtual tracks as were played back If you want to keep the data of those virtual tracks after bounce record ing you must select virtual tracks other than Current In order to create an audio CD the D1200 s internal hard disk must have as much free space as is occupied by the song the two channel total you are creating For example in order to create an audio CD of a five minute song you must have enough free space to accommodate ten minutes of monaural recording If the song you write to CD has no silence at the begin ning i e at time zero you may not hear the very begin ning of the song when the CD is played back In such cases insert about half a second of silence at the beginning zero time of the two track mix gt p 58 InsertTrack If you leave TrackMonitor turned on you can monitor the playback without EQ or effects being applied Since some audio CD players will not play CD RW discs we recommend that you use CD R discs to create audio CDs 29 Step 1 Quick recording Step 2 Overdubbing Step 3 Mixing D 2 N 5 lt a 2 7e 30 The Obey Copyright Rules message will appear While the disc is being writ ten you can select the Abort button and press the W
33. By using the Play From and Play To functions you can find a location more accurately Slow Play function Press the SCRUB key to access the Scrub page and press the FF key to play at half speed from the location at which you are currently stopped When you press the STOP key playback will stop and you will return to the previous location Since the audio will play slowly and at one octave below the actual pitch you can use this in conjunction with the Pitch Shifter to learn play along or practice complex phrases that would be difficult to learn at full speed Select the song that you want to copy p 31 In the SONG EditSong tab page move the cursor to EditType and turn the VALUE dial to select Copysong oS 3 Make sure SourceSong indicates the song you want to copy 4 Move the cursor to DestSong and turn the VALUE dial to select the song number where you want the copy of the song to be located 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When AreYouSure appears press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation is completed the display will indi cate Completed Press the YES OK key to close the dialog box Moving a song MoveSong This operation moves the selected song to a different song number e You can use this to change the order of the songs To move a song Execute 6 001 01 000 Te Select the
34. C W EEE Erase silence In an extended recording that contains significant amounts of silence this operation erases the silent regions and divides the areas containing sound into separate events IN OUT Before execution After execution Levels lower than 36 dB will be considered as silence Erase Punch Noise This operation minimizes the blip of noise that occurs at junctions between recording e g punch in out and track editing Set the IN and OUT times slightly before and after the click noise occurs IN OUT Before ii A execution 3 After hor NM execution A WONG oorner aE SS Displays the waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT more precisely p 108 5 Exec Execute e0o0sseooseeoosssossssessssososssessseo Executes the track editing operation EditType Exp CompTrack Expands or compresses the track data from the IN OUT re gion of the source track so that it will fit in the TO END re gion of the destination track and copies it to the destination track the specified number of times amp This operation overwrites the data in the destination track l There is a limit to the ratio of expansion or compression that can occur If the IN OUT region and the TO END region are dramatically different in length an error will occur when you attempt to execute You should keep the ratio of the TO END time and IN OUT time within a ra
35. Format 24 bit S P DIF IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 lt USB gt Connector Type B Format Slave USB 1 1 compliant Supported OS Window Me Windows 2000 or later Mac OS 9 0 4 or later If using the D1200 with Windows 98 please refer to the Korg website or contact your Korg distributor lt MIDI IN OUT gt Connectors DIN 5 pin x 2 lt FOOT SW gt Connector 1 4 phone jack use separately sold PS 1 lt EXPRESSION PEDAL gt Connector 1 4 stereo phone jack use separately sold XVP 10 or EXP 2 lt DC IN gt Connector DIN 7 pin E Included items AC DC power supply Owner s manual E Separately sold options PS 1 pedal switch XVP 10 EXP VOL pedal EXP 2 foot controller CDRW 1 CD R RW drive internal Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice 05 2002 Troubleshooting Messages About the CDRW D1200 specifications Effect Program List Rhythm Pattern List Index Block diagram MIDI implementation chart 153 Effect Program List 154 INSERT EFFECT Preset 28 User128 Pg Categ ProgramName Algorithm EFFI Mode Brit 80 s U S 90 s LOUD 00 S BLUES STEVIE CLASSIC DIST FAT ZONE FUZZ 70 s Reverb Hall Smooth Hall Reverb Wet Plate Reverb Dry Plate Reverb Room Bright Room L C R Delay St Cross Delay St Chorus St Flanger St Phaser St Vibrato St Tremolo St Auto Pan Ensemble St Compressor St Limi
36. HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Sets the gain of High EQ Wah This produces a wah effect It can be controlled using an expres sion pedal FcBtm Frequency Bottom 0 100 Sets the lower limit of the wah center fre quency FcTop Frequency Top sesceseceees 0 100 Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Mode Sweep Mode 000 Auto Pedal Switches between auto wah pedal con trol LFOIMvI LFO Level 00 cessessseseeeees 0 100 Sets the LFO level that is added to con trol Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Sets the LFO speed Reso RESONANCE c ceceseseseseseeeees 0 100 Sets the resonance amount LPR ERE noan m anemone anna Off On Switches the wah low pass filter on and off Mode If you wish to use an expression pedal to control the Wah select Pedal p 141 Filter This is a filter with resonance whose frequency can be moved by an envelope Type Filter Type cccccees LPF BPF HPF Selects the filter type Sens Sensitivity eee 0 100 Sets the sensitivity Attack ANACK assastasigratitncancrnaieen 1 100 Sets the attack level Manual Manual ssescssseeeces 0 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Reso RESONANCE cssescsessseseeeees 0 100 Sets the resonance amount Polrty Polarity sh aihcrtncetienatneninenmamees Sets the polarity AmpSim AmpSimulator This effect simulate
37. If this is On the LOOP key will light Off Playback will occur normally De E 000 00 000 Indicates the beginning of the loop You can set this time by using the STORE key and IN LOC1 key or by using the Wave display EO T E rr ener rete 000 00 000 Indicates the end of the loop You can set this time by using the STORE key and OUT LOC2 key or by using the Wave display Displays the waveform By setting the IN and OUT times while you view the waveform you can make settings more precisely p 109 100 TRIGGER Trigger recording is a function that automatically starts triggers recording when the volume of the input signal ex ceeds the threshold level Trigger Settings for trigger recording Triagerree O000 00 000 2 3 Trigger on Threshold Prelriggerlime gt j lt Record start time l TriggerRec sseessoeessoessoeesooeesoeeseeessoe On Off Switches the trigger recording function on off TriggerRectOn On When in record ready mode recording will begin when the input signal exceeds the threshold level If this is On the TRIGGER key will light Turn TriggerRec On and then press the REC key LED blinking to enter record ready mode When the input signal to a channel whose TRACK STATUS key is set to record exceeds the threshold level record ing will begin automatically Off Trigger recording will not occur
38. MicSimVox87 To EFFECT E E Soft Comp Bore s MIC SIM DYNAMICS 14 gt a2 X os N c SE N m N cs N Xx gt oa ce Ne t O N S N x gt N t O N S lt T XK gt O t N S Insert lin loutx8 Effect Control 72 oe QO Q O O oO fe 142 Appendix Troubleshooting Nothing appears in the display LI L Is the power of the D1200 turned off p 15 Is the contrast adjusted correctly p 16 No sound L LI Is the power of the D1200 or a connected device turned off p 15 Have the MASTER fader or PHONES knob been low ered Has the channel volume level been lowered If you have been using pairing and then switch pairing off or if you have recalled a scene the actual volume level may not match the physical position of the fader Move the fader up or down so that the fader matches the actual volume level and then adjust the fader to an ap propriate level Can t hear the playback LI LI gt Is TRACK STATUS set to PLAY gt p 8 Cue TrackMonitor and CDMonitor are not output from the MASTER OUT jacks Either connect your monitoring system to the MONI TOR OUT jacks or listen through headphones Has solo been turned on so that other tracks are not heard p 39 When using auto punch in out and you are unable t
39. Mix Wet Dry cecceee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Type Selects the decay curve for the early reflection Sets the time length of early reflection Sets the time taken from the original sound to the first early reflection Sets the input level of EQ applied to the effect sound Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds This parameter selects the decay curve for the early reflection Delay DL1 DL6 Category Delay type effects 8 DL1 L C R Delay Time Reverb Time S C 0 1 10 0s Sets the reverberation time HiDamp High Damp ssssse 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200ms Sets the delay time from the dry sound Thru Pre Delay Thru ceeccseees 0 100 Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound EQTrim EQ Trim een ern teeter 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Sets the gain of High EQ Mix Wet Dry uu Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Pre Delay msec Pre Delay Thru The Pre Delay sets the delay time to the reverb input allowing you to control spaciousness Using the Pre Delay Thru parameter you can mix the dry sound without delay emphasizing the attack of the sound This multitap delay
40. Off Send the rhythm to the master LR bus If you choose this Off setting during bounce record ing the rhythm will be recorded If you turn the Rhythm setting Off in the RHYTHM SetUp tab page the rhythm sound will not be sent to any bus regardless of this setting Sends the channels specified by the Level settings to the monitor output During recording you can use this to adjust the monitor volume and pan for comfortable listening without affecting the recording level On Send the signal to monitor output Off Don t send the signal to monitor out put 5 Level Cue Level ccccccccccsssssccccccccsssssscees Adjusts the level and pan for each mixer channel when Cue is turned On Press the Level button to open the Cue settings dia log box and make settings 100 5a Pan Ch1D6 Balance Ch7D1 2 cc000 L63 CNT R63 Adjusts the pan or balance at which the cue signal from each channel will be sent to the monitor output SDH CUG E EEE 000 100 Adjusts the volume at which the cue signal from each channel will be sent to the monitor output 6 Autoln cccccccssssssccccccsssssssccccccseeesees On Off Specifies whether mixer channels whose TRACK STA TUS is REC will monitor the external source assigned in the Input tab page or the playback of the track On Mixer channels whose TRACK STATUS is REC wil
41. Press the track 9 and 10 TRACK STATUS keys to set them to PLAY lit green Press the PLAY key 4 Overdubbing additional parts Next we ll add a vocal on track 3 4 Connect a mic to the INPUT 1 jack 2 Press the MODELING key to enter Modeling mode Use phantom power if you Select MIC as the Modeling Category awe connected a condenser 3 Set the track 3 TRACK STATUS to REC mic When you enter Modeling mode tracks 1 and 2 will be set to REC Press the track 1 and 2 TRACK STATUS keys to set them to PLAY and press the track 3 TRACK STATUS key to set it to REC 4 Adjust the input level recording level and effects to prepare for recording 6 Move to the location at which you want to start recording and start recording Move to time 3 32 Press the FF key or REW key to move to the desired time location Press the REC key and then the PLAY key to start recording When you are done press the STOP key 6 Let s change virtual tracks to record another take Virtual tracks gt p 53 Press the TRACK key to access the Vtr1 6 tab page Select track 3a and turn the VALUE dial to change it to 3b D Move the location again and begin recording Move to the location from which you want to begin recording and If you want to play back a press the REC key and then the PLAY key to begin recording track that you have already Play back tacks recorded set that track s Press the
42. Reverse a track sccncscicnidowsvn 59 TRACK STATUS key 8 TRACK VIEW daisson etas 125 Trigger recording cece 129 TRS PHONE JACKS wines 7 TUNET Gere oeni e 36 95 Turning the power i A EEEE A E E tatty 15 D a AEE EE naueeaavarseaacsies 15 U UNdoro 126 Deleting the Undo data 77 Uy SA ee N 37 Upgrading the system 81 107 VS Barkos aenn EN 77 USB ANVYE canenenarano ai 104 Format the USB drive 107 V IV ALUE Sal shies sntises esis ttebaiettesars 8 W WAV file EXPOEE airone nii 73 1 PO o a Tanl X XLR JACK Appendix poyo Buyooysayqno y sabossay L MYCD a4 ogy suoyooyioads 07 q ist wosBoyg 93443 st Wuayog WYU xapu wnuBpip 01g uoyojuawajdwi qW en wy yay FIWSUEML rg Ge SP pevssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnsssnnnsssnnssnsnnsssneneenessesnecensececeeceeeeeececennneneneneessts 4Idd S i sseneeeseeneessceenssssesessssssssensssessnsssscenesessssnsenss i i l i L l l 3 842944J 4 5SUI 3 ino 31dd S Pawn TOs wuyAu 440740 SSeaAg zZ I SaNOHd OL sesul tr z TuUrgns i 440740 4 GH iy i Tana quunyssj PiT int SOLINOW iit i TII T 23443434 S H AOYTUOHY Tana quunyay D _ oa mor f EJ CSNQAOFTUOLJOL gt Ul aah eel antasay CSNQGUOPTUOPJO gt 304 5 fl NI sI10d S an4 wo a NI abling J i im C og a indang orpny SAG 409 4auny Hy C1499 TUONTI E H
43. Using these settings the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 jacks will be assigned to mixer channels 9 and 10 Press the track 9 10 TRACK STATUS key to select INPUT LED lit orange 4 Use the TRIM knobs to adjust the input level Press the METER TRACK VIEW key Select the button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select PreFaderLev and press the YES OK key Select Displayhode 1 PrePaderLey _PostFaderLey E ST rkViewi 6 OT rkView 12 CT rkViewl 12 EJ PreFde PEHold E 000 09 pet See 6E ooo 4212L RL R As you play the keyboard watch the Ch9 and Ch10 levels and adjust the INPUT 3 and 4 TRIM knobs Set the levels as high as possible without allowing the level meters to reach CLP when you play the keyboard at your loudest level In general you should adjust the TRIM knob so that the peak indi cator the LED near the TRIM knob lights when the maximum input level is reached 6 Set the CHANNEL 9 10 fader to unity gain 0 dB If you are using a stereo input source it will be easier to edit track and effect settings if you select adjacent inputs 1 2 or 3 4 and route them to adja cent mixer channels Use the PHONES LEVEL knob or the MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob to adjust the output volume Quick Start Tutorial 2 Applying an insert effect to the keyboard Access the INSERT EFFECT InsAss tab page SelectEft Type InsertTa Trib
44. You will move to the location of that mark Deleting a mark amp A mark you deleted cannot be recovered by Undo 1 Access the MARK Mark tab page Markiumber _ 001 01 000 Penans pa7 A1 ABB 2 Use MarkNumber to select the mark that you want to delete 3 Select the Delete button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Temm Ta A JGelete Mark BGZ E sclecthl Ves Are You Sure 4 Verify that Delete Mark in the upper left indicates the mark you want to delete and press the YES OK key to delete the mark If you decide not to delete the mark press the NO CANCEL key If you want to delete all marks select the SelectAll button and press the ENTER key Then press the YES OK key to delete all the marks Song and Locate MIDI USB Drive Data paia be Rhythm i a Effects Mixer Upgrading the system 33 34 Naming a mark e Select the Rename button and press the ENTER key to open the RenameMark dialog box For details on the renaming procedure refer to 1 2 Edit ing the name of a song p 31 e When you have finished inputting the name press the YES OK key 2 3 Using the Scrub function to find an exact location By using the Scrub function or the Play From To function you can find the exact location where the sound begins and set a Locate time or Mark more precisely Scrub function This feature allows you to hear
45. and all input channel settings will be set to 1 SubIn will be muted e The BOUNCE RecMode tab page RecMode will be set to Input e TRACK STATUS for track 1 and track 2 will be set to REC and the remaining tracks will be set to PLAY e Inthe INSERT EFFECT InsAss tab page the insert effect assignment will be set to Input In and the effect type will be set to lin2outx2 InsertTo will be set to Inl 1 upper line 1 lower line 2 e The insert effect 1 program will be changed 47 Upgrading the system Effects Mixer i and w gt D 5 MIDI USB Drive Data pata be Rhythm 48 The D1200 contains numerous rhythm patterns in a variety of time signatures gt p 156 Rhythm Pattern List When you have a sudden idea for a song you can record a performance immediately by using these rhythm patterns as a guide track You can also join different rhythm patterns to create drum patterns for an entire song 1 Selecting and playing a rhythm Access the RHYTHM SetUp tab page Use this page to make the settings described below TempoSource geere e 001 01 OOO cs Tempo Beat Manual SelRhythm RhythmVol RhythmOn Off Turning the rhythm on off Select the Rhythm On Off button and press the ENTER key to turn it Rhythm On highlighted The RHYTHM key will light and the currently sel
46. for that signal If solo has been turned On for even one signal the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO key will blink You may select more than one signal for soloing 2 Adjust the monitor volume Use the MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob or PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the volume level To turn solo off e Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Solo tab page and turn the Solo button s Off e If you select the ClearAll button and press the ENTER key all solo settings will be turned off To output the solo signal from master LR You can output the solo signal from MASTER OUT L R if desired Use this when you want to output the solo signal from the monitor system connected to the MAS TER OUT L R jacks e Inthe INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Solo tab page turn the SoloToMstOut button On highlighted However this will automatically be turned Off when you leave the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO page 3 Registering and recalling a scene The current mixer settings can be registered as a scene Scenes can be recalled automatically as the song plays You can also register frequetly used mixer settings for recall as desired re register the recalled settings at a different loca tion or edit some of the settings and overwrite them over the original scene Scenes can be renamed and can be sorted by their order of appearance in a song Up to 100 scenes can be registered in a song The following settings c
47. gt p 86 Refer to Bypass for the insert effect gt p 87 5 Rename wisciccccececececescocesssecscscscseecseddcceccdcswsesccenes Edits the name of the effect program Select the effect program whose name you want to edit press the Rename button to open the dialog box and edit the name You can input a name of up to sixteen characters p 31 l After editing the program name use Store to save it The effect program name you edited will be discarded if you do not use Store to save your program Oe DION G sssesseesnsseceessazvereusesaveseseswssencesteseauecersssctenesis Stores the edited effect program in one of the final effect user memories u033 u064 In the StoreEffect dialog box specify the user area number and use the Exec button or the YES OK key to execute If you decide to cancel press the NO CANCEL key amp Effects are always overwritten O INSERT I EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL RHYTHM TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO METER AUTO IN LOCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB BOUNCE RecMode Select the recording mode inputon fs 9001 01 000 E Select FechHode 1 Select RecMode csccsccccsssses Input Bounce Selects the recording mode Input Normal recording The input analog digital intern
48. jack assigning it to mixer channel 1 and adjusting the levels p 35 2 Access the INSERT EFFECT InsAss tab page E n E001 01 000 a SelectEffType InsertTo Int eta Ing ew ES m 1 int outed ee Inde 3 Ott Ing 4 Ott HinsEtfifInsett2 HInsk tts Insktta tne i 3 Select the Assign button and press the ENTER key Select Input In press the ENTER key and press the YES OK key SelectEf fectassign 4 Select one of the SelectEffType buttons and press the ENTER key to select the effect type Operation SelectEf fectType H linzoutse i lintoutyd ae ES in dsutet 5 Insert the effect between INPUT 1 GUITAR IN and channel 1 e Select the InsertTo button and press the ENTER key Select InsertEffect AssignChannel e For In1 set SelectCh to 1 and then press the YES OK key 6 Select the effect program e Access the INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 tab page e Select EffectNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select an effect program effecttumber E 001 01 000 CEE 1 2 Applying insert effects during playback You can apply insert effects to the playback of previously re corded tracks For the procedure of applying insert effects to the track play back refer to the Quick Start Tutorial p 25 2 Using the master effects To use the master effects set the Send Level of each
49. lt St Phaser DryPlate Reverb Dry Plate DPlate St Vibrato i ReverbRoom Reverb Room ROOM St Tremolo BrightRoom Bright Room BrRoom St AutoPan 5 Ensemble L C R Delay LCRDIy 5 St Cross Delay StDly TN St Ring Modulator St Multitap Delay MtDly S Doppler l St Modulation Delay ModDly M031 SE3 AnalogRecord St Analog Record Record St Dynamic Delay DyDly M032 SE4 TalkingMod Talking Modulator TalkMd St Auto Panning Delay PanDly Effect Program List Rhythm Pattern List Block diagram Index MIDI implementation chart 155 For Beat settings other than 3 4 4 4 and 6 8 only Blank Metro and HiHat can be selected For Beat settings of 3 4 4 4 and 6 8 the following rhythm patterns can be selected in addition to Blank Metro and HiHat I F and E indicate Intro Fill and Ending patterns The Length and Tempo values in this list are the number of measures in each rhythm and the recommended tempo Rhythm Pattern List 21 5patterns RhythmName Length Tempo RhythmName Length Tempo RhythmName Length Tempo RhythmName Length Tempo 3 4 13 pattern F 8beat 2 1 120 R amp Funk 1 4 98 House 1 4 130 3 4 4 150 F 8beat 3 1 120 R amp Funk 2 1 98 House 2 4 130 1 3 4 7 150 E 8beat 1 5 120 R amp
50. lt Mixer section gt Structure Signal processing Equalizer Scene memories lt Effect section gt Structure Signal processing Programs Algorithms Effects 152 transmission reception MTC transmission reception MIDI Clock transmission 16 channel input 4 bus 1 AUX 1 master 32 bit 44 1 kHz HIGH f 10 kHz G 15 dB MID f 0 1 20 kHz G 15 dB LOW f 100 Hz G 15 dB 100 scene per song Insert x 8 maximum Master x 2 maximum Final x 1 All usable simultaneously 44 bit 44 1 kHz Insert 128 preset 128 user Master 32 preset 32 user Final 32 preset 32 user 98 106 lt General gt Display Power supply Power consumption Dimensions Weight 240 x 64 pixel LCD with backlight Included AC DC power supply 19 W D1200 only 23 W with CDRW 1 installed 400 mm W x 268 mm D x 77 mm H 15 75 W x 10 55 D x 3 03 H including protrusions 2 9 kg 6 39 lbs D1200 only 3 3 kg 7 28 lbs with CDRW 1 installed E Principal specifications Frequency response 10 Hz 20 kHz 1 dB 4 dBu 10 kQ load S N Dynamic range THD_N A D conversion D A conversion Sampling frequency 95 dB typical IHF A 95 dB typical IHF A 0 02 typical 20 Hz 20 kHz 16 dBu 10 kQ load 24 bit 64 times oversampling 24 bit 128 times oversampling 44 1 kHz E Analog digital input and output specifications lt INPUT 1 2 gt Connectors Input impe
51. to access the Sub input setting screen gt p 98 e Turn the M Mute button Off for the inputs to which your sound module or effect processor is connected e Select the Fader icon and turn the VALUE dial to raise the value so that the audio signal will be input e If your input source is monaural select the Stereo Mono button and press the ENTER key to select Mono so that the audio signal will be sent to both Land R buses MIDI USB Drive Data oon be Rhythm i a Effects Mixer pins m Upgrading the system 67 68 Whenever you switch songs or turn off the power the D1200 s Auto Save function will automatically save to the hard disk the songs or parameters that you recorded or ed ited This means that you do not need to perform any particular operations to save your data You do need to save the effect settings if you have edited effect programs The data saving operations explained in this section are used when you have created important data on the D1200 that you want to save ona CD R RW or your computer or when you want to delete data from the hard disk to obtain more free space If you want to save data to your computer you must first save the data on the USB drive of the internal hard disk and then save that data on your computer You can save the following data e Song data e Effect user data e WAV files audio files in WAV format l Creating an audio
52. touch pitch bend velocity or note number data will control the effect Connect the MIDI OUT of an external MIDI device to the D1200 s MIDI IN connector and transmit the appro priate MIDI data from the external MIDI device to con trol the effect CC Control Change 000 119 A MIDI control change number will control the effect Connect the MIDI OUT of an external MIDI device to the D1200 s MIDI IN connector and transmit the appro priate MIDI control change message from the external MIDI device to control the effect 4 Ass CtriChgAssign ExpOff InsEff1 4 Selects the insert effect that will be controlled The insert effect you select here will be controlled by the specified Device ExpOff No insert effect will be controlled InsEff1 InsEff2 InsEff3 InsEff4 Insert effect 1 2 3 or 4 will be controlled respectively l If the effect program you are using does not have a con trol function the effect will not be controlled p 127 MIDI MIDI settings a 001 01 009 A O OUN On the D1200 you can use MIDI to do the following things Control effects gt p 44 87 Synchronize with a sequencer or other MIDI device gt p 51 Switch scenes p 39 Use control changes to control mixer parameters GlobalCh GlobalChannel 006 01 16 Specifies the global MIDI channel If the D1200 is connected via MIDI to an external MIDI device the D1200
53. vidually Ratio Threshold dB Gain Adjust dB This parameter sets the signal compression Ratio Compression is applied only when the signal level exceeds the Threshold value In the case of the limiter applying compression will lower the over all level so you should use Gain Adjust to make adjustments Attack Release These parameters set the attack time and release time A higher attack time will cause the compression to be applied more slowly Side PEQ Insert Side PEQ Cutoff Hz Q Gain dB These parameters are used to set the EQ applied to the trigger sig nal The Limiter determines whether the compression is applied or not based on the post EQ trigger signal Setting the equalizer allows you to set the Limiter to respond to any frequency band Trigger Monitor Setting this parameter On will cause the trigger signal to be out put instead of the effect sound Use this parameter to check the trig ger signal with EQ applied Usually set this to Off 23 DY3 Multiband Limiter This effect applies the Limiter to the low range mid range and high range of the input signal You can control dynamics for each range to adjust the sound pressure of the low range mid range and high range in a different way from the EQ Polarity This parameter reverses the Gate on off operation With a negative value the gate is closed when the input signal level exceeds the Thre
54. 1 If you selected two or more tracks for SourceTrack you must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track 6 Select the copy destination V track Set Dest VTrack to V track b 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Inthe TRACK Vtr1 6 tab page select V track b for track 1 Check the results of the operation Play back the song from the beginning to verify that the data was copied as you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 In this case return the track 1 V track selection to a Exchange two entire tracks SwapWholeTrack This command exchanges an entire track of recorded data from the beginning to the end with another track e You can exchange one or more tracks in a single opera tion This can be used in ways such as the following e Rearrange recorded tracks to organize them by type e Rearrange data that extends across differing V tracks so that each track uses for example V track a Swapping an entire track Here s how to swap track 1 with the V track a that is currently selected for track 2 Execute 3 001 01 000 E H SwapwholeTrack
55. 1 Connect your guitar Set the INPUT 1 TRIM knob to the minimum position and connect Connection diagram p 14 your guitar to the GUITAR IN jack 2 Connect your headphones to the PHONES jack Step 3 Mixing 2 Turning on the power 1 Connect the AC DC power supply Connect the included AC DC power supply to the DC IN jack Turning the power on gt p 15 Connect the included power cable to the AC DC power supply Connect the power cable to an electrical outlet 2 Set the MASTER fader to the co position 3 Press the POWER key to turn on the power Ko RG Wersion 1 00 Step 4 Mastering 17 3 Creating a new song In order to begin recording you must first create a new blank song 4 Press the SONG key to access the SelSong tab page selectTimeDisp k 001 01 000 Ee SONG i BA DemoSong l H Tempo Manu 128 agag Metrod 2 Use the CURSOR keys to select the New button and press the ENTER key The MakeNewSong dialog box will appear MakeNew Song OK s SongType MixerSet Cancel eee 16Bit 12 Track ean eee 24Bit 6Track ean PreySondg 3 Specify the bit depth number of tracks and the mixer settings for the song that will be created Use the SongType buttons to select the bit depth and number of SongType MixerSet tracks and press the ENTER key Select the MixerSet setting in p 116 the same wa
56. 5 Edit the file name If you want to edit the file name select the Rename button and press the ENTER key Edit the file name in the RenameFile dialog box p 31 If an identically named file already exists on the USB drive you will be unable to save You will need to re name the file If you select all effects EffAll the name of the current ly selected song will be used as the file name of the effect user data file 6 Execute the backup e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key A screen will ask you for confirmation Data Een Backup User Are YouSure Control MOT A Sune MMC Je ORs Dieko e You can specify the date and time that the file was created Select the Date button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box use the cursor to select the date or time that you want to set and use the VALUE dial to specify the date and time e When you press the YES OK key backup will begin 2 2 Restoring effect user data Restoring If you are restoring from a CD R RW disc insert the disc in the CD R RW drive execute 001 01 000 H Restore RVI_REVEDFI 2 Select Restore In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to select Restore You can also select the button and press the ENTER key to display Select Backup Restore Type and make your selection
57. CD will not save the parameter set tings that were used to create the songs To save this da ta you must back it up Data saving procedure and the types of data that can be saved Data save method File type CD R RW USB drive 1 song All user effects BackupAllSongs_ All songs All user effects Backup 1Song Insert Master or Final user effect WAV format file I GO aa BackupUserData luser effects a ao Filename extension of the file saved on the USB drive Data save method File type Backup1 Song All user effects Insert User Data Ins001 Ins128 WAV Export sid WAV format file 1 Backing up and restoring song data 1 1 Backing up song data You can back up song data in two ways Backup1Song Back up the selected song BackupAllSongs Back up all songs only to CD R RW e Effect user data will also be saved e A backed up song cannot be played back directly In order to play the song you must Restore it Backing up to CD R RW Here s how to back up all songs to one or more CD R RW discs amp No further data can be stored on a CD R RW disc that has been used for backup A CD R RW discs created by the backup operation are not in ISO9660 format This data cannot be read by a computer or played back by a CD player Insert a CD R RW disc into the CD R RW drive You must use a blank empty disc If you want to erase existing data from a CD RW disc to make it blank fol low the
58. Clock Real Time Command Local On Off Aux All Notes Off Messages Active Sense Epa Bini Reset Notes 1 Received if MMC Mode Receive is selected in SYSTEM USB MMC 6 Transmitted received for mixer control when ControlChange is 2 Transmitted if MTC Mstr is selected in SYSTEM USB Sync enabled in SYSTEM USB MIDI 3 Transmitted if Clock Mstr is selected in SYSTEM USB Sync 7 Transmitted received if ProgChange is enabled in SYSTEM USB MIDI 4 Received if MIDIClock is selected for SelectRecTempoTrackType in 8 Transmitted if MMC Mode Transmit is selected in SYSTEM USB MMC RHYTHM TmpTrk and tempo is being recorded 9 Received if MIDISync Mode MTC Slave is selected in 5 Received to control effects when selected in SYSTEM USB Control SYSTEM USB Sync Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be use
59. D1200 s own unique format it cannot be edited on your computer In order to use this effect data you must restore it to the D1200 WAV files WAV format audio files This is audio track data that was copied to the clipboard 1 Saving data to your computer l Do not format the D1200 s hard disk from your compu ter The hard disk may be formatted only by the D1200 itself In order to use the D1200 with Windows 98 you must install a device driver For details on obtaining and installing the device driver refer to the Korg website www korg com The computer screen will differ depending on your sys tem The screens shown here are for Windows XP Windows users Windows Me 2000 or later 1 Use a USB cable to connect the D1200 to your computer Connect the USB cable from your computer to the D1200 s USB connector Make sure that the connector is oriented correctly and press it all the way in l Before you make connections turn on your computer and start up the operating system 2 Access the USB Mode screen execute 001 01 000 gt CheckDrive 5 HEC USB Mode In the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page select USB Mode and press the ENTER key Upgrading MIDI E Drive Data paia be Rhythm i a Effects Mixer r and w the system 78 l Do not disconnect the USB cable or turn your computer on off while this screen is displayed 3 A drive named
60. Depth ascdvcsvaivesvaiviovinaves 0 100 Sets the pitch variation of the moving sound Pan Pan De pih sccssiaicvsctuswcsrenncsns 100 100 Sets the panning of the moving sound 132 Mix Wet Dry cce Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Pitch Depth With the Doppler effect the pitch is raised when the sound approaches and the pitch is lowered when the sound goes away This parameter sets this pitch variation Pan Depth This parameter sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound With larger values the sound seems to come and go from much further away With positive values the sound moves from left to right with negative values the sound moves from right to left 30 SE3 St Analog Record Stereo Analog Record This effect simulates the noise caused by scratches and dust on analog records It also reproduces some of the modulation caused by a warped turntable RPM Speed RPM 00 33 1 3 45 78 Sets the r p m of a record Wah Flutter sccthicaniaatanncanesnernisnaanienencten 0 100 Sets the modulation depth NsDens Noise Density 0ece 0 100 Sets the noise density NsTone Noise Tone ceseeeees 0 100 Sets the noise tone NsLvl Noise Level scseseeseceen 0 100 Sets the noise level CIKLvI Click Level ccccsccsseeeeees 0 100 Sets the click noise level EQTrim EQ Trim axcccsstotasstrenccansneesinvaces 0 100 Sets the EQ
61. For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 3 DOSING K sc teases sp cccoereseree 1 12 1 2 11 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the swap destination track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 7 WOVE Sane eee Re AN Displays the waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT more precisely p 108 5 Exec Executte cccccccccscccsscsccccscsccccsccsccceees Executes the track editing operation EditType ReverseTrack Copies the IN OUT region of the reverse source track data to the TO location of the reverse destination track in reverse end for end You can specify the number of times that the data will be copied When you execute this operation the copied region will be reversed and will play backward when you play back This operation will overwrite the data in the destination region IN OUT SourceTrack l ABC TIMES loners To Py DestTrack 2 SONGS WICK aeren satesestets ton cesseceeseascce 1 12 1 2 11 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the reverse source track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 3 DOSE QCM eera 1 12 1 2 11 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the reverse destination track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 A TiMes cccccsscccsssccscscccccccccccccccccccceeees 1 99 Specifies the number of times that the reverse
62. Funk 3 2 98 House 3 4 130 F 3 4 1 150 E 8beat 2 3 120 R amp Funk 4 4 98 House 4 4 130 E 3 4 4 150 E 8beat 3 3 120 R amp Funk 5 4 98 I House 1 4 130 JazzWaltz1 8 150 16bt Rock1 4 100 R amp Funk 6 2 98 I House 2 8 130 JazzWaltz2 8 150 16bt Rock2 4 100 R amp Funk 7 2 98 F House 1 1 130 JazzWaltz 4 150 1 16bt Rock 5 100 I R amp Funk 1 2 98 F House 2 1 130 FJJazzWaltz 2 150 1 16bt Rock2 4 100 R amp Funk 2 4 98 E House 1 3 130 E JazzWaltz 5 150 F 16bt Rocki 1 100 R amp Funk 3 2 98 E House 2 6 130 Waltz 8 150 F 16bt Rock2 1 100 F R amp Funk 1 1 98 Jungle 1 8 160 I Waltz 8 150 E 16bt Rocki 6 100 F JR amp Funk 2 1 98 Jungle 2 8 160 F Waltz 2 150 E 16bt Rock2 4 100 F JR amp Funk 3 1 98 I JJungle 8 160 E Waltz 4 150 16beat 1 2 100 E R amp Funk 1 1 98 F Jungle 1 1 160 6 8 14 pattern 16beat 2 2 100 E JR amp Funk 2 2 98 F Jungle 2 1 160 6 8 Var1 4 120 16beat 3 4 100 E R amp Funk 3 4 98 E Jungle 6 160 6 8 Var2 2 120 16beat 4 2 100 Jazz 1 8 100 Techno 1 4 130 6 8 Var3 4 120 16beat 5 4 100 Jazz 2 8 100 Techno 2 4 130 6 8 Var4 8 120 16beat 6 4 100 l Jazz 8 100 Techno 3 4 130 6 8 Var5 8 120 1 16beat 1 4 100 F Jazz 1 1 100 Techno 4 2 130 1 6 8 1 5 120 1 16beat 2 5 100 F Jazz 2 1 100 Techno 5 2 130 1 6 8 2 5 120 1 16beat 3 4 100 E Jazz 8 100 I Techno 1 4 130 1 6 8 3 8 120 F 16beat 1 1 100 Motown 4 120 l Techno 2 4 130 F 6 8 1 2 120 F 16beat 2 1 100 l Motown 4 120 l Techno 3 4 130 F 6 8 2 1 120 F 16beat 3
63. H DeleteTrack 1 Esec e fr ah EotT ek f import A Erot DestTrack Register the IN and OUT times gt p 33 118 Select DeleteTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose DeleteTrack 3 Select the track number from which data will be deleted Use DestTrack to select track 1 4 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation eS Operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key 6 Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the IN location to verify that the operation did what you expected If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 Reverse a track Reverselrack This command copies the data in the specified region IN OUT of the track in reverse i e so that the data will play backward and places it at the TO location either in the same track or in another track e The data of the IN OUT region can be copied one or more times in succession by a single operation e You can copy just one track or multiple tracks of data at the same time Copying track data in reverse Here s how the IN OUT region of track 1 can be copied in revers
64. HighGain The parameters are the same as for ODHIG 89 MN2 Compressor2 The parameters are the same as for Comp2 90 MN3 Limiter The parameters are the same as for Lmtr 91 MN4 Gate Polrty Q Polarity sscisnncazspinsesenstinrsctnenes Switches between non reversed and reversed Gate on off Thrshl Threshold sccscsseeesees 0 100 Sets the level to which the Gate is applied Attack G Attack cccccsseseeeeees 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release csssssenseeneen 1 100 Sets the release time 92 MN5 Exciter2 The parameters are the same as for Excit2 93 MN6 Parametric 4band EQ Fc1 Band1 Cutoff Hz 20Hz 1 0KHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Q1 Q erreren 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G1 Gain AB csisesisccsntsciemietens 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 1 Fc2 Band2 Cutoff Hz 300Hz 10 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 OE 0 arina 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G2 Gain dB srtiwincidvusdileciven 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 2 Fc3 Band3 Cutoff Hz 300Hz 10 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 3 QI Q aieiaa ai 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 G3 Gain GB i wiidetiotvwineiiin 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 3 Fc4 Band4 Cutoff Hz 500Hz 20 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 4 Q4 Q aissis 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 G4 Gain dB sseceeeece
65. Moving to a registered Locate time When you press any of the IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 or END LOC4 keys you will immedi ately move to the location regestered to that key Using a Mark to move to a new location in the song You can register up to 100 marks at desired locations throughout your song and jump instantly to a registered mark You can give a name to each mark and use it to remember a certain place within the song Up to 100 marks can be registered in each song Registering a mark 1 Move to the location where you want to register a mark Use the counter or the FF REW keys to move 2 Press the STORE key to memorize the current location Meam co Fata ie 5 Ime HaT 61 BRE toredTime H WPress LOc MARK or SCENE 3 Press the MARK key to register a mark at the memo rized location Registration is completed as soon as you press the key Marks are automatically renumbered according to their playback order CE fe ee ap T a Al Be 2 Stored ToMark Even while the song is playing or recording you can memorize the current location and register it as a mark The time at which you pressed the STORE key will be registered Moving to a registered Mark time 1 Access the MARK Mark tab page Markiumber E 001 01 000 fenan 97 81 ABB 2 Use MarkNumber to select a mark 8 Select the Recall button and press the ENTER key to recall the mark
66. Set the CHANNEL 1 and CHANNEL 2 faders to unity gain 0 dB Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page Select the MasterLR button and press the ENTER key to turn it On highlighted Slowly raise the MASTER fader and make sure that you hear the sound of your guitar from the headphones Dial up your settings for the modeling effects Return to the Modeling mode page either by pressing the MODE LING key While you listen to the sound in your headphones or monitors use the three modeling knobs to adjust the DRIVE TONE and CABINET settings to obtain the desired sound GUITAR EFFECT O DRIVE O LEVEL O NF oe Ha BEE Quick Start Tutorial Use the PHONES LEVEL knob or the MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob to adjust the output volume To allow a stereo effect to be heard in stereo turn the PAN1 knob to the far left and the PAN2 knob to the far right To tune your guitar gt p 36 Using the tuner 19 Step 1 Quick recording Step 2 Overdubbing Step 3 Mixing Step 4 Mastering 20 5 Sctinguscrkytim U UUTUUS Here s how to make rhythm settings so that you can listen to a rhythm pattern while you record 4 Press the RHYTHM key In the RHYTHM Setup tab page turn the Rhythm button On highlighted The RHYTHM key will light Raise the MASTER fader and you will hear the rhythm Temposource Tempo Beat g
67. System Error AE Timeout Tempo Fast _ When recording tempo recording failed because the tempo was too fast Ifyouare recording MIDI clock slow down the tempo of your sequencer or other MIDI output device Ifyou are recording tap tempo tap a little slower Tempo Slow _ When recording tempo recording failed because the tempo was too slow If you are recording MIDI clock set the tempo of your se quencer or other MIDI output device to J 40 or higher If you are recording tap tempo tap a little faster Tolime gt EndTime The operation cannot be executed because there is a mis take in the TO and END settings you made for the Exp CompTrack track editing command This will appear if TO is later than END or if they are at the same time Change the TO and END time to the correct settings Track Full When writing an audio CD the number of tracks songs exceeded 99 Write tonew CD media Unsupported File Type When importing a WAV file you attempted to import a file that was not in 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit 44 1 kHz monau ral stereo format Select a 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit 44 1 kHz monaural stereo format file Write CD Failed Failed while writing to CD Lower the speed at which you are attempting to write to the CD R RW Use media that is recommended for your drive Refer to the CD RW section of Troubleshooting gt g
68. Tweed 1x12T Tweed 1x12B Black 1x12V Vox 2x12B Black 2x12V Vox 2x12C ClassicA 4x10T Tweed 4x12C Classic 4x12V Vintage 4x12M Modern FullR FullRange Gate Thrshl Threshold cccsscssceeeees 0 127 Attack Attack iycecscseosis cece oacnisoateaccs ess 1 100 Relse Release csscssesseeneen 1 100 Respo Response secseeeeees 1 100 DeEss Deesser Sets the level at which the effect begins to apply Sets the attack time Sets the release time Sets the speed at which the effect will respond to change in the input This effect attenuates unwanted sibilants in a vocal signal Sense Sensitivity cecessceeeeeees 0 100 Fe Side Band EQ fc 006 500 20 0kHz Q Side Band EQ Q c cesses 0 5 10 Gain Side Band EQ Gain 18 180B Ratio Ratio ccccscee 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Thrsh Threshold CB 000 40 0dB Attek Attack ccccasseesseaaticeacieniatioarcan 1 100 Relse Release csscsssseeneen 1 100 Level Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Cho FIl Chorus Flanger Sets the sensitivity Sets the center frequency of the side band EQ Sets the bandwidth of the side band EQ Sets the gain of the side band EQ Sets the signal compression ratio Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Sets the attack time Sets the release time Sets the output gain This effect gives a sense of pitch movement
69. Verify that the tempo map was inserted correctly e Display the tempo map list and check the tempo map ai G61 G04 120 G4 edRSbt Rocki LAIR Cancel Overwriting a tempo map If you want to add a tempo map to replace the rhythm pattern turn off the Insert button when you create the new tempo map Operation The tempo map of the specified measure s will be replaced but the overall number of measure will not change Verify the location at which you want to insert a tempo map e Display the tempo map list and check the current tempo map BG1 BO1 G04 120 B4 odsbt Rocki j Cancel 2 Create the new tempo map e Select the NEW button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box e Set the parameters Select TempoMapee4 Param Hi Tempo 128 l2 L11 Meas Beat 84 64 Rhythm GiSbt Focki e Turn the Insert button Off and press the YES OK key 3 Verify that the tempo map was replaced as you expected e Display the tempo map list and check the tempo map H01 B61 8e4 120 A4pradi bt Rocki d a B12 812 120 84 b4dsbt Rocki H gi B13 820 120 84 04 Sbt Rocks Deleting a tempo map The maps located after the deleted map will move for ward by the number of measures that were deleted 1 Select the tempo map that you want to delete e Display the tempo map list and select the appropri ate tempo map H01 B61 be4 126 Agpradi bt Rocki B
70. a J iry i FINNI E pamm i etl uta 5 Ho Enan T z gt ZH WIL 5 5 hS HE ma o mm 0 a O mlo U ae Asp CEDI WOLNYHd Y i I Bsseeenl 107 a8 lt i i UY cuBTssyug gt aid SHS N TA Ez Tinan CO cs el es T l 149 pul tae ie a iN co gp ee b cuygAyA aal al 41 ztat Ta o PpP u Him 4 uu Puox 9y4 4ST OP4eH I o SS Peu TENIAN 2 I x js I9NbP HE TdT o n o nj e H 3 S uJ H 159 Digital Recording Studio Model D1200 MIDI Implementation Chart Date 2002 4 30 epee Basic Default Channel Changed Memorized Messages Altered kook ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok Note 127 Number True Voice kook ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok ok Velocity Note On Note Off Aftertouch Polyphonic Key Monophonic Channel Pitch Bend g x x x x O 5 Effect control reception only All control numbers 000 119 are received Mixer control transmission reception 07 Fader O Pan EffSend1 2 Auxsend 16 19 20 25 Eq Low Mid MidFc Hi 68 71 72 77 InEq Low Mid MidFc Hi 80 81 82 83 Subln Lev Bal Mono Mute 86 87 MstEff1 RetLev RetBal 88 89 MstEff2 RetLev RetBal 94 ChannelPair Function Master fader Program Change Variable Range 7 Scene numbers 1 100 System Exclusive Oeog Te meee Quarter frame 9 Received transmitted only for 30 frame non drop System Song Position Common Song Select Tune Control Change O 6 O 5 6 O O System
71. a N 101 Pola eraon aes 101 areant eee ne EAE AOA AAST 75 G Global MIDI channel 101 H Hard disk NN a septa beso actin daha sp nneeeec 75 OLN xs secvconctasusndatvenesnceaenmaneenen 75 Format All eeeesereereereses 107 Headphone output cceeeee 100 Kolere 12 Mare Meses 66 93 W EOC Teuna 118 In outplayback vessesosssssasncrosonseesciers 118 INPUT OUTPUT SOLO key 98 Inputting audio s sesessssessseseeeese 35 Insert Effect oo ccccccceeeeeeees 42 85 Struct ft eneren 85 L LOCI Orana ence eee eee 31 Locate functions ccccccceee 118 LOCE KEY cxecccnces incre eeantacasansees 33 OOD saranoina 123 Play batKkicssciassp amaaa 56 RECORCIINS banans 55 M Manual punch in out 101 Manual TEIN DO sissesnzcesscgsassiesensinaseses 49 IV VAM rreran 33 101 119 MARE ROY crupina 9 Wa SUC ENE A EAE A EE TA 102 Master effect ccccecccesssesssseeeees 43 89 MASTER fadet sscsvesscssoncnncedceoisdasseass 8 Master L R meter cceeeeeees 125 Master track cccccsssesssseeeeeeeeeeees 28 Mastering neiere 28 Metronome sscccecceceeeeeeeeeeeees 95 IN RIOT a 79 101 MIDI ClO CK viacsicdsdsisietivcrnettacasawetece 97 MIDI indicator ccccccccccceeeeeees 8 MIDI messages sais iantvetesseuonitgentes 79 IVR a EEEE TST 35 37 Mixer channel secere 35 MINN E iesta 25 PIN ara 79 102 Modeling effect ccc cesses 45 D a a EIA ee N ET 46 Model
72. a scene 25 MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND key Use this key to select and edit effect programs for master effects 1 and 2 and to set the send level from each chan nel to the master effects This key is also used to set the send level to an external effect gt p 45 89 These settings can be registered in a scene Send settings can also be paired 26 FINAL EFFECT key Use this key to select and edit effect programs for the final effect gt p 43 91 27 BOUNCE key Use this key to make recorder settings such as selecting the recording source and the bounce record method p 64 92 28 CD key Use this key to create an audio CD p 65 93 Introduction In order to use this key the CORW 1 CD R RW drive option sold separately must be installed p 149 29 INPUT OUTPUT SOLO key Use this key to select the mixer channel to which the audio signal from each input jack will be input gt p 98 This key is also used to adjust the EQ applied to the ana log inputs for recording It is also used to solo channels send and returns When solo is on the LED will blink Additionally this key lets you select the audio signal for monitor output and specify the phase of each channel 30 SYSTEM USB key This key lets you make various settings for the foot switch and MIDI to manage the disk and to perform backup and restore your data p 101 You can also connect your computer to the D1200 via the USB
73. a scene the current position of the fader may differ from the value registered in the scene When you select the parameter for which you want to resolve this discrepancy a symbol will be displayed to indicate the difference between the internal value and the fader position Fader The fader is more than 51 steps above the internal value The fader is 21 50 steps above the internal value The fader is 1 20 steps above the internal value The fader matches the internal value The fader is 1 20 steps below the internal value The fader is 21 50 steps below the internal value The fader is more than 51 steps below the internal value te Pan The pan knob is more than 51 steps to the left of the internal value The pan knob is 21 50 steps to the left of the internal value The fader knob is 1 20 steps to the left of the internal value The fader knob matches the internal value The fader knob is 1 20 steps to the right of the inter nal value The fader knob is 21 50 steps to the right of the internal value The fader knob is more than 51 steps to the right of the internal value 100 Recalls the mixer settings of the scene to the current time location p 120 Master Level ssccccsssccsssccccsees 000 127 Indicates the level of the master fader If the level is at unity gain this will indicate I B This indicator will appear if the para
74. a sound and view that sound s waveform to find a location within the song 1 Press the SCRUB key to access the Scrub page 3 Ediingasong UUU Songs you have recorded can be copied duplicated delet ed or arranged in a different order You can also protect a song to keep it from being accidentally deleted Song editing operations cannot be undone by the Undo function 3 1 Song editing operations Copying a song CopySong This operation copies the selected song to the song number you specify e You can use this to create alternative mixes or arrange ments of the same song To copy a song ack el es execute 3 007 01 000 B Lal 2 Use TrackSelect to select the track that you want to play 3 Select Loc and turn the VALUE dial to search for the location while you listen to the sound The track audio will play as you rotate the VALUE dial Play From function Press the SCRUB key to access the Scrub page and then press the PLAY key The sound will begin playing from the current location After two seconds it will stop and automatically return to the location where you were stopped Play To function Press the SCRUB key to access the Scrub page and then hold down the STOP key and press the PLAY key The sound will begin playing from two seconds ear lier than the current location and will stop playing when it reaches the location where you were stopped
75. a wide range from low to high that is ideal for most instru ments Pc Cn A simulation of a small condenser mic for instruments It has a distinctive high range and is ideal for drum overdubs and for acoustic guitar Whale A simulation of a dynamic mic with clarity and a sense of power Ideal for drum sounds Vo Cn A simulation of a standard studio condenser mic that is ideal for vocals acoustic instruments and narrations Vo Tb A simulation of a vintage tube mic that is ideal for vocals BDr Dy A simulation of a fairly large dynamic mic that is ideal for bass drum sounds etc that include the sense of air pressure charac teristic of a close mic recording Set This switches the location of the mic Close or On settings will simulate the proximity effect that boosts the low range so you will need to use Trim to adjust the overall level 137 Insert 1in2outx2 Insert 2in2outx2 Insert 2in2outx2 Master Final Effect Insert 1in outx4 Insert 1in1 outx8 Effect Control Modeling effects Final Insert lin loutx4 These algorithms can be selected for an insert effect when linloutx4 is selected as Select Eff Type Different effects can be used simultaneously on four channels tracks Effects MM1 MM33 connect two mono effects in series Example Algorithm number Category number Algorithm name Names of effects in the chain 55 MM1 P4EQ Exciter P4
76. and dry sounds Formant Shift This parameter adjusts the frequency level to which the effect is applied If you wish to apply the effect to a higher range sound set this parameter to a higher value to apply the effect to a lower range sound set this to a lower value Resonance This parameter sets the intensity of resonance for the voice pattern A larger value will add more character to the sound Effect Parameter List Insert 2in2outx2 Final These algorithms can be selected for an insert effect if 2in2outx2 is selected for Select Eff Type They can also be selected for a final effect Large size LS LS7 Category Large size effects 32 LS1 St Graphic 7band EQ Stereo Graphic 7band EQ This is a stereo 7 band graphic equalizer The bar graph of the gain setting for each band gives you a clear visual idea of fre quency responses You can select a center frequency setting for each band from twelve types according to the sound Type Type 1 Wide1 2 Wide2 3 Wide3 Selects a combination of center frequen 4 HalfW1 5 HalfW2 6 HalfW3 cies for each band 7 Low 8 WideLo 9 Mid 10 WideM 11 High 12 WideHi Trim Trim rancesin teieiatrttoanenahnseats 0 100 Sets the input level B1 Band1 B cccsosiscssssesscenceneniats 18 418 Sets the gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 dB iscsisisiiaitncsraniaets 18 418 Sets the gain of Band 2 B3 Band3 B session scinuevudiincs 18 418 Sets the gai
77. and Seconds or Minutes To change the current time location move the cursor to a counter value and use the VALUE dial to change the value gt p 32 If the counter display is set to Free the time will be displayed as absolute time MSM in the STORE MARK SCENE A PUNCH LOOP and SCRUB pages This lets you apply an effect to a guitar bass or mic connect ed to the GUITAR IN jack or INPUT 1 jack and begin re cording Category Select an effect category 1 Select Modeling Effect Category sssccssees Guitar Bass Mic Selects either guitar bass or mic as the type of modeling effect to be used Move the cursor to the desired category and press the ENTER key The effects of the selected category will appear and you will enter Modeling mode Medlingl UUU UUU As an example here are the settings that will appear if you select a Guitar modeling effect 1 Return to the effect category select screen and exit Mod eling mode The MODELING key LED will go dark 2 Select DRIVE scziteetssteerieee eee ees 10 types TubeOD ClassicDist FatDist MetalDist Seattle Big Fuzz TopBoost US HiGain BritStack Direct Selects the type of distortion Turn the knob located below DRIVE to select the desired type You can also select the type by moving the cursor to DRIVE and turning the VALUE dial 3 Select Tube Type ccsccssscessceees 000 100 Adju
78. and delay For mics you can use studio simu lators with six types of room size and resonance seven types of mic simulation ranging from vintage tube mics to modern studio condenser mics and three dynamics type effects When using Modeling mode the Auto Routing function lets you record immediately by simply selecting the desired track Three independent effect systems for simultaneous use The D1200 contains three independent effects system all of which use 44 bit internal processing Insert Mas ter and Final effects The settings for each of the insert master and final effects can be saved as one of the 192 user effect programs Each program can combine up to five of the 98 available high quality effect types Internal memory contains 128 insert 32 master and 32 final effect programs for a total of 192 preset programs all created by professional musicians and studio engineers You can also edit a preset program and save your own settings effect program in one of the 192 user areas An external MIDI controller or expression pedal sepa rately sold EXP 2 or XVP 10 can also be used to control the insert effect in realtime Sophisticated editing functionality The D1200 lets you use the non destructive editing func tions available only on digital recorders to edit your sound without impairing its pristine quality You can use auto or manual punch in out recording Using the convenient Undo and Redo feature as many as 99 of t
79. and depth to the sound Adjusting the delay time will change the effect signifi cantly DTime Delay Time 0 0 0 50 0ms LFO LFO Waveform TRI SIN Speed LFO Frequency 0 02 20 0Hz Depth Depth iy iccuteeessesseusacitweawnnats 0 100 Fdback Feedback see 100 100 Trim EQ Trim eaten eee eee erere nee eres 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15qB HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15qB Mode Output Mode Normal Invert Sets the delay time Selects LFO Waveform Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the feedback amount Sets the EQ input level Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger Effect Parameter List Mix Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Output Mode Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds When this is set to Invert the phase will be inverted for the right channel of the chorus flanger to create a simulated stereo effect producing a more spacious feeling Treml Tremolo LFO LFO Waveform TRI SIN Vintage Up Down Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Depth Depth Peereecmereeer eer meaner 0 100 Mix Wet Dry 00 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Phaser LFO LFO Waveform ccscsee TRI SIN Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Manual Manual
80. and press the ENTER key a dialog box f will appear To input a parameter value select the desired value in the dialog box Hew E in the display d Toggle button Scroll buttons Use these to see parameters that are not currently shown This type of button will switch a function on off each time you select it and press the ENTER key The frame will become thicker when selected GTM On L_ Rhythm off e Tab page Each mode contains numerous parameters which are organized into pages These pages are divided by tabs Introduction 7 5 Toggle buttons Bas c operation These are used to switch functions or on off settings p 12 e Use the CURSOR keys to select the parameter and ooeceeecececeoeoececeoececeo eee eee ee eecee press the ENTER key The setting will be switched l Selecting a mode on off each time you press the key The various function of the D1200 are organized under dif Radio buttons ferent modes To access a specific feature select the mode These are used to select one of multiple choices that contains the desired function by pressing its key e Use the CURSOR keys to move the cursor to the desired selection and press the ENTER key For details on the functions within each mode refer to Ref erence gt p 83 Selecting one item from a list e To select a song or mark turn the VALUE dial select the desired item e To select a song in the program playback li
81. appears turn Quick to off then re format the drive l It will take certain time for processing to be completed if you execute CheckDrive when full or Format on the hard disk drive Disk Busy As you perform punch in out recording or track editing operations the audio data on the disk may become frag mented causing disk access to slow down In the TRACK EditTrk tab page execute the Opti mizeTrack command If this error still appears after you have executed OptimizeTrack execute the Check Drive command Ina studio or similar location vibration due to ultra low frequencies may cause DiskBusy to occur If this is the cause of the error message you can solve the problem by moving the D1200 to a different location rather than executing the Check Drive operation If DiskBusy appears during playback select Cur Song when executing the CheckDrive command If it appears during recording select CurSong Remain If you do not mind taking a substantial amount of time for the operation execute Full Disk Repaired 1 Disk Repaired 2 Disk Repaired 3 L gt An error was found by the CheckDrive command Disk Repaired 1 indicates that an error was found but was successfully repaired You can continue using the drive Disk Repaired 2 or 3 indicate that it was not possible to completely correct the error In this case it is possible t
82. by selecting the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO InEqi 4 tab page rents ee FAC Oot 01 000 ois CJ UE C eei 2 Input an audio signal and adjust the level appropri ately Refer to Connecting a guitar to the GUITAR IN jack assigning it to mixer channel 1 and adjusting the levels p 35 Verify that the level meter at the left edge of the display moves and that you can hear the sound 3 Select the InputEQ gain settings and mid EQ fre P 8 8 quency and turn the VALUE dial to adjust them High EQ Low EQ e Select High EQ Gain H or Low EQ Gain L for the channel you want to adjust and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the gain The value is shown in the upper left of the screen Mid EQ e Select Mid EQ Frequency F for the channel you want to adjust and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the frequency The value is shown in the upper left of the screen e Select Mid EQ Gain M for the channel you want to adjust and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the gain The value is shown in the upper left of the screen MIDI USB Drive Data paia be Rhythm i a Effects i and a Upgrading the system 37 38 4 Record the sound as processed by the EQ p 53 Applying EQ to the track playback sound e The EQ that is applied to the track playback sound can be adjusted in the EQ Eq1 4 Eq5 8 and Eq9 12 tab pages Refer to Quick
83. can record MIDI clock data from an external sequencer in order to synchronize with the external sequencer data Record tap tempo If you do not know the tempo of the audio that is recorded on the D1200 you can record tap tempo data so that you will be able to manage and edit the audio data in units of measures For the procedure refer to p 51 l The above two types of tempo track cannot be main tained simultaneously only the last recorded type of tempo data will be held in the tempo track If the memory becomes full while recording tempo data recording will end automatically ReeMeastap 6001 01 000 Select FecTempoTrack Type 1 2 Select RecTempoTrack Type c ssssccsssseeees MIDIClock MeasTap BeatTap Selects the type of tempo track to be recorded MIDIClock The tempo track will be created by record ing MIDI clock data from a song created on an external sequencer Meas Tap The tempo track will be created by tapping at the beginning of each measure BeatTap The tempo track will be created by tapping at the beginning of each beat gp IRCCONGEL E Begin recording the tempo track O INSERT I EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL avails TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO METER AUTO IN OCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB 98 INPUT OUTPUT SOLO oC S T a eee Ch1 6 Select in
84. connect the designated AC DC power supply to an AC outlet of the correct voltage Do not connect it to an AC outlet of voltage other than that for which your unit is intended Interference with other electrical devices Radios and televisions placed nearby may experience reception interference Operate this unit at a suitable dis tance from radios and televisions Handling To avoid breakage do not apply excessive force to the switches or controls Care If the exterior becomes dirty wipe it with a clean dry cloth Do not use liquid cleaners such as benzene or thinner or cleaning compounds or flammable polishes Keep this manual After reading this manual please keep it for later refer ence Keeping foreign matter out of your equipment Never set any container with liquid in it near this equip ment If liquid gets into the equipment it could cause a breakdown fire or electrical shock Be careful not to let metal objects get into the equipment If something does slip into the equipment unplug the AC DC power supply from the wall outlet Then contact your nearest Korg dealer or the store where the equipment was purchased THE FCC REGULATION WARNING for U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide rea sonable protection against harmful interference in a resi dential installation Thi
85. connector and exchange data between your computer and the USB drive of the D1200 31 TRACK key Use this key to select the virtual track for each track to perform track editing operations such as copy or delete and to import or export a WAV file gt p 108 32 SONG key Use this key to create a new song rename or select a song perform song edit operations such as copy or move and to perform program playback of songs p 116 33 TUNER key Press this key when you want to use the tuner gt p 36 95 34 RHYTHM key Use this key to switch the internal rhythm pattern play back on off set the song tempo and create tempo maps The key will light if the rhythm is on p 48 95 35 IN LOC1 key OUT LOC2 key TO LOC3 key END LOC4 key Use these keys to register a desired location within the song or to instantly recall a registered location The locations registered here will be used as the punch in out points and as the locations for track editing operations such as copy or delete gt p 33 118 By holding down the IN LOC1 key and pressing the OUT LOC2 key you can listen to the audio between the IN OUT points 36 STORE key Press this key to register a location for a locate point mark or scene The location at which you pressed the STORE key will be preserved and you can then press a desired key to specify the memory in which this location will be stored To discard the loc
86. contains a built in sampling rate converter If the source connected here has a sampling rate of 48 kHz or 32 kHz it will automatically be converted to 44 1 kHz l 96 kHz is not supported 4 USB connector You can use a USB cable to connect this to your compu ter l It is not possible to connect USB peripheral devices such as an external hard disk or CD R RW drive to the D1200 5 MIDI OUT connector This connector transmits MIDI data Use it when you want to control a connected external MIDI device from the D1200 gt p 79 pels OUT S P DIF IN 0000000000000000 o T Introduction 6 MIDI IN connector This connector receives MIDI data Use it when you want to control the D1200 from a connected external MIDI device p 79 7 MONITOR OUT L R jacks Connect your external monitor system to these jacks You can select the bus for monitor output in the LINPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page p 100 These jacks output the same signal as the PHONES jack These are RCA phono jacks 8 MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob This knob adjusts the volume that is output from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks 9 MASTER OUT L R jacks These are analog audio outputs for the master LR bus signal that combines the signals of each mixer channel into a two channel mix or the audio signal that is selected for soloing To select a solo signal make set tings in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Solo tab page Con
87. device includes a MIDI implementation chart This chart shows the types of MIDI message that the device can transmit and receive When using two MIDI devices together com pare their MIDI implementation charts to verify that the devices will be able to communicate as you expect A detailed explanation of the D1200 s MIDI functionality can be found in the separate MIDI implementation To obtain a copy of the MIDI implementation contact your Korg distributor Controlling the D1200 from a MIDI sequencer Here s how you can use MMC messages transmitted from a MIDI sequencer to control D1200 operations such as stop play fast forward rewind record and locate You must use a sequencer that supports MMC These operations cannot be performed from a sequencer that does not support MMC A Connect the MIDI cables Use a MIDI cable to connect your MIDI sequencer s MIDI OUT connector to the D1200 s MIDI IN connec tor 2 Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it will transmit MMC to control an external device For details refer to the owner s manual of your MIDI sequencer 3 Turn on MMC reception In the SYSTEM USB MMC tab page set Select MMCMode to Receive M cstiave 001 01 000 Select MMC Mode MMCbeyvIB HHA eS WE 4 Set the correct device ID Set MMCDevID to the MMC device ID of your MIDI sequencer Since some MIDI sequencers indicate the MMC device ID in a di
88. disc is a CD RW DA The disc is an audio CD This corresponds to the following cases e A finalized CD R created on the D1200 or other device e A finalized CD RW created on the D1200 or other device e An audio CD 3 Fimal Fimalize ccccccccsosscoscccssccccsccescccssconee Finalizes the disc If you created a CD R RW disc using Track At Once and would like to play it on an audio CD player you need to finalize the disc If you created the disc using Disc At Once the disc is finalized automatically so this step is not necessary amp Once a disc has been finalized no further songs can be added to it Execute the Finalize operation only after you have written all the desired songs to the disc A TEUASG ccscstesc shite ve scaoacecewacaccesenscuauece coceaanceeceosorecess Erases all data that has been written to a CD RW disc amp This cannot be performed on a CD R disc It is not possible to recover the data that is erased 5 Write ToC ccccccccccscccccccccccccccccceccsccscces Executes writing to CD R RW When you press the WriteToCD button the Obey Copyright Rules dialog box will appear Carefully read COPYRIGHT WARNING gt p 1 and use this func tion only if you accept the terms Press the YES OK key to begin writing Write ToCh DiscAtince 4 Obey Copyright Rules Speed Are vou Sure 5a Write Speed s0000 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x Specifies t
89. disc or the USB drive 3 1 Importing reading a WAV file You can import WAV files of the following formats Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz Bit depth 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit Channels 1 monaural 2 stereo In order to import a WAV file from your computer you must connect a USB cable between the D1200 and your computer and copy the WAV file onto the internal USB drive of the D1200 7 MIDI USB Drive oe a be Rhythm i a Effects Mixer pins m Upgrading the system Importing a WAV file into the beginning of a track Here s how to import a monaural WAV file named D1200_MN WAV from a CD and paste it into the beginning of track 1 execute 9 001 01 000 Ti Import File Insert the CD R RW disc containing the WAV file into the CD R RW drive 2 Select the Import command e Access the TRACK Import tab page 3 Select the import source drive e Select the DriveList button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box e Select C CD and press the YES OK key 4 Select the WAV file that you want to import e Select the WavFileList button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Cancel D12600 _02 WAY e You can use the Prvw button to hear approxi mately two seconds of the beginning of the selected WAV file e Select D1200_MN WAV and press the YES OK key 6 Select the import destination track number e Set DestTrack to track 1
90. discs Failure to observe these points may cause prob lems such as data not being written correctly loss of recorded data or drive malfunction e Do not leave discs in direct sunlight or in locations of high temperature or high humidity e Do not touch the surface of a disc Hold a disc by its edges e Remove dust or dirt from the surface of a disc To remove dust use an air duster or cleaner e Do not affix labels to a disc or write on a disc in loca tions other than specified e Do not use chemicals or detergent to wipe a disc e Donot bend or drop a disc Responsibility for loss of data Korg Corporation will accept no responsibility for any damages direct or indirect whether sustained by the customer or by a third party resulting from loss of or damage to data written on a CD R or CD RW disc using the CDRW 1 2 Installing the CDRW 1 l Before installing the CDRW 1 you must turn off the power of the D1200 and unplug the AC DC power sup ply A Remove the cover Slide the EJECT switch located on the bottom of the D1200 in the direction of the arrow and the drive bay cover of the D1200 will be pushed out 2 Remove the cover Catch the edge of the cover that was pushed out and remove it in the direction shown by the arrow in the dia eram l The cover may be damaged if you forcibly pull it to ward yourself Keep the cover you removed in a safe place since you will need it if yo
91. effect on Off Turns the effect off 3c Control Device cccccssccossccsssccssscccssccesces Lets you specify the effect parameter that will be con trolled by the control device and the maximum and minimum values This will be displayed only if you have set Ass to InsEff1 InsEff4 in the SYSTEM USB Con trol tab page 3ca ControlDbeyice Par arin Wah Speed Hax ZELAHz Hin amp B2Hz 3ca Parameter ccscccscsccscsccccccccsccccccsccscccscces Selects the parameter that will be controlled 3cb Max Min essseesseseoseeecssseccssecosseecoseecssee Specifies the maximum and minimum parameter values that will be controlled by the controller 3d Control On Off ccccssssssceoees On Off Indicates the effect control status On A Parameter is specified in the Control Device window Ltntrl JOff Parameter is set to Off in the Control Device window External control will not be possible Reference Compares the sound of the effect with the unprocessed sound When you press the Bypass button the effect will be bypassed Press the NO CANCEL key to defeat bypass 5 Rename seseesessessescesccsescessescesessessescoesoesesscese Edits the name of the effect program Select the effect program whose name you want to edit press the Rename button to open the dialog box and edit the name You c
92. example set DestTrack to 1 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the IN location to hear the results If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 As the specified region IN OUT is set longer it will correspondingly take longer for processing to be fin ished and for the Completed indication to appear Exchange tracks SwapTrack This command exchanges swaps recorded track data be tween the specified region IN OUT and the corresponding region of another track e You can swap the data of one or more tracks simultane ously Swapping track data Here s how to exchange the IN OUT regions of track 1 and track 2 SourceTrack S 001 01 000 Sou citak Dal DestTrack Register the IN and OUT locations p 33 118 Select SwapTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to select SwapTrack 3 Select the swap source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 4 Select the swap destination track number Set DestTrack to track 2 If you select
93. for recording or playback and to check the start end locations p 123 This key will light if Loop is turned on 41 TRIGGER key Use this key to switch Trigger Recording on off allow ing you to automatically start recording when an input signal occurs This key also lets you set the threshold level and pre trigger time gt p 54 123 This key will light if the Trigger Recording function is on 42 SCRUB key Use this key to switch the Scrub Play To From or Slow Play functions on off You can use these different func tions by controlling the VALUE dial and TRANSPORT keys gt p 124 43 METER TRACK VIEW key Use this key to view volume data during recording or playback level meters and audio event data track view for each track p 125 44 UNDO key After you have recorded on a track or performed an editing operation you can use this key to perform Undo which returns the data to its prior state or to perform Redo which cancels the Undo and returns the data to the recorded or edited state You can use this to cancel or recall as many as 99 previ ous recording or editing operations You can select either 1 8 or 99 times as the number of operations that will be allowed for the Undo function p 126 This key will light if Undo or Redo is available 45 NO CANCEL key YES OK key Use these keys as the Yes OK or No CANCEL buttons that appear in the display
94. input level Fc Pre EQ Cutoff Hz 300 10 0kHz Sets the EQ center frequency ORCO DE 0 5 10 0 Sets the EQ band width GLevel Gain CB 000 18 0 418 0 Sets the EQ gain Mix Wet Dry cccee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Flutter This parameter enables you to set the depth of the modulation caused by a warped turntable Click Level This parameter enables you to set the level of the click noise that occurs once every rotation of the turntable This simulation repro duces record noise and the noise generated after the music on a vinyl record finishes 31 SE4 Talking Modulator This effect gives the input signal a character similar to a human voice It can create the impression of a talking guitar or synthe sizer Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00Hz Sets the LFO speed VTop VOICE TOD sezecsesciscecesereassces A l U E O Selects a vowel sound at the top end of control VCentr Voice Center 0000 A lI U E O Selects a vowel sound in the center of control VBotom Voice Bottom A lI U E O Selects a vowel sound at the bottom end of control Formnt Formant Shift 0 100 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Reso RESONANCE seseeeeees 0 100 Sets the Level of resonance of the voice pattern Mix Wet Dry ccce Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect
95. is selected for Device in the SYS TEM USB Control tab page p 101 L Have you selected effect program number 000 NO EFFECT or have you selected an effect program that does not include a control function L_ Ifyou are using MIDI to control the effect are the D1200 and the transmitting MIDI device set to the same MIDI channel p 79 101 ye Can t select insert effect 1in2out x2 _ Insert effect assign may be set to Trk You can select lin2out x2 if INSERT EFFECT In sAss tab page Assign is set to In Change the setting to In Can t select insert effect 1in lout x8 _ Insert effect assign may be set to In You can select linlout x 8 if INSERT EFFECT In sAss tab page Assign is set to Trk Change the set ting to Trk Can t apply master effects _ The send level from each channel may be at zero or near ly zero Inthe MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND EffSnd1 or EffSnd2 tab page adjust Send to raise the send level The return level may be at zero or nearly zero In the MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND MstEff1 or MstEff2 tab page adjust RetLev to raise the return level If you are monitoring the sound from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks the monitor LR bus output may be turned off Inthe INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page press the Mast
96. it will not transmit un necessary data No CDRW Disc _ The media being erased is not CD RW Execute the erase command on CD RW media No Disc _ CD media is not inserted No Drive No Disk AE Timeout No Event _ When writing an audio CD the selected track contained no audio data Either bounce the audio data to the selected track or se lect another track No internal hard disk drive AE Timeout Nothing Changed Processing was executed but no change occurred as a re sult 148 Number Of Tracks _ During track editing the edit source and edit destina tion contain a different number of tracks Make settings so that the number of tracks is the same Copy is not possible because Clip contains no data Either copy data to Clip or select a different copy source track Path Length Overflow _ Access was not possible because the folder level is too deep The D1200 cannot access a path that exceeds 64 characters Do not create a folder level that exceeds 64 characters SameFileNameExists L When exporting a WAV file or backing up to the USB drive an identically named WAV file exists on the ex port destination drive Change the file name Song Protected The selected song is protected Either turn protect off p 35 or select a different song When formatting turn the Force button On p 75
97. monaural file Here s how to copy the IN OUT region of tracks 1 6 of the 24 bit song 003 to the clipboard and export them to a CD R RW disc as six monaural WAV files named D1200_1 WAV D1200_6 WAV Insert a CD R RW disc into the CD R RW drive When exporting WAV files to the CD R RW drive you can use either a blank CD R RW disc or an unfinalized ISO9660 format CD R RW disc 2 Select a 24 bit song that you created p 31 1 3 Selecting different songs Register the IN and OUT locations p 33 Copy the track data to the clipboard sourcetrack E 001 01 000 E CopyT rak ziua yoii Peg EditTrk H Import H Esport E e Inthe TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to Copy Track e Set SourceTrack to 1 6 e Set DestTrack to Clip6 The number indicates the number of tracks in the clip board e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key e The display will ask AreYouSure Press the YES OK key to execute e When the operation has been executed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key 6 Select the Export function Access the TRACK Export tab page Execute IE oc 1 01 000 L i Expo rt File t CD12060_01 a Mtr 16 Bis Peg edit kf Import A Export E oo 73 MIDI USB Drive oe a be Rhythm i a Effects Mixer pins w Upgrading the system 74 6 Select t
98. must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track 4 Select the copy destination V track Set DestVTrack to V track a 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Check the results of the operation Play back the song from the beginning to verify that the data was copied as you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 Copying to a V track Here s how to copy V track a currently selected of track 1 to V track b of track 1 1 Check the copy destination In the TRACK Vtr1 6 tab page check that track 1 V track b is empty or is a track that you do not need to keep Then be sure to return the V track selection to a p 108 2 Select CopyWholeTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose CopyWholeTrack Rhythm i a Effects Mixer r and w N 5 N e Q Q oz lt F MIDI USB Drive Data Dai Upgrading the system 6 62 3 Select the copy source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 4 Select the copy destination track number Set DestTrack to track
99. of each channel so the levels being recording will be the same as the monitor volume levels For this reason a Cue Level function is provided so that you can monitor using a completely different mix of volume and pan settings while you perform regardless of the master LR settings To adjust the Cue Level In the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page turn the Cue button On chi 6 chr ie fineal q Solo Monitor J If the Solo function is on it will overide any settings here Turn the Solo function off before making a selec tion 2 Select the Level button and press the ENTER key to access the Cue Level setting screen Select the icons for each channel and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the volume level and pan that is displayed in the upper left Operation 2 7 Solo settings Ifa Solo button is On only that signal will be sent to the monitor bus Use this when you want to hear just one of sev eral audio sources or to check the send signal The solo sig nal will be output from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and the PHONES jack To select a signal for soloing Begin by selecting the signal that you want to solo and turn Solo on Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Solo tab page 3 Clearfll C Solo ToMstOut Solo Chime BChr 12 Hinkqi 4h Select the appropriate Solo button and press the ENTER key to switch solo On highlighted
100. operation has been executed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key 4 Select the Export function Access the TRACK Export tab page ee Execute E0 01 000 i ile F Pfhetiar trie Butera fen editTrk H Import amp Export 6 Select the export destination drive For this example select the USB drive U USB DOS Edit the name of the WAV file If you want to change the name of the file select the Rename button and press the ENTER key Edit the name in the RenameFile dialog box p 31 When you export a stereo WAV file the 7th and 8th characters of the file name will automatically be set to ST For a monaural file this will be MN The file cannot be saved if an identically named file al ready exists on the USB drive D Specify the date and time of the WAV file e Press the Date button to access the dialog box move the cursor to the date or time you want to change and use the VALUE dial to set the data and or time File Date os sairi CEJ Cancel Export the clipboard data e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key e The display will ask AreYouSure Press the YES OK key to execute e When the operation has been executed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Exporting multiple WAV files When you export four or more tracks at once each track will be saved as a
101. or when you want to recover disk drive capacity after completing a song Example 1 You began recording on track 1 from the beginning of the song and only played during the Intro Break and Ending on the first take In this case silence actually noise level sound will have been recorded in the A B and Solo sections of track 1 unnecessarily using up valuable drive space To keep the audio data only for the Intro Break and End ing that you are actually using Execute the Optimize Track operation on track 1 from the beginning of the song to the end of the song Set the Optimize Track Mode parameter to Erase Silence and execute This will cause audio data to be preserved only for the actually used regions so that only the intro break and ending will occupy drive space IN E OUT OptimizeTrack v After execution Data erased Break brassi Ending Example 2 You began recording on track 1 from the beginning of the song and played the Intro A B and Break during the first take and then recorded a sec ond take to overwrite A and B Recorded second take v In this case A and B of the first take remain beneath A and B of track 1 in order to preserve the data for Undo and also because they are a continuous piece of audio data with the Intro and Break This means that Intro A A B B and Break are occupying disk space Operation To erase A and B that remain from
102. p 124 Ge UN sepcsssssasscivededesssescassuvesccecees 000 00 000 BB OU lasses setecsstoteccsvenceuseseencuse 000 00 000 Specifies the IN and OUT points When you place the cursor at In or Out the track chosen in TrackSelect will automatically be soloed and the Scrub function will be turned on so that you will hear only that track when you turn the VALUE dial 5c TrackSelect cssccssscccsssscees Track1 12 Selects the track whose waveform will be displayed and which will be played Press the I button and choose from the list 5d Zoom In Out Up Down ssccsseccssseceees Adjusts the size of the waveform display and the play back speed Expands the waveform display vertically x Shrinks the waveform display vertically d Expands the waveform display horizontally H Shrinks the waveform display horizontally When you press the YES OK key the time locations specified for In and Out will be overwritten onto the IN LOC1 and OUT LOC2 keys If you press the NO CANCEL key your settings will be cancelled Reference Loop Settings for loop playback and recording You can repeatedly play or record over the region specified by the IN LOC1 and OUT LOC2 times two k 001 01 000 Out 4 883 0 1 808 In 802 861 0808 Ws MOG o EEE On Off On When you play back the IN OUT region will be played back repeatedly
103. played at one tempo e Tempo map Tempo changes can be programmed throughout the song e Tempo track MIDI Clock or tap tempo will control the tempo Manual tempo The settings you specify for Tempo tempo Beat time signature and SelRhythm rhythm pattern will be used and will not change during the song 1 To select the Manual settings as the tempo source e Access the RHYTHM SetUp tab page e Select TempoSource and turn the VALUE dial to choose Manual Temposource E 001 01 000 Vol 878 Rhythm J R amp Funk i Setup For more about Tempo Beat and SelRhythm re fer to 1 Selecting and playing a rhythm p 48 Tempo map Tempo maps let you change the tempo time signature or rhythm pattern at the various specified measures By using tempo maps to change rhythm patterns you can create a drum track for the entire song including an intro breaks fill ins and an ending 1 Using Tempo Map as the tempo source e Access the RHYTHM SetUp tab page Temposource E 001 01 000 u4 Rhythm BSbtRocki Yok 07A Setup ATmphap A Tmp ick E e Select TempoSource and turn the VALUE dial to choose TempoMap 2 Specify tempo map 001 at the beginning of the song e Access the RHYTHM TmpMap tab page Ternporbe 001 01 000kn m EEE Meas agi ao4 J 120 e Select TempoMap a
104. procedure described in Erase a CD RW disc p 106 2 Select BackupAllSongs In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to select Back upAllSongs You can also select the i button and press the ENTER key to view and choose Select Backup Restore Type 3 Verify the songs that will be backed up Make sure that Source is set to ALL Select the backup destination drive Select the Drive button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select C CD and press the YES OK key a S HO038 86 AMUSE DOS Check the backup destination drive and the drive infor mation Make sure that Destination is set to C CD The display will indicate the number of CD R RW discs required You will need to provide the required number of discs of that capacity When using multiple discs we recommend that you number them beforehand 6 Back up the data Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key to access the confirmation screen Here you can specify the writing speed Erec Exe Backup C a Are vou Sure Control MOT A Sune MMC Je ORs Dieko e Press the YES OK key to begin the backup User effect data will also be backed up at this time e If you need to use multiple discs a dialog box will appear when one disc is full asking you to insert the next disc Insert the next dis
105. recorded performance insert a space of the appropriate length and then record into that area Inserting blank space Here s how to insert blank space into the IN OUT region of track 1 execute 3 007 01 000 B e Insert Track 1 Exec e rte EotT rk Tmport h Euport ae DestTrack Register the IN and OUT times p 33 118 Select InsertTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose InsertTrack 8 Select the track number into which the blank space will be inserted Use DestTrack to select track 1 4 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key 6 Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC 1 key and play back from the IN location to verify that the operation did what you expected If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 Erase a track Eraselrack This command erases recorded data from the specified re gion IN OUT of a track The region will become blank Unlike the Delete Track command this Erase Track com mand does not move the data that follows the OUT time e You can erase data from the IN OUT region of one or more
106. scene e Select the EditLoc button and press the ENTER key EditSceneLocation Aa Loc EEE 91 000 e Specify the desired counter locatioin in the dialog box and press the YES OK key 3 5 Re registering a scene at another time location You can re register the same scene at different locations 1 Recall the scene that contains the mixer settings you want to re register As described in 3 3 Recalling a scene recall the desired scene 40 2 Move to the location where you want to re register the scene p 32 3 Press the STORE key and then the SCENE key 3 6 Editing and overwriting a scene Here s how to edit the settings of a scene and overwrite the changes onto the existing scene As described in 3 3 Recalling a scene recall the scene that you want to edit 2 Adjust the CHANNEL faders PAN knobs EQ and effects etc to the desired settings 3 In the SCENE ReadDel tab page make sure that the scene number you want to overwrite is selected OvewrtScene SceneReadsott ort Rename EditLoc Delete e Select the OvrWrt button and press the ENTER key Ov erwrite Scene Hb 1 Jw Are YouSure i ReadDel Press the YES OK key to overwrite the settings for that scene number 3 7 Deleting a scene Here s how to delete an unwanted scene amp This operation cannot be undone DeleteScene WB LIEW SCEHE 001 601 006
107. significantly Noise Level This parameter enables you to mix white noise with the Carrier Modulator High Mix This parameter sets the high range output level of the right channel sound Modulator If the modulator is a human voice it will make the words more clear Vocoder Carrier Wet Dry The Vocoder Carrier parameter sets the balance between the vocoder sound and the left channel sound Carrier The Wet Dry parameter sets the balance between the effect and dry sound If you wish to change the intensity of the vocoder effect select Wet for Wet Dry and adjust the balance using the Vocoder Carrier parameter 35 LS4 St Pitch Shifter Stereo Pitch Shifter This is a stereo pitch shifter The pitch shift amount for the left and right channels can be reversed from each other Ratio Ratio cceee 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Thrshl Threshold dB 00 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Attack Attack a ccrictadadindaredaiiaessantsess 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse RelCase c ssscssscsseesesees 1 100 Sets the release time LoOfst Low Offset dB 40 0dB Sets the low range gain of trigger signal MdOfst Mid Offset dB 0 40 0dB Sets the mid range gain of trigger signal HiOfst High Offset dB 40 0dB Sets the high range gain of trigger signal GLevel
108. so that they are always numbered consecutively from the beginning of the song to the end of the song e By adding tempo maps you can create drum pat terns for an entire song including an intro breaks fill ins and an ending Select TempoMaphes Param HETET BS BBS L1 1 Tempo 126 Beat 64 4 Rhythm Giobt Focki Meas 4 Listen to the tempo maps you created In the RHYTHM SetUp tab page set Tempo Source to TempoMap In the RHYTHM tab page set Rhythm On 49 Upgrading MIDI USB Drive Data paia be eal Rhythm a Effects Mixer r and w the system 50 TempoSeurce _ B 001 01 000 Rhythm etlr ATmphap A TmeTrkE Hsbt Rocki Vol BTE Move to the beginning of the song and press the PLAY key to play back the song The rhythm pattern and tempo will change according to the tempo maps that you created You can also check the tempo maps in the SONG SelSong tab page cisplist e 001 01 000 _ EE H 881 HEWSOHG EJ Tempo Moai 120 a4 sod Bish Rocki selSong fFansonghPraPlay If you want to record the sound of the rhythm as played by the tempo maps you created refer to 3 Recording the rhythm p 48 Editing a tempo map If you increase the number of measures the measure numbers of subsequent tempo maps will move back ward by the corresponding length If you decrease the number of measures the measure numbers of subse quent tempo m
109. song drive and USB drive to gether in a single operation or format them separately l When you execute the Format operation all data on the disk will be erased Be sure to check the contents of the disk before you format it l If a power failure or similar accident occurs during the formatting process it is possible that the D1200 will no longer operate correctly If this occurs please contact your Korg distributor 1 Select the type of formatting e Access the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page choose SelOperation and turn the VALUE dial to select the type of formatting Format ALL Format the entire hard disk Format S Format the song drive Format U Format the USB drive 2 Execute formatting e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box A Select CheckDrive S e Select SelOperation and use the VALUE dial to select CheckDrive S 2 Execute the check e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box e Specify the area that you want to check For this example select Unused e Press the YES OK key to begin the check e When checking is finished the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key e Use Quick to select how the disk will be formatted If you turn this On only the system area will be initialized and the operation will not require very much time Select
110. tab page ProgChange parameter Trans to On If you want the D1200 to receive MIDI messages set the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page ProgChange parameter Recv to On In the SCENE ReadDel tab page set SceneRead to Off Transmit a program change message from the external MIDI device to recall a scene on the D1200 When the D1200 receives program change 0 it will recall scene 001 Program changes 0 99 correspond to scenes 001 100 41 Upgrading MIDI USB Drive Data pata be Rhythm i a Effects Eai i and w the system 42 Overview of the effects On the D1200 you can use up to eight insert effects that can be applied to individul analog inputs or mixer channels two master effects that can be applied in varying amounts to the send from each channel and a final effect that can be applied to the master LR as the last stage Each of these effects are in dependent meaning that you can simultaneously use up to eleven effect programs e Effect algorithms total of 98 e Effect programs fo Preset 192 User 192 Insert effects 1000 1001 1128 U001 U128 Master effects M000 M001 M032 u001 u032 Final effects F000 FO01 F032 u033 u064 Preset effects contain effect programs created by profession al musicians and studio engineers User effects can store effect programs that you created by ed iting a preset effect I
111. the center Similarly if you want to turn pairing PAN on for a pair of channels 1 2 5 6 and record in stereo set the PAN knob of the odd numbered paired channel to the center 2 3 Using EQ to adjust the tone A three band equalizer EQ is available to adjust the tone of each input channel and each playback channel e To adjust the input sound analog make EQ adjust ments in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO InEq1 4 tab page These settings will affect the tone for recording e To adjust the track playback sound make EQ adjust ments in the EQ Eq1i 4 Eq5 8 and Eq9 12 tab pages EQ is used to cut obtrusive frequency regions such as hiss or to cut or boost the low or high ranges Normally you should adjust EQ so that the tone is clear and well defined Excessive EQ settings such as boosting the EQ gain of each channel to the maximum value will make the overall mix uneven and cause listening fatigue Use EQ in the cut direction as well It is best to use the minimum amount of EQ that will achieve the desired result e If pairing is on use the odd numbered Eq to make adjustments p 38 e EQ settings can be registered in a scene gt p 39 Applying EQ to an analog input Applying EQ as you record You can apply EQ to an analog input not to the digital input and record the sound using these EQ settings 1 Access the page that contains the channel where you want the EQ to be applied
112. the right channel FPoint Feedback Position Pre Post Switches the feedback connection Fdback Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount HiDamp High Damp ssssee 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Spread Spread cccsecceees 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Mix Wet Dry cececeee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds L R Pitch When you select Up Dwn for this parameter the pitch shift amount for the right channel will be reversed If the pitch shift amount is positive the pitch of the left channel is raised and the pitch of the right channel is lowered If an expression pedal etc is used to control the pitch the pitch of the left channel will be con trolled Mode Fine If Cntrl is controlling Pitch and you change Mode or Fine you must once again use Cntrl to readjust the Max and Min parameters 36 LS5 Early Reflections L This early reflection effect has more precise early reflections with Type Type seiescsivavusinuaruerveaes dis Sharp Loose Modula Revers twice the maximum length of a normal size effect You can create a very smooth and dense sound Selects the decay curve for the early reflection 133 Insert 2in2outx2 Master Final Effect Insert 2in2outx2 Effect Control Insert 1in1 outx8 Insert 1in outx4 Insert 1in2outx2 Modeling eff
113. the value for the Control Target parameter when level control is not being applied expressed as a ratio relative to the parameter setting The parameter setting will be the Wet Dry value if Control Target Out or the Feedback value if Control Target FB When Polarity is the Control Target value is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset value if the input level is below Threshold or will equal the parameter value if the input level exceeds the threshold When Polarity is the Control Target value will equal the parameter value if the input level is below Threshold or is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset value if the input level exceeds Threshold Effect Parameter List The Attack and Release parameters specify attack time and release time of delay level control 13 DL6 St Auto Panning Delay Stereo Auto Panning Delay This stereo delay effect pans the delay sound left and right using the LFO LTime L Delay Time msec 0 680ms LFback L Feedback cs0 100 100 RTime R Delay Time msec 0 680ms RFback R Feedback 0 100 100 HiDamp High Damp ssssee 0 100 LoDamp Low Damp ssssscce 0 100 LFO LFO Waveform cccsccee TRI SIN Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Phase
114. to SongNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select a song number To select a song from the song list 1 Press the SONG key to access the SelSong tab page Song umber 3 001 01 000 _ LEIN bemo Songan 1 m Tempo Manu 128 ograd Metrod 2 Select the button located at the left of the song number and press the ENTER key The song list will appear HAY DemoSongaei Le Le Cancel H DermoSongkb4 3 Turn the VALUE dial or use the buttons to select a song press the ENTER key and then press the YES OK key 2 Using the counter display The counter indicates the current location within the selected song You can use the counter to program in and out points to mark locations and to pinpoint an exact location when using the scrub function 2 1 Switching the counter display You can select the type of units that the counter will use to display the current location selectTimeDisp E9001 01 000 Ee t 881 DemoSonge6l E Tempo Manu 120 64704 Metrod SelSong HeditSongl PraPlay E Select the button at the left of the counter and press the ENTER key to access the Select Time Disp Type dialog box 32 Select Timebisp Type C GG6200 00F 240 60Free 2 Select a location display method and press the YES OK key You can choose from the following four methods e _ measures beats
115. tracks simultaneously Erasing data from a track Here s how to erase the IN OUT region of track 1 execute 0071 01 000 B H EraseTrack 1 Exec ee ire cuit Tk Tuport A Export Se DestTrack Register the IN and OUT times gt p 33 118 Select EraseTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose EraseTrack 3 Select the track number from which data will be erased Use DestTrack to select track 1 4 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key 6 Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the IN location to verify that the operation did what you expected If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 Ore Delete a track DeleteTrack This command deletes the specified region IN OUT of a track When an area is deleted the subsequent data follow ing the OUT point will be shifted toward the begining of the song e You can delete data from the IN OUT region of one or more tracks simultaneously Deleting data from a track Here s how to delete the IN OUT region of track 1 execute 0071 01 000 B
116. tracks that you want to hear and set them to PLAY LED lit green 4 Select the recording track Press the TRACK STATUS key of the track that you want to record to set it to REC LED blinking red 6 Mute tracks that you do not want to use For each track that you do not want to play or record press the TRACK STATUS key to set it to MUTE LED dark so that no sound will be output by tracks that you are not using 6 Adjust the recording level of the input device and record Refer to 1 1 Analog input p 35 Trigger recording procedure Trigger recording is a function that initiates recording when the input volume reaches a specified level 4 Connect your input device select a track for recording and adjust the recording level Refer to 1 1 Basic recording p 53 2 Access the TRIGGER Trigger tab page and turn TriggerRec On the TRIGGER key will light Triagerree 000 00 000 AYA PreTrigTime Bhi Threshold Trigger Fe 3 Press the REC key to select record ready mode LED blinking 4 Begin playing your instrument When the input signal exceeds the threshold level Threshold recording will begin automatically When you are finished playing press the STOP key to stop recording 1 4 Re recording a specific area Punch in out If you make just one mistake in a recorded performance or are not satisfied with a portion of the perform
117. use digital input S P DIF IN When you press the Digiln button a message of Obey Copyright Rules will appear Carefully read the section COPYRIGHT WARNING gt p 1 and if you accept the terms press the YES OK key in response to Are You Sure Digital input will be enabled These settings let you use the INPUT 1 GUITAR IN INPUT 4 jacks as sub inputs for example when you want to use these jacks as the returns from an external effect device or when you want the sound of instru ments connected to these jacks to be combined with the track playback p 67 Sub input can be used when you want to synchronize an external sequencer with a completed song on the D1200 and mix the instrumental sounds played by the sequencer with the playback tracks of the D1200 These inputs will be sent through the stereo mono switch balance and fader to the master LR bus Use the AUX OUT jack to output the send signal to the external effect device gt p 90 MASTER EFFECT AUX AuxSend tab page 3a Stereo Mono c ccscsseceees Stereo Mono Stereo The odd numbered channel input will be sent to the master L bus and the even numbered chan nel input will be sent to the master R bus f Mono The odd numbered and even numbered inputs will be combined and the same signal will be sent to the master L and R buses Use this setting if the input signal consists of only one chan
118. which the sound is panned between left and right 19 MO6 St Auto Pan Stereo Auto Pan This Auto Pan effect pans sound between left and right It is ste reo and shifting the left and right LFO phases from each other will simulate the sound of the left and right channels crossing over each other by turns or chasing each other LFO LFO Waveform cccccee TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape c08 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Phase LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Sets the LFO speed Depth DEPIN xicences areravanaivaivowinne 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Mix Wet Dry s s s nsaan Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds LFO Shape You can change the panning curve by modifying the LFO wave form LFO Phase This parameter determines the difference in the left and right LFO phases When you change the value gradually from 0 the sound from the left and right channels will chase each other around If you set the parameter to 180 or 180 the sound from each channel will cross over each other You need to input different sounds to each channel in order for this parameter to be effective 20 MO7 Ensemble This Ensemble effect has three chorus blocks that use LFO to create subtle shimmering and g
119. will be able to exchange MIDI mes sages with the external device if its GlobalCh is set to match the MIDI channel of the external device Make this setting when you want to do the following things e Set Device to a MIDI message other than Pedal and control an effect from an external device e Use program change messages to transmit or receive D1200 scene changes ProgramChange Trans ssceseees On Off Switches program change message transmission on off Program change messages will be sent when you switch scenes or execute a store or recall operation ProgramChange RECV sssccsseseeees On Off Switches program change message reception on off When the D1200 receives a program change message it will switch scenes ControlChange Trans sscccsseeeees On Off Switches control change message transmission on off Control change messages will be transmitted when you operate a mixer parameter Control change messages transmitted from the D1200 can be recorded on an external MIDI sequencer ControlChange RecVv sseccsseeeeeee On Off Switches control change reception on off Control change messages recorded on an external MIDI sequencer can be received by the D1200 to control the corresponding mixer parameters For details on the parameters that can be controlled refer to the MIDI implementation chart p 160 10 MASTER RYTM Tuner 11 co ya
120. 00 3 Put the external MIDI sequencer in record ready mode The D1200 s mixer control data is transmitted on MIDI channels 1 12 corresponding to tracks 1 12 Make set tings on your external MIDI device so that it will record all MIDI channels 1 12 For details refer to the owner s manual of your MIDI sequencer For details on the parameters refer to the MIDI imple mentation To obtain a copy of the MIDI implementa tion contact your Korg distributor 4 Begin recording Press the D1200 s PLAY key to begin playback and the external MIDI sequencer will begin recording in syn chronization If you now operate the mixer parameters faders pan EQ etc the corresponding control change messages will be transmitted from the D1200 and will be recorded on the external MIDI sequencer 6 Stop the D1200 When you press the D1200 s STOP key to stop play back the external MIDI device will also stop recording The D1200 s mixer parameter operations have now been recorded on the external MIDI device Using MIDI to control the D1200 s mixer Here s how the mixer control data that was recorded in Recording the D1200 s mixer control messages can be transmitted back to the D1200 to control its mixer Make connections as described in step Q of Controlling the D1200 from a MIDI sequencer 1 Make synchronization settings for the D1200 and the external MIDI sequencer Make the settings described
121. 1 T a Sourcelrack Destlrack DestVTrack Select SwapWholeTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose SwapWhole Track 2 Select the swap source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 3 Select the swap destination track number Set DestTrack to track 2 If you selected two or more tracks for SourceTrack you must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track 4 Select the swap destination V track Set Dest VTrack to V track a 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Check the results of the operation Play back the song from the beginning to verify that the data was swapped as you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 Swapping with a V track Here s how to swap the currently selected track 1 V track a with track 1 V track b Check the copy destination In the TRACK Vtr1 6 tab page check that track 1 V track b is the track that you want to exchange Then be sure to return the V track selection to a p 108 2 Select SwapWholeTrack In the TRA
122. 1 100 F Motown 1 120 F Techno 1 1 130 F 6 8 3 2 120 E 16beat 1 3 100 E Motown 4 120 F Techno 2 1 130 E 6 8 1 6 120 E 16beat 2 3 100 SurfRock 8 169 E Techno 1 5 130 E 6 8 2 5 120 E 16beat 3 5 100 1 SurfRock 4 169 E Techno 2 5 130 E 6 8 3 5 120 Shuff 1 4 130 F SurfRock 1 169 E Techno 3 5 130 4 4 188 pattern Shuff 2 4 130 E SurfRock 4 169 Bossa nova 4 132 8bt Rock 1 120 Shuff 3 4 130 Twist 2 165 I Bossa 4 132 8bt Rock2 8 120 Shuff 4 8 130 I Twist 4 165 F Bossa 1 132 8bt Rock3 8 120 Shuff 5 8 130 F Twist 1 165 E Bossa 5 132 8bt Rock4 8 120 Shuff 6 8 130 E Twist 4 165 Beguine 2 120 8bt Rock5 4 120 l Shuff 1 5 130 Reggae 4 95 I Beguine 4 120 8bt Rock6 4 120 l Shuff 2 4 130 F Reggae 1 95 F Beguine 1 120 lI 8bt Rock1 4 120 I Shuff 3 8 130 HipHop 1 8 90 E Beguine 5 120 l 8bt Rock2 8 120 F Shuff 1 2 130 HipHop 2 4 90 Mambo 2 100 l 8bt Rock3 4 120 F Shuff 2 2 130 HipHop 3 2 90 Mambo 4 100 F 8bt Rock1 1 120 F Shuff 3 1 130 HipHop 4 2 90 F Mambo 1 100 F 8bt Rock2 1 120 E Shuff 1 3 130 HipHop 5 2 90 E Mambo 3 100 F 8bt Rock3 1 120 E Shuff 2 5 130 HipHop 6 2 90 Salsa 8 90 E 8bt Rock1 4 120 E Shuff 3 4 130 HipHop 7 2 90 Salsa 2 90 E 8bt Rock2 7 120 HalfTime 8 150 IJHipHop 1 3 90 F Salsa 1 90 E 8bt Rock3 4 120 I HalfTime 5 150 IJHipHop 2 5 90 E Salsa 3 90 8beat 1 4 120 F HalfTime 1 150 IJHipHop 3 2 90 Samba 4 95 8beat 2 4 120 E HalfTime 6 150 F JHipHop 1 1 90 l Samba1 4 95 8beat 3 4 120 RockBld 1
123. 1 96th beats e minutes seconds 1 1000th sec onds __ _ _ F minutes seconds 1 30 seconds e _ Free minutes seconds remaining amount of recording time To check the remaining recording time Access the Select Time Disp Type dialog box and choose __ Free To determine the correct __ __ Free time set TRACK STATUS to REC for all the tracks that you want to record The display will indicate the recording time that is available for recording on each track that is set to REC 2 2 Changing the current location Using the counter to move to a new location 1 Select a page in which the upper part of the display shows the counter such as the SONG SelSong tab page 2 In the counter select the time field e g measures min utes seconds that you want to change Sto ooo Te t 881 DemoSonga6l E Tempo Manu 120 64 04 Metrod 3 Turn the VALUE dial to move the current location Using FF and REW to move to a new location Moving backward Press the REW key to move backward in the song You will move continuously if you keep holding REW down You may also use this method to move during playback Moving forward Press the FF key to move forward in the song You will move continuously if you keep holding FF down You may also use this method to move during playback Moving to the beginning of the song If you are cur
124. 3 Select the restore source drive Select the Drive button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select either C CD B or U USB DOS and press the YES OK key 4 If you are restoring from the USB drive select the effect user data that you want to restore e Select the button and press the ENTER key e From the BackUpFileList select the effect that you want to restore For details on the types of file refer to p 68 Then press the YES OK key 6 Verify the restore destination e Ifyou are restoring all user effect data this will be displayed as e Ifyou are restoring individual effect user data select the restore destination effect number Move the cur sor to Destination and use the VALUE dial to select the restore destination effect number Restore the user effect data e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key The display will ask AreYouSure Press the ENTER key to execute the operation D When execution is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key 3 Reading and writing WAV files Importing loading a WAV file A WAV format audio file saved on CD ROM R RW or the USB drive can be pasted into a track of a D1200 song You can use Undo to return to the prior state Exporting writing a WAV file Audio track data copied to the D1200 s clipboard can be exported written as a WAV format to a CD R RW
125. 4 MODELING waczccccticcnnincabetivnvecnsnvosieinavocis tedeaveinedtaternnnceenoanetnens 84 Category Select an effect category oo eee teee ees 84 Modeline lsssrpor uean N 84 IVA HIN 2 ccd ce re ataneuic enn E S 85 INSERT EFFEC T paicccsscestycacavancinan eds citcessaneeposenicebadentiatncannwne 85 InsAss Specify the insert location and type of the insert eflects menen cca openness A a E a A 85 InsEff1 Select and edit insert effect 1 vee eeeeeeeeeeeee 86 InsEff2 Select and edit insert effect 2 oe eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 87 InsEff3 Select and edit insert effect 3 woe eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 87 InsEff4 Select and edit insert effect 4 oo eeeeeeeeeeeee 88 InsEff5 8 Select and edit insert effects 5 8 cc sees 88 D E E tate A EE E AA teem 88 Eq1 4 Adjust the EQ for mixer channels 1 4 88 Eq5 8 Adjust the EQ for mixer channels 5 8 ee 88 Eq9 12 Adjust the EQ for mixer channels 9 12 0 89 MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND cece ccc eeeececceccccceeseecceceeees 89 MstEff1 Select and edit master effect 1 eeeeeeeeeeee 89 MstEff2 Select and edit master effect 2 0 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 90 EffSnd1 Adjust send levels to master effect 1 00 90 EffSnd2 Adjust send levels to master effect 2 00 90 AuxSend Adjust the external send levels ee 90 FINAL EFFECT vccisecsswacensavessvsceinavsersadinsersccsteveun ties Wunesnivevisvines 91 FinalEff Select and edit the final effect eee 91 BOUNCE e EE
126. 5 0 HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Mix Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Selects LFO Waveform Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Sets the LFO speed Sets the delay time for the left channel Sets the delay time for the right channel Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the EQ input level Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds L Pre Delay msec R Pre Delay msec Setting the left and right delay time individually allows you to con trol the stereo image 15 MO2 St Flanger Stereo Flanger This effect gives a significant swell and movement of pitch to the sound It is more effective when applied to a sound with a lot of harmonics This is a stereo flanger You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Time Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0ms LFO LFO Waveform cccccceee TRI SIN Shape LFO Shape ccsse 100 100 Sets the delay time from the original sound Selects LFO Waveform Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Phase LFO Phase degree 180 180 Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Depth GOI siiescninetenitnsceatoccnanttartenrs 0 100 Fdback Feedback 100 100 HiDamp High Damp sssee 0 100 Mix Wet Dry ceccceeeees Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet
127. 8 90 F HipHop 2 1 90 F Samba1 1 95 8beat 4 2 120 RockBld 2 8 90 F JHipHop 3 2 90 E Samba1 3 95 8beat 5 8 120 I RockBld 1 4 90 E HipHop 1 4 90 Samba2 4 111 8beat 6 2 120 I RockBlid 2 4 90 E HipHop 2 7 90 I Samba2 4 111 8beat 7 2 120 F RockBld 1 1 90 Rap 4 95 F Samba2 1 111 l 8beat 1 5 120 F RockBld 2 1 90 I Rap 4 95 E JSamba2 5 111 8beat 2 4 120 E RockBld 1 6 90 F Rap 1 95 F 8beat 1 1 120 E RockBld 2 4 90 E Rap 5 95 156 Appendix Numerics LGB TZU ra Kassiin 31 115 QABit O6 Track eeeeeeecceeeeeeeee 31 115 A Adjusting the volume 37 PSINANO GS estase 98 Andlog UP UU ssia 35 Audio CD Create an audio CD 93 Playing back ssissrisrirenrrisrirasi 151 RECOrdINE sspstscvinaiantermenessts 151 AUTO PUNCH key 55 122 Auto punch in out recording 122 AUO a 100 AUX OUTI JaC Ki 45 AUA SEN angenna 43 89 B Backing up Eftect aser dataeniinssmoisaia 70 DONG Cate enra 68 BALANCE sorenenenpa rer tree rr 37 Blank isc ccecccceeccescceseseseeeeeees 29 68 Bounce recording sesede 92 IDY PASS pnan 87 90 C ERA V a 93 CD RW Erase a CD RW 106 CD RW 9 lucra 93 149 CHECK DPI VG eeren 105 CONTAS ene mene en ce nr nee ener 16 Control change iesisciiscscessesnnesnemniees 79 Controleffecis eeicriroiininras 101 COPYRIGHT WARNING 94 Counter CISD AY seivicasitetssccrenicenseines 32 C AAA 38 100 CUC AONE en E ee 38 Current LOCATON irananino 32 CURSOR ROY S en
128. ACK STATUS keys to set the playback tracks 1 10 to PLAY LED lit green and the recording tracks 11 12 to REC LED lit red Adjust the pan of the playback tracks Press the PLAY key to play back and turn the PAN and BALANCE knobs to adjust the stereo positions of tracks 1 10 Set the channel 11 12 BALANCE knob to the center Adjust the playback and input levels Use the CHANNEL faders to adjust the playback and input levels e Press the METER TRACK VIEW key e Select the button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select PostFaderLev so that you can view meters for the faders Adjust the recording level Use the MASTER fader to adjust the recording level When you have finished making adjustments press the STOP key Q Begin bounce recording Refer to steps 8 of Combining twelve tracks of audio and overwrite recording them on two tracks p 64 After recording or track editing you can execute Undo to return to the state prior to recording or track editing p 126 2 Creating an original CD 2 1 Creating an audio CD Using the optional CDRW 1 sold separately installed in the D1200 you can create an audio CD of a song that you record ed on the D1200 For details on installing the CDRW 1 refer to p 149 In order for you to create an audio CD the hard disk must have as much free space as occupied by the song you are creating the total o
129. ACK USB of the sound that precedes the actual start of recording will also be recorded SC RU B A This is not valid at the beginning of the song Also if you use trigger recording to continue recording after the Here you can switch the Scrub Play From Play To and end of a previously recorded track a PreTrigTime set Slow Play functions on off ting other than 000 ms will cause the corresponding The setting will alternate between On Off each time you length of the previously recorded sound to be lost press the SCRUB key By using these functions you can set Locate or Mark times easily and precisely while viewing the waveform The following functions will be available when the SCRUB key is on LED lit e Scrub function Turn the VALUE dial to play back the track data Use this to find a specific location in the song while you listen to the sound This method is similar to manually rotating an analog record on a turntable while you listen to the sound to find a desired location e Play From function When you press the PLAY key playback will begin from the location at which you are currently stopped and will continue for two seconds Then playback will stop and you will return to the loca tion at which playback began e Play To function When you hold down the STOP key and press the PLAY key playback will begin from a location two seconds earlier than where you are cur rently stopped and will contin
130. BALANCE knobs Ch7 12 For each channel these knobs adjust the position pan or left right balance of the stereo signal to the master LR bus gt p 37 For channels 1 6 for which pairing is Off these knobs control panning to the master LR bus For channels 1 6 for which pairing is On and for channels 7 12 these knobs control the left right balance of the stereo signal to the master LR bus These settings can be paired or registered in a scene amp When recording to channels that have a balance setting you must set the knob to CNT 9 CHANNEL faders Ch1 6 Ch7 8 11 12 These faders adjust the recording playback volume of each channel p 37 Channels 7 12 are stereo faders These settings can be paired or registered in a scene e For channels whose TRACK STATUS is PLAY the fader adjusts the playback volume e For channels whose TRACK STATUS is REC the fader adjusts the recording level of the external audio source or the rhythm e For channels whose TRACK STATUS is INPUT the fader adjusts the recording level of the external audio source Faders that adjust the recording level will function dif ferently depending on whether an external input is be ing recorded or bounce recording is being performed e When recording an external input i e when the BOUNCE RecMode tab page Select RecMode parameter is set to Input the channel fader adjusts the recor
131. Bes Del ele EA E This lets you delete a file or folder Destination 001 100 Effect InsO01 128 Mst001 032 Fin033 064 Selects the restore destination song number or effect number The data will be restored to the song number or effect number you select here If you want to restore all songs select Exec Execute cos setcdecsssscseccssesteecessescececesessceccoaes Executes the restore operation The Source song s and user data will be restored to the Destination song s and user data When you restore one song the Source song will be loaded into the Destination song number Songs fol lowing the Destination number will be renumbered upward by one they will not be overwritten When you restore all songs all Source songs will be loaded after the songs that exist on the Destination song drive they will not be overwritten When you restore effect user data the Source user data will be overwritten onto the user data in the song drive Festore UserDatea gp Overwrite ArevousSure Ho 5a Restore UserData 00sssse0 2L eS Nol You can select whether effect user data of the same name as the song will also be restored Press the YES OK key to execute the operation Yes Effect user data will be restored overwriting the existing effect user data No Effect user data will not be restored Effect user
132. CK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose SwapW holeTrack 3 Select the swap source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 4 Select the swap destination track number Set DestTrack to track 1 If you selected two or more tracks for SourceTrack you must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track Select the swap destination V track Set DestVTrack to V track b Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key D Inthe TRACK Vtr1 6 tab page select V track b for track 1 Check the results of the operation Play back the song from the beginning to verify that the data was swapped as you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 In this case return the track 1 V track selection to a Create a fade in fade out FadeTrack This command fades in or fades out the specified region IN OUT of recorded track data By using both of these op erations you can create cross fades e You can fade in or fade out the IN OUT region e You can fade in or fade out one or more tracks simulta neously Fading in Here s how to fad
133. D1200 Digital Recording Studio Owner INPUT 2 INPUT 1 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 FOOT SW EXPRESSION PEDAL 5 5 PHANTOM PHANTOM AUX OUT CD RW installable s Manual zems CD RW reM 0 eeeeeeseeeeeeeee8e22 2 eeeeeneenenee2e2eeeeececece AWEmsS ecooo ceeceeeeecece ee a HDD CD stanpsy ers A eoceeeeececce ee So OBELING MIDI Ph A eeeee e Digital Recording Studio e S e ooo eeceeeeneeeeeeceeeeoeee di eS AG eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee RECORDING 7 8 142 INSEE INPUT TUNER RHYTHM EREEGIS Soro SYSTEM MIX DOWN USB TRACK SONG _ GREEN PLAY ORANGE INPUT RED REC IN OUT PLAY cunson OFF MUTE a IN OUT To END Yo oi L0C1 TOCAN Loc 3 Loc 4 eel ee i Ga MASTER EFFECT j BLES ENE STORE MARK SCENE MASTER a AUTO mastering TINALEFFECT ONCA face pa j NO CANCEL YES OK l BOUNCE EE eee IGGEI RUB TRIGGER SCRU a Fia a m METER haaat TRACK VIEW UNDO E ENTER REW FF STOP PLAY REC aa gt gt gt gt gt E mene SCRUB ON Precautions Location Using the unit in the following locations can result in a mal function e In direct sunlight e Locations of extreme temperature or humidity e Excessively dusty or dirty locations e Locations of excessive vibration e Close to magnetic fields Power supply Please
134. D1200 you must con nect monitor speakers to the MONITOR OUT L R jacks or connect headphones to the PHONES jack for monitoring To select which signals will be monitored a Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page e Normally you will select MasterLR Select the MasterLR button and press the ENTER key to turn it On highlighted thine Aehre ineai ay solo Monitor If the Solo function is on it will overide any settings here Turn the Solo function off before making a selec tion 2 For mixer channels whose TRACK STATUS is PLAY LED lit green you will hear the track playback when the recorder is playing For mixer channels whose TRACK STATUS is REC LED lit red you will hear the sound of the external input If the AutoIn button is On and the TRACK STA TUS of a mixer channel is REC you will hear the sound of that track during playback and the sound of the external input while recording and when stopped This is useful when doing punch in out recording If Autoln is Off you will always hear the sound of the external input 3 Use the MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob to adjust the volume of the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the volume of the PHONES jack 2 6 Adjusting the cue level The CHANNEL faders of the D1200 are used to adjust both the recording level of each track and the volume level
135. DestTrack to 1 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the IN location to hear the results If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 As the specified region IN OUT is set longer it will correspondingly take longer for processing to be fin ished and for the Completed indication to appear Erasing punch in out noise Here s how to erase punch in out noise from the IN OUT region of track 1 1 Register the IN and OUT locations Set the IN point slightly ahead of the noise you want to erase and set the OUT point to a location slightly after the noise gt p 33 118 This editing can be performed only on the transition be tween events 2 Select Optimize In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to OptimizeTrack 3 Select the optimize mode Select the Mode button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box For this example select Erase Punch Noise and press the YES OK key to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page 4 Select the number of the track that you want to opti mize For this
136. E E 92 RecMode Select the recording mode ssssssssssssseseseseseseses 92 Bounce Parameters for bounce recording ceeseeeees 92 CD ee ee EE EE a 93 Prepare Prepare to create an audio CD cee 93 CDR RW Create and play back an audio CD sssee s 93 TUNER arene nee eeernterse mn enn E one ve te OTe 95 RAHYTHM eeaeee Mire rosacea ita oucaa dus Senin d exec ean obncia bios 95 SetUp Specify the tempo and rhythm eee 95 TmpMap Tempo map editing eee cece ceeeeeeeeeeees 96 TmpTrk Create a tempo Track wiveseccvmsctensiecyrsnssansscemenvecenctecets 97 INPUT OUTPUT SOLO nercenigini er 98 Ch1 6 Select inputs for mixer channels 1 6 00 cc 98 Ch7 12 Select inputs for mixer channels 7 12 004 98 InEqi 4 Adjust the EQ for inputs 1 4 ees 99 Solo Select the signal to be soloed eee cece tees 99 TRACK SCENE NO CANCEL a TAB gt HDD CD STANDBY SONG CURSOR YES OK ENTER Monitor Parameters and settings ccccecese secs eeeeeeees 100 Phase Specify the phase of the mixer channels 100 SYSTEM UOD cee ee aera ne ee ee Pe ea 101 Control Foot switch and control change device pedal MIDI SOLOS oec naar TE ER 101 MIDEM SERN E rarior a RE 101 Sync Synchronization settings sseeesersesseesersesererersereree 102 MMC MME SeN Siia OEN 102 B U Rst Backup and restore ecsssssiesersensuccninssissienrass 102 DiskUtil Disk dr
137. EQ Excit1 The chain structure of each multi effect is shown below For an explanation of the parameters of each effect in the chain refer to Effects within multi effect programs MM1 MM33 and their parameters beginning on the following page 55 MM1 P4EQ Exciter P4EQ Excit1 56 MM2 P4EQ Wah PAEQ Wah 57 MM3 P4EQ Cho Flng PAEQ ChFl1 58 MM4 P4EQ Phaser P4EQ Phaser 59 MM5 P4EQ Mt Delay P4EQ Mt Dly 60 MM6 Comp Wah Comp2 Wah 61 MM7 Comp AmpSim Comp2 AmpSim 62 MM8 Comp OD HiG Comp ODHiG 63 MM9 Comp P4EQ Comp1 P4EQ 64 MM10 Comp Cho Fing Comp2 ChFl1 65 MM11 Comp Phaser Comp2 Phaser 66 MM12 Comp Mt Delay Comp2 Mt Dly 67 MM13 Exciter Comp Excit2 Comp 1 68 MM14 Exciter Limiter Excit2 Lmtr 138 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 MM15 Exciter Cho Flng Excit2 ChFI1 MM 16 Exciter Phaser Excit2 Phaser MM17 Exciter Mt Delay Excit2 Mt Dly MM 18 Limiter PAEQ Lmtr PAEQ MM19 Limiter Cho Flng Lmtr ChFI2 MM20 Limiter Phaser Lmtr Phaser MM21 Limiter Mt Delay Lmtr Mt Dly MM22 OD HiG Cho Flng ODHiG ChFl1 MM23 OD HiG Phaser ODHiG Phaser MM24 OD HiG Mt Delay ODHiG Mt Dly MM25 OD HiG AmpSim ODHiG AmpSim MM26 Wah AmpS
138. ER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB 88 InsEff4 Select and edit insert effect 4 Here you can make selections and settings for insert effect 4 This will be displayed only if you set SelectEffType to linloutx4 or linloutx8 in the InsAss tab page p 85 Refer to InsEff1 Select and edit insert effect 1 p 86 InsEff5 8 Select and edit insert effects 5 8 Here you can make selections and settings for insert effects 5 8 This will be displayed only if you set SelectEffType to linloutx8 in the InsAss tab page gt p 85 For insert effects 5 8 use SelectEffect5 8 to select an ef fect and then edit it EffectNumber 001 01 000 someones Up Dr rg ERAS ere Eff ETTE LInsAss A Insktfi ft Inskttd H Insett3 H Insc tt4 H Inss 3 1 SelectEffect5 8 000 Eff5 Eff6 Eff7 Eff8 Select the insert effect 5 8 that will be displayed in this page Editing bypass settings and rename etc will apply only to the effect that is shown here For other details refer to InsEff1 Select and edit insert effect 1 gt p 86 Eq1 4 Adjust the EQ for mixer chan nels 1 Here you can apply EQ equalization to the playback of mixer channels 1 4 Make these settings when you want to apply EQ to the playback This is a three band EQ with shelving type high and low bands and a mid EQ with adjustable center frequency 908 01 O
139. ES B12 812 120 B4 O4dMsbt Rocki H gi B13 820 128 84 04 Sbt Rocks H Mapdes Measaa6 oe6 J 128 A484 Hihat 2 Delete the tempo map e Select the Delete button A message of Are You Sure will ask you to confirm Del Delete Tem atta ABS SelectAll LHe ves _ lf Are You Sure e Press the YES OK key and the selected tempo map will be deleted If you turn the Select All button On all maps other than 001 will be deleted and the settings of map 001 will also be deleted 3 Verify that the tempo map was deleted e Display the tempo map list and verify that the map was deleted H01 B61 be4 128 84 04Rsbt Rock H g Be Ber 128 B4 O4Msbt Rock amp This operation cannot be undone e If you want to edit the tempo map select the Edit button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Edit the parameters as necessary Press the YES OK key to accept the new settings Tempo track The tempo track records MIDI clock data from an external MIDI sequencer or tap tempo data Recording MIDI Clock data from an external MIDI sequencer and using it as the tempo track Here s how MIDI Clock data from an external MIDI sequencer can be recorded as tempo data on the tempo track You can use this when you want to synchronize a D1200 song with song data created on a MIDI sequencer in which the tempo changes continuously 1 Specify the time signatu
140. FECT Preset32 User32 FINAL EFFECT Preset32 User32 Progo Categ ProgramName Algorithm EFF1 PrghoCateg ProgramName Algorithm EFF1 CS ynamics 10 ReverDHall Reverb Hall St Comp St Compressor SmoothHall Smooth Hall StudioComp St Compressor WetPlate Reverb Wet Plate TwoMix 60 s St Compressor gt DryPlate Reverb Dry Plate TwoMix 70 s St Compressor 5 ReverbRoom Reverb Room St Limiter St Limiter 3 BrightRoom Bright Room ReMSTR POP St Limiter 2 ER Early Reflections ReMSTR DANCE St Limiter 2 DarkPlate Reverb Wet Plate StudioLimitr St Limiter BrightPlate Reverb Dry Plate St Gate St Gate ARENA Reverb Hall St P4EQ St Parametric 4band EQ P4EQ Cathedral Smooth Hall LargeSizeEffect 10 Club Reverb Room St G7EQ St Graphic 7band EQ G7EQ 2 ListeningRoom Bright Room St MBLimiter St Multiband Limiter SBnLmt gt NeoAcoustic _ Early Reflections ReMasterL A St Multiband Limiter SBnLmt A Garage Bright Room BrRoom GrooveBeat St Multiband Limiter SBnLmt TwoMixHipHop St Multiband Limiter SBnLmt L C R Delay LCRDly TwoMixDance St Multiband Limiter SBnLmt St Cross Delay StDly 2MixGirlPop St Multiband Limiter SBnLmt St Multitap Delay MtDly Digital Rock St Multiband Limiter SBnLmt St Modulation Delay ModDly TwoMix 80 s St Multiband Limiter SBnLmt gt ER_Large Early ReflectionsL ER L a feb ReverbHall Reverb Hall HALL St Chorus SmoothHall Smooth Hall SmtHall gs St Flanger WetPlate Reverb Wet Plate WPlate
141. GA FRC OF a 4 O 1 TrackLevelMeter cccccsssscccssssccccsssscccsscccees 1 2 3 4 CLP 8 18 42dB Displays the input level from each track The horizontal axis indicates the channel and the vertical axis indicates the level 2 HighEg Fe 10kHz 15 0 15 0 dB Specifies the gain of the high EQ This adjusts the high frequency range of the sound This setting lets you boost or cut the region above 10 kHz in a range of 15 0 15 0 dB 3 MIGEC cssvosssvsesssencsvercevencvsnees 100Hz 20 0k Hz Specifies the center frequency of the mid EQ in a range of 100 Hz 20 0 kHz A MidEq cescsescescseecseecsecsseeee 15 0 15 0 dB Specifies the gain of the mid EQ This adjusts the mid frequency range of the sound This setting lets you boost or cut the region specified by MidFc in a range of 15 0 15 0 dB 5 LowEg 00000 Fc 100Hz 15 0 15 0 dB Specifies the gain of the low EQ This adjusts the low frequency range of the sound This setting lets you boost or cut the region below 100 Hz in a range of 15 0 15 0 dB Pairs adjacent mixer channels p 38 86 Eq5 8 Adjust the EQ for mixer chan nels 5 8 Here you can apply EQ equalizer to the playback of tracks 5 8 Refer to Eql 4 Adjust the EQ for mixer channels 1 4 Reference Eq9 12 Adjust the EQ for mixer channels 9 12 Here you can apply EQ equalizer to the p
142. Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Sets the output gain Mix Wet Dry 00 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and 34 LS3 Vocoder dry sounds This effect applies the character of the right channel signal Modulator to the left channel signal input Carrier A com mon use of this effect is to produce the sound of various instru ments by inputting a voice to the Modulator via a microphone A special effect is also achieved by using rhythm or effect sounds Strings or distortion guitar sounds with a lot of har monics are suitable as a Carrier Carri L Carrier Trim csccecseseee 0 100 Modul R Modulator Trim 6 0 100 Formnt Formant Shift cccecce 2 42 Sets the input level of left channel Car rier Sets the input level of right channel Modulator Sets the height of the frequency for the vocoder effect Mode Mode scce Slow Medium Fast Switches Pitch Shifter mode L R L R Pitch evsssesvarcnnnansees Normal Up Dwn Determines whether or not the L R pitch shift amount is inverted Pitch Pitch Shift 1 2tone 24 24 Sets the pitch shift amount in steps of a semitone Fine Fine Cent scceeee 100 100c Sets the pitch shift amount in steps of one cent LDly Lch Delay msec 0 1000ms Sets the delay time for the left channel RDly Rch Delay msec 0 1000ms Sets the delay time for
143. In addition the NO CANCEL key moves back to the previous tab page and the YES OK key proceeds to the next tab page 46 ENTER key Use this key to finalize a parameter setting or on off set ting Front panel 1 CDRW 1 drive bay The CDRW 1 CD R RW drive option sold separately can be installed in this bay p 149 2 GUITAR IN jack You can connect a guitar or bass guitar to this jack This is an unbalanced phone input jack with an imped ance of 1 MQ 3 PHONES jack You can connect a set of headphones to this jack This is a stereo phone jack It outputs the same signal as MONITOR OUT L R 4 PHONES LEVEL knob 0 10 This knob adjusts the volume level of the headphones Larger markings indicate a higher volume Rear panel 1 DC IN connector Connect the included AC DC power supply to this con nector 2 S P DIF OUT jack This is an optical S P DIF format IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 digital output jack stereo You can use an optical cable to connect it to the optical digital input jack of a DAT or MD The same audio signal as the MASTER OUT L R jacks is digitally output from this jack at a sampling rate of 44 1 kHz 3 S P DIF IN jack This is an optical S P DIF format IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 digital input jack stereo You can use an optical cable to connect it to the optical digital output jack of a DAT or MD Use a digital cable that is no longer than 5 meters This jack
144. LFO Phase degree 180 180 Speed Panning Frequency HZ 0000 0 02 20 0Hz Depth Panning Depth ccccee 0 100 Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the delay time for the left channel Sets the feedback amount for the left channel Sets the delay time for the right channel Sets the feedback amount for the right channel Sets the damping amount in the high range Sets the damping amount in the low range Selects LFO Waveform Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Sets the panning speed Sets the panning width Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Modulation MO1 MO7 Category Modulation type effects 14 MO1 St Chorus Stereo Chorus This effect adds thickness and warmth to the sound by modu lating the delay time of the input signal A two band equalizer can be used to adjust the tone of the effect sound You can con trol the spaciousness of the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other LFO LFO Waveform cccscceee TRI SIN Phase LFO Phase degree 180 180 Speed LFO Frequency H7z 0 02 20 0Hz LDly L Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0ms RDly R Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0ms Depth Depth ssvscibsiucrstaartmwsmenseens 0 100 EQTrim EQ Trim ossis 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 1
145. LO Monitor tab page Au toIn setting Off p 100 If cue is selected the cue level of each channel may have been lowered In the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page press the Level button and raise the level gt p 39 The digital input may become inaudible for two or three seconds If the sampling frequency of the digital input source device changes while it is connected e g 48 kHz 44 1 kHz it will take the sampling rate converter of the D1200 two or three seconds to lock to that frequency Please wait until you hear sound The format of the digital input source may be incorrect Connect an instrument or digital audio device that is CP 1201 or S P DIF compliant Can t hear an audio CD inserted in the CDRW 1 L gt LI gt gt Is the output of the internal CD R RW drive assigned to a mixer channel In the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page assign the internal CD R RW drive to a mixer channel and set TRACK STATUS to INPUT orange The CD Monitor sound is not output from the MAS TER OUT jacks Connect your speaker system to the MONITOR OUT jacks or listen through headphones Is the CD R RW drive installed correctly Refer to the installation instructions and verify that that the drive is installed correctly gt p 149 Can t hear sound other than the audio CD L gt CD Monitor may be turned
146. MIDISync Mode is set to MTC Slave If due to some problem the MTC data is not received in continuous succession the D1200 will detect that there is a problem with the MTC data and may cease syn chronization and stop playback If this occurs you can lower the MTC RecvErrorLevel so that synchronized playback will continue even if slight problems occur with MTC reception If you set this to 0 synchronization playback will not stop even if a problem occurs amp If you are synchronizing with a device other than the D1200 as the MTC master incompatibilities between the devices may cause synchronization problems unless you play back from the beginning of the song MMC MMC settings The D1200 can transmit and receive MMC MIDI Machine Control messages This means that when synchronizing two 1200 units or when using the D1200 with a MMC compatible MIDI se quencer you can control operations such as song playback stop and fast forward from the master device A Some MIDI devices may not support the MMC func tionality of the D1200 For details on the MMC function ality of the D1200 refer to the MIDI implementation 102 MMCMaster 001 01 000 Select MMC Mode MMCBevID BBE 2 Cott Control H MIDI H Sync H AB U R tf DiskUtil 1 1 Select MMC Mode Transmit Receive Off Switches MMC transmission reception on off Transmit The D1200 will transmit MMC Receive The D1200 wi
147. On so that other sounds cannot be heard If CD Monitor is On all sounds other than from the CDRW 1 will be muted Turn this Off unless you want to use the CDRW 1 to hear an audio CD gt p 94 No sound from AUX OUT Can t apply external effect AUX OUT gt p 145 Can t hear rhythm sound p 145 Can t hear scrub playback LI gt The incorrect track may be selected in the scrub page Select the correct track 143 Block diagram Index Rhythm Pattern List Effect Program List D1200 specifications About the CDRW Messages Troubleshooting MIDI implementation chart Channel fader or EQ does not work Fader does not work During playback the channel faders whose TRACK STATUS is REC are used to adjust the input level the playback level is fixed at unity Ifyou set TRACK STATUS to PLAY you will be able to adjust the playback level _ When pairing is on the even numbered faders of chan nels 1 6 will not function The audio level of paired channels is controlled by the fader of the odd numbered channel at the left _ Ifyou switch pairing off after channels were paired or if you recall a scene the audio level of a channel may not match the position of the fader Raise or lower the fader so that it matches the actual vol ume level EQ does not work The input can be adjusted by the Input EQ the Channel EQ will not affect the
148. PUT SOLO nn METER AUTO IN LOCI UNDO BRP MSGI TRIGGER LOOP pny SCENE MARK TT apnoea SONG TRACK USB After performing one of the following operations you can use the Undo function to return to the state prior to the op eration and the Redo function to bring back the most recent state e Recording e Track editing Copy Track Insert Track Erase Track Delete Track Swap Track Reverse Track Optimize Track Exp Comp Track Copy Whole Track Swap Whole Track Fade Track Normalize Track e WAV file import urrent Level B1 C 1 Current Level cccccccssssssssssseeeee 00 99 Indicates the currently selected undo level i e how many operations prior to the present Current Level 00 The most recent state Current Level 01 99 The state prior to the previous operation the previous 99 operations 2 Undo List cccccccccsssssssseeeseee LLEVEIOT 99 This area displays the undo levels and the operation his tory Press the New button to select an earlier level Press the Old button to select a later level Return to the page in which you were before pressing the UNDO key A Levell s0sseee L99Level 8Level 1Level Specifies the undo level Data will be saved for as many prior operations as you specify here You can select 99 operations 8 operations or 1 operation as the undo level 5 UT re om I gt e
149. PrePlay tab page is displayed 2 3 Other types of playback Playing back a different virtual track As described in 1 2 Switching the virtual track for recording p 53 select a virtual track that you recorded and play it back Loop playback This repeatedly plays the IN OUT region of the song This lets you check the contents of that region or can be used in conjunction with auto punch recording to per form loop recording p 54 1 Select the track s that you want to play For each track that you want to play press the TRACK STATUS key to set it to PLAY mode LED lit green 2 Register the region IN OUT that you want to loop p 33 118 These settings can also be made in LOOP Loop or in AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page Wave 3 Access the LOOP Loop tab page and turn the Loop button On two l 001 01 000 In 942 61 080 Out 605 41 060 4 Begin loop playback When you press the PLAY key playback will begin at the IN point and the IN OUT region will play repeat edly 6 Press the STOP key to stop playback Operation 3 Tackediing UU UUU You can use track editing commands to copy a track insert blank space erase a track delete a track reverse a track op timize a track exchange tracks expand compress a track copy an entire track exchange two entire tracks create a fade in fade out or normalize the level In some cases
150. SceneheadsUtt Rename EditLoc f EdtFiltr Recall Durwrt As described in 3 3 Recalling a scene recall the scene that you want to delete If you want to delete all scenes select any of the scenes 2 In the SCENE ReadDel tab page select the Delete button and press the ENTER key Dre mc Delete Scene l SelectAll ig Are vouSure Readbelgnnview f Verify the Delete Scene number shown in the upper left and if this is the scene you want to delete press the Operation YES OK key to delete it The scene will not be deleted if you press the NO CANCEL key If you want to delete all scenes select the SelectAll button and press the ENTER key to turn it On Then press the YES OK key to delete all scenes 3 8 Applying filtering to all scenes Applying filters will allow you to prevent specific parame ters on each channel from being affected by scene changes This can be a very handy feature In the SCENE ReadDel tab page select the Filter button and press the ENTER key to make the display show Select SceneFilter Scene iter SceneReadiOtt CO e I 2 Select the parameter s that you want to disable There are two pages of settings so use the Next but ton to view the next page Select SceneFilter The first page contains parameters for each channel For example if you want the Scene Filter to prevent sc
151. Select inputs for mixer channels 1 6 98 Ch7 12 Select inputs for mixer channels 7 12 98 InEq1 4 Adjust the EQ for inputs 14 99 Solo Select the signal to be soloed eee 99 Monitor Parameters and settings ccceeeeeeees 100 Phase Specify the phase of the mixer channels 100 OEM US Bees cscs deconassvesessicedendueaivenasdccaics 101 Control Foot switch and control change device pedal MIDD settings roncon 101 MIDE MIDI Setting S eaa eed ENE 101 Sync Synchronization settings eee eens 102 MMC MIMIC SCEIINGS wis csastsnseastesrenicassapaignseeaxcuntnaetatets 102 B U Rst Backup and restOre sscssseserseosseesees 102 DiskUtil Disk drive management cece 105 Vtr1 6 Select virtual tracks 1 6 0 eee eee 108 Vtr7 12 Select virtual tracks 7 12 0 108 EditTrk Perform track editing operations 108 Import Import WAV files anere i ia 113 Export Export a WAV fle sisvisivwiseessesaneasivenetes 114 SONG as eles tcere nse A ARE 116 SelSone SClECE A SON GS re ee ateeessia esas ans 116 EditSong Perform song edit operations 0 116 PrgPlay Program playback of songs eee 118 IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 END LOC4 118 MARK ccccescedeastabagasenncsetadesspavananas nteseuatadases 119 Matk Edit Walk Seseiedscrsdseivia tes ctasvatsenasneunenbooarsessacuenaied 119 SCENE coinein E EEE aE 120 ReadDel Switch scene playback on off a
152. Spread This parameter sets the pan width of the effect sound The stereo image is widest with a value of 50 and the effect sound of both channels is output from the center with a value of 0 9 DL2 St Cross Delay Stereo Cross Delay This is a stereo delay and can by used as a cross feedback delay effect in which the delay sounds cross over between the left and right by changing the feedback routing Mode Stereo Cross Stereo Cross Switches between stereo delay and cross feedback delay LTime L Delay Time msec 0 680ms Sets the delay time for the left channel RTime R Delay Time msec 0 680ms Sets the delay time for the right channel LFback L Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the left channel RFback R Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the right channel HiDamp High Damp cseeee 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp s sseseeee 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range Spread Spread cccsseeeeeeceees 50 50 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Mix Wet Dry s s s a111 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds 10 DL3 St Multitap Delay Stereo Multitap Delay The left and right Multitap Delays have two taps respectively Changing the routing of feedback and tap output allows you to create
153. Start Tutorial p 26 2 4 Pairing By specifying adjacent odd numbered and even numbered channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 as a pair you can adjust the values of both channels simultaneously by editing the value of the odd numbered channel This is convenient when you want to make mixer settings for a stereo recorded track The following settings can be paired TRACK STATUS key EQ channel EQ EffSnd1 2 effect send AuxSend external send PAN knob CHANNEL fader The TRACK STATUS keys and CHANNEL faders will be paired automatically when you pair two chan nels For EQ EffSnd AuxSend and Pan you can specify individually whether pairing will be enabled Select the H SelChPair button in the INPUT OUT PUT SOLO EQ or INSERT EFFECT pages and press the ENTER key to open the Select Channel Pair dialog box 2 Here you can select which channels you would like to pair Select one of the 1 2 5 6 button and press the ENTER key so that the button is displayed with a Select Channel air BE Get Cee 3 Select the functions that will be paired for the channels you selected in Select Channel Pair Select the Eq Send Aux and Pan function that you want to pair and press the ENTER key to turn pairing On Press the YES OK key to apply the set ting 2 5 Monitor settings In order to monitor the sound of the
154. TO END region with out affecting the pitch and copied there three times sourceTrack 3 001 01 000 GR Exp CompTrack_ TA DestTrack SourceTrack Times Register the IN OUT TO and END locations p 33 118 2 Select Exp CompTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose Exp CompTrack 3 Select the expansion compression source track Set SourceTrack to track 1 4 Select the track to which the expanded compressed data will be copied Set DestTrack to track 2 If you selected two or more tracks for SourceTrack you must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track 6 Specify the number of times the data will be copied Set Times to 3 Select the expansion compression mode Select the Mode button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box SelectExp CompMade SelectPitch Fined Variable For this example select Fast and Fixed Then select the OK button and press the ENTER key to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Check the results of the operation Press the
155. TO LOC3 key and play back from the TO location to verify that the operation produced the results you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 As the specified region IN OUT is set longer it will correspondingly take longer for processing to be fin ished and for the Completed indication to appear Copy an entire track Copying to a V track virtual track CopyWholeTrack This command copies an entire recorded track from the be ginning to the end to another track e You can copy one or more tracks simultaneously e You can copy the currently selected V track to other V tracks This can be used in ways such as the following e You can copy a track to several virtual tracks and use those tracks to create several different takes Copying an entire track Here s how to copy track 1 to V track a currently selected of track 2 execute 0071 01 000 B CopyWholeTrack_ 1 2 a Exec UED um nport C SourceTrack DestTrack DestVTrack 4 Select CopyWholeTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose CopyWholeTrack 2 Select the copy source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 3 Select the copy destination track number Set DestTrack to track 2 If you selected two or more tracks for SourceTrack you
156. TRACK STATUS key to select PLAY and press the PLAY FACE STATUS to PLAY key to play back At this time track 3b will play back Quick Start Tutorial In order to play track 3a which you recorded first press the TRACK key access the Vtr1 6 tab page select 3b and turn the VALUE dial to change it to 3a To exit Modeling mode Compare the two takes you recorded in virtual tracks a and b gt p 47 When you have decided which take is the best leave that virtual track selected Step 3 Mixing In this step you will complete your song by applying effects to the tracks and adjusting the volume and EQ to create the overall balance This proc ess is called mixing Step 1 Quick recording 1 Applying an insert effect to a track Previously we applied the insert effects to the inputs to process the sound as we recorded Here s how to apply an insert effect into a mixer channel and process the playback sound of the track In this example we are assigning an insert effect to the vocal Mic recording on track 3 1 Select which tracks will be played back Press the TRACK STATUS key of each recorded track to select PLAY mode LED lit green theplayback of the selected tracks will be included in the mix 2 Access the INSERT EFFECT InsAss tab page Step 2 Overdubbing assign E TE 001 01 000l _ SelectEffType InsertTo i 3 Hi3 ortl 2 Horti E tint out
157. The D1200 can import WAV files from an ISO9660 level 1 format CD ROM CD R or CD RW l Executing this operation will overwrite the import des tination track l Importing or exporting a WAV file will require a certain amount of time The following table shows some exam ples of the time required to import or export a five minute 16 bit 44 1 kHz monaural WAV file 1 minute 40 seconds 1 minute 20 seconds Export 6 minutes 10 seconds 1 minute 20 seconds 5 minutes 20 seconds 4 minutes 10 seconds The processing time will also depend on the for mat of the WAV file and on the type of disc you are using li li MASTER RYTM Tuner 11 co yaounce ENA VD erect ea INSERT I Moneual COUNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO oO METER AUTO IN LOCI SYSTEM UNDO ps SCRUB m LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB execute 6001 01 000 __ Import File 1 DriveList cccccccssssscccsssssscccccsssscecees S C U Selects the drive For details on the drive refer to Drive gt p 103 2 WavFileList cccssccssssccssscccssscccssscccsscccseecs Selects the WAV file Press the YES OK key to confirm your selection If you press the NO CANCEL key your selection will be cancelled E FERC_44E Cancel In the WavFileList screen the folder is indicated as folder name To view the contents of a folder Select folder name and press t
158. VirtualTrack la Th Selects the virtual track for each track 1 6 Each track has eight virtual tracks a h The virtual track you select here will be used for recording and playback 6a 6h Selected track Recorded track s 2 SelectAll ccccccccccccsssccccssssceesccseseees On Off If you want to simultaneously select the same virtual track number for all tracks 1 12 turn this On and select the desired virtual track for any one of the tracks elie On All tracks will be set to the same virtual track number LSelectAll_JOff Virtual tracks can be selected individu ally for each track Vir7 12 Select virtual tracks 7 12 For details refer to Vtr1 6 A In the case of a 24 bit song this page cannot be selected 1 Select VirtualTrack ccccccssssccssssscccsssscccssesces 7 8a 7 8h 11 12a 11 12h Select the virtual track for each pair of tracks 2 SelectAll cccccccccssssssssssssccccccceeeees On Off EditTrk Perform track editing opera tions wr E 001 01 000 1 om CopyT rack E 2 EE utr leg Edit Trk amp Only the currently selected V track will be affected by these editing operations gt Vtr 1 6 Vtr7 12 Virtu al tracks that are not selected will not be affected How ever CopyWholeTrack and SwapWholeTrack are exceptions to this 108 The editing
159. a CD RW disc perform the procedure described in 3 Erasing a CD RW disc p 76 before you use it e When writing ends the display will indicate Com pleted If you want to create another CD with the 66 same content press the YES OK key To proceed to the next step press the NO CANCEL key pe ee a aTi WriteSongTaCb ReR Ww Completed i Write another CD HH 9 If you want to write another song to the disc repeat steps 8 Subsequently written songs will be added after the last song on the CD R RW Finalize the disc If you want to be able to play the CD R RW in an audio CD player select the Final button when you are fin ished and press the ENTER key to finalize the disc A message will ask you to confirm execution If you are sure you want to execute press the YES OK key Finalize A oFurther writing Tobise Liq Are You Sure Prepare ACOR Riwf Once a disc has been finalized no further songs can be written to it Finalize a disc only after you have written all the songs you want to write to that disc e When finalization has been completed the tray of the CDRW 1 will open di Play the disc in an audio CD player to verify that the disc was written correctly Play it back on a CD player to verify that the audio CD was created correctly Since audio CD players are sometimes unable to play CD RW discs we recommend that you use CD R me dia Making an audio CD f
160. a track OptimizeTrack This command removes noise and optimizes the recorded track data in the specified region IN OUT Optimizing track data Here s how to optimize the IN OUT region of track 1 so that DiskBusy warnings will no longer appear Execute S 001 01 000 E H OptimizeTrack__ 1 HEC UE tre de eait rk Tmport export J DestTrack 1 Register the IN and OUT locations Set the IN point slightly ahead of where DiskBusy warnings start being displayed and set the OUT point to a location where these warnings are no longer dis played p 33 118 2 Select Optimize In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to OptimizeTrack 3 Select the optimize mode Select the Mode button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select Optimize Mode Erase Silence JErase Funch Moise For this example select Normal and press the YES OK key to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page 4 Select the number of the track that you want to opti mize Find the track whose data you suspect to be fragmented here we will assume it is track 1 and set DestTrack to that track number 1 in this example 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Co
161. ab page When you leave this page the setting will automatically be turned Off O INSERT I EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL fim RHYTHM TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO O METER AUTO IN LOCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB Monitor Parameters and settings Here you can select the audio signals that will be output from the monitor output MONITOR OUT L R jacks and headphone output PHONES jack 4 2 5 3 1 Master lR esesesesesescesesesesescscecsoecoesesescscececeoe Sends the master LR bus to the monitor output Nor mally you will select this Werte On Send the signal to monitor output MasterLR_ Off Don t send the signal to monitor output If even one signal is turned On in the Solo tab page this will be selected automatically It will not be possible to select MasterLR or Cue If you want to select these you must first turn Off all soloed signals in the Solo tab page GES On Send the signal to monitor output Off Don t send the signal to monitor output Selects the bus to which the rhythm sound will be sent On Send the rhythm to the monitor LR bus Choose this setting when you want to output the track audio from the MASTER OUT L R jacks and listen to the rhythm only through headphones such as during a live performance
162. ack This outputs the external send audio signal from each mixer channel The send amount is adjusted in the MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND AuxSnd tab page Connect this jack to an external effect processor This is a phone jack Parts and their function Basic operation Objects in the display and their function Preparations Listening to the demo song 7 TRACK STATUS keys These keys are used to switch each track between play record or mute states The status of the track will alter nate each time you press the key PLAY LED lit green The track can be played REC LED lit red The track can be recorded When recording from the analog digital inputs you can select up to four tracks for recording two tracks in Modeling mode INPUT LED lit orange The track can receive an exter nal audio signal This state can be selected only while stopped Select this when you want to perform while listening to other tracks so that you can rehearse before recording or if you want to mix an external input source with the playback MUTE LED dark The track is muted silent A The states that can be selected will depend on the state and settings of the recorder While stopped PLAY INPUT REC MUTE gt PLAY While recording or playing PLAY lt MUTE INPUT MUTE Modeling mode PLAY gt REC MUTE gt PLAY These settings can be paired or registered in a scene 8 PAN knobs Ch1 6
163. ack to verify that the data was imported correctly Operation 3 2 Exporting writing a WAV file You can export write audio data as a WAV file in the fol lowing formats Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz Bit depth 16 bit 24 bit Channels 1 monaural 2 stereo When exporting to a CD R RW disc you can export ad ditional files to the same disc at a later time Exported WAV file data can be read by the D1200 or by a computer even if the disc has not been finalized WAV files exported to a CD R RW are in ISO9660 level 1 format Files exported to the internal USB drive can be saved to your computer Exporting a WAV file Here s how you can copy the IN OUT region of tracks 1 and 2 in a 16 bit song to the clipboard and export this audio data to a stereo WAV file named D1200_ST WAV Select a 16 bit song that you created gt p 31 1 3 Selecting different songs 2 Register the IN and OUT locations p 33 118 3 Copy the track data to the clipboard soweetrack E 001 01 000 m CopyTr rack i 2 e o gt U e C D E e Inthe TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to Copy Track e Set SourceTrack to 1 2 e Set DestTrack to Clip2 The number indicates the number of tracks in the clip board e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key e The display will ask AreYouSure Press the YES OK key to execute e When the
164. age select the Auto Punch button and press the ENTER key to turn it Operation On This turns on the auto punch in out recording The AUTO PUNCH key will light an E 001 01 000 012 061 400 Wave In a l T Out 2 Set the IN LOC1 point punch in to specify the loca tion where you want to begin recording and set the OUT LOC2 point punch out to specify the location where you want to stop recording For details on how to register the IN LOC1 and OUT LOC2 locations refer to Registering a location to one of the Locate keys p 33 In the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page you can select the Wave button and press the ENTER key to view the waveform allowing you to set the IN and OUT points more accurately The time locations you specify will overwrite the previ ously specified locations for the IN LOC1 and OUT LOC2 keys 3 Connect your input device select a track for recording and adjust the recording level Refer to 1 1 Basic recording p 53 4 Specify the monitor output signal Refer to Manual punch in out 2 gt p 54 6 Specify how much of the song will play before recording begins and how much will play after recording ends In the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page press the RolTime button and press the ENTER key to open the SetRollTime dialog box SetkollT ime PreFall Az PostRoll A2 Unit Meas
165. al rhythm pattern CD R RW drive will be recorded The channel faders will adjust the recording level of each track Bounce Bounce recording The master LR bus will be recorded The channel faders will adjust the playback level of each track and the master fader final effect will adjust the recording level amp If you select Bounce two tracks will always be re corded simultaneously Bounce Parameters for bounce recording For the bounce recording procedure refer to p 28 29 64 recvTre f 007 01 000 B ietreinset OlT Current 1 Select BounceMode 101Tr 2In gt 21Tr 12Tr gt 2Tr Specifies the bounce recording mode 10Tr 2In 2Tr Select this when you want to combine ten tracks of playback with two inputs and record the combined result on two tracks The input signals you specify in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 tab page and Ch7 12 tab page will be valid for channels whose TRACK STATUS keys you set to REC LED lit red and will be recorded together with the playback tracks 12Tr 2Tr Select this when you want to combine twelve tracks of playback and record the result on two tracks The track playback for channels whose TRACK STA TUS key is set to REC LED lit red will also be valid and will be recorded along with the other playback tracks You can apply a master effect to multiple tracks as you combine them to two tracks When creating an audio CD perform bounce rec
166. also be connected These TRS phone jacks do not individually allow stereo input TRIM knob 60 10 4 dBu These knobs adjust the input level Input level calibra tion marks are printed on the panel Adjust the TRIM knobs so that the peak indicators the LEDs near each knob light when the input level of the connected instru ment or device is loudest 15 11 12 13 14 Although the input level will depend on the device or performance here are some guidelines for setting these knobs 60 40 dBu mic input 30 dBu guitar or bass guitar 10 dBu CD player or other consumer audio device 4 dBu keyboard or studio equipment l If nothing is connected you may hear hum or noise 4 when you raise the TRIM knobs FOOT SW jack A foot switch connected to this jack can be used to oper ate basic recorder functions when your hands are occu pied by playing an instrument You can use a foot switch to control play stop to start stop manual punch recording to register a mark or to record tap tempo gt p 101 Connect a PS 1 foot switch sold separately to this jack EXPRESSION PEDAL jack A pedal connected to this jack can be used to control a specified parameter of an insert effect This lets you con trol an effect in realtime while you perform or record p 44 Connect an EXP 2 or XVP 10 expression pedal sold sep arately to this jack AUX OUT j
167. an 48 Selecting a rhythm pattern 48 Setting the tempo and time signa BURG AE OE E aneeee 48 Rhythm pattern 0 0 ceeee 48 95 S YP PIE epena 36 Sampling rate converter 4 36 Saving data to your computer de Scene Play OAK xsecaentenerpuicatadinas 39 RESISITE ierti R 39 Scene playback on off 120 POC EIN EE ROY secs ssactocsonsenteatesesreautstes 120 Soll PUTON angaa 12 LE a E a PENS EEEE E E A 34 124 oC RUB key ennea an 34 AIVE TEE EE 102 Slow Play rcsoun 124 Ola a a A een 39 98 158 DOME eo n aa hassaaiess 31 Editing the name of a song31 116 New SOng ernearen 31 DElECE A SONG sonnern 31 116 Song drive C DECR oiana R 105 FOMA tagra e 105 DONS St eed iret eeaccaeeat ie 32 faa RO ds naa A DUO eira ao E E 67 98 Synchronization 102 DY Ste E rae 81 T Tabip E poean EAR 12 Vap t mpore aaa 97 TOMPO sareren ni 49 95 TEMPOA Pene ien 49 96 CIE E EAE E E T 96 TEMPO SOUTCE miha 48 95 Tempo take tices oteraet 51 97 Threshold level uo eee 123 TIME sinatra an 95 TO TOC errr reer 119 Track A ONCE a eaaa A 93 Track CO INS nenssnenneoien 57 Copy an entire track 61 Create a fade in fade out 62 Delete atra kocana 58 Erased track ona ennn an 58 Exchange tracks ciiin 60 Exchange two entire tracks 62 Expand compress a track 61 Insert blank space cceeeee 58 Normalize the level 0 000 63 Optimize a track eee 59
168. an be registered in a scene e EQ e Effect settings e EffSnd effect send e AuxSend auxilliary send PAN and BALANCE knobs CHANNEL faders The faders and pan balance knobs of the top panel do not actually move when a scene is recalled However the SCENE MixView tab page lets you see the value for these settings as the scenes change 3 1 Registering a scene 1 Move to the location in the song where you want to reg ister a scene Use the counter or FF REW to move p 32 2 Make the desired mixer settings Adjust the CHANNEL faders PAN knobs EQ and effects etc to create a new scene 3 To register the scene e Press the STORE key to capture the current time e Press the SCENE key The display will indicate the scene number as SCENE and the parameters will be registered When a scene is registered it is assigned the lowest un used number You can perform step 8 even while a song is being played or recorded 3 2 Switching scenes during playback Here s how scenes can be automatically switched as the playback time progresses Register scenes at the locations where you want the mix er settings to change 3 1 Registering a scene Automatically switching scenes while a song plays BGL NEW SCENE 01 41 080 CREST Estrin ReadDal Fike F 4 Access the SCENE ReadDel tab page and turn SceneRead on e When this is on the SCENE key w
169. an input a name of up to sixteen characters p 31 l After editing the program name use Store to store the program Unless you perform the Store operation the program name you edited will be discarded HTS GuitarMultis5 RenameEf fect Stores the edited effect program in one of the user areas U001 U128 The D1200 provides 128 user areas in which you can store insert effects In the StoreEffect dialog box specify the user area number and use the Exec button or the YES OK key to store the program Press the NO CANCEL key if you want to cancel l Effect programs are always overwritten onto the data that was previously in that location StoreEtt ect GTS GuitarMultis GERRY ReverbHatl InsEff2 Select and edit insert effect 2 Here you can make selections and settings for insert effect 2 Refer to InsEff1 Select and edit insert effect 1 p 86 InsEff3 Select and edit insert effect 3 Here you can make selections and settings for insert effect 3 This will be displayed only if you set SelectEffType to linloutx4 or linloutx8 in the InsAss tab page p 85 Refer to InsEff1 Select and edit insert effect 1 p 86 CO INSERT EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL RHYTHM TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO METER AUTO IN OCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGG
170. ance you can use punch in out recording to fix just that portion with out having to re record from the beginning of the song Punch in is the action of switching the song from the play back to the record mode and punch out is the action of switching from the record mode back to the playback mode Manual punch in out Here s how you can punch in and punch out manually During playback press the REC key or an optional PS 1 foot switch to begin recording and then press the REC key PLAY key or foot switch to stop recording 4 Connect your input device select a track for recording and adjust the recording level Refer to 1 1 Basic recording p 53 2 Specify the monitor output e Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page ohi 6 chr iefineal q Solo A Monitor J e Select the signal that you want to monitor e Turn on the AutoIn button 3 Move the counter to a location slightly before the point where you want to begin re recording p 32 4 Press the PLAY key to begin playback You will hear the recorded tracks play including the recording desti nation track At the point you want to begin re recording press the REC key Recording will begin manual punch in Now you will hear the external input source 6 At the point you want to stop re recording press the REC key or PLAY key Recording will stop and playback will resume manual p
171. anens 144 IRE CIN ic tierce caesar eine birelamsciadee aden iea 145 A key does not function when pressed 00 145 MD iuge States te mia ata eexeacea aes aasiangle tutes 145 DEIR VV cases aero paieneshase sera N 146 W AV ENTE Vaan tees oki eens dh Sonseiss sol aasaises 146 MSD E A E E O 146 MESSAUCS iee a 147 Confirmation Messages sseesesessseseseresesessrersesesesess 147 Error MESSA COS seasteecevsstsncsvants E E ER 147 About the CDRW T icciisrecropisierornnisrssssrrracnnai 149 1 Cautions for handling 149 2 Installing the CDORW losisaicssntasiniiedinane 149 Oe N Erne AACS indcurs ives is ED 150 4 REMOVING A CISC visi oreinen a O 150 By Using the CORWS 151 D1200 specificationS ccceceeseeeeeeeeeees 152 Effect Program LISU siviseiiseitecsanerssedicsvcinceantadts 154 Rhythm Pattern List 215patterns 156 ING OX caceszodacanaevs enansundvaeasanansanieiuaeiasan siete 157 Block OA QKAN Ssescinad vice dieicteeanavecteurecedvncemmave 159 MIDI implementation chart 2200eee0 160 Introduction a Thank you for purchasing the Korg D1200 Digital Recording Powerful modeling effects with easy icon and knob based Studio operation To take full advantage of the D1200 s functions and enjoy trouble free use please read this manual carefully and use the product as directed Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference Main features 12 track digital m
172. ant to make to this disc you can turn this field On Some drives such as early CD ROM drives cannot read a disc unless it has been finalized amp If the CD R RW disc has no more space for addi tional data to be written it will be finalized automat ically Ge Exec Execute sececccc cess ceescezesssoeeeeeeeesaseeeeeseetessass Executes the WAV file export operation 6a Export Size cscccssercesseees 16bit 24bit Selectable only if the clipboard contains 24 bit data You can select whether the 24 bit data that was copied to the clipboard will be exported as a 16 bit WAV file or as a 24 bit WAV file Eep xportF ile Exi 24424bit 6b Dither SW cccccccccssssssssssssccceees On Off Selectable only when exporting 24 bit gt 16 bit If 24 bit data from the clipboard is being exported as a 16 bit WAV file you can specify whether dithering will be performed ExportF ile Ex 2441 6bit Dither Chil Are vou Sure Wiring frre eset k Import Export On Dithering will be performed on the data to make quantization noise less noticeable Off Dithering will not be performed li li MASTER RYTM Tuner 11 co aounce ENA VD erect ea INSERT I Moneual COUNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO nn METER AUTO IN LOCI va UNDO Hreacy view SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP punicy SCENE MARK anoc SONG ELGOS USB SelSong Select a song Selec
173. aps will move forward by the corre sponding length Eaitmap 001 01 000 W Mapae2 Meas 005 005 J 120 Select the tempo map that you want to edit e Display the tempo map list and select the tempo map that you want to edit 4 2 Edit the settings e Select the Edit button A dialog box will appear Select oe Par arm ore A S Ged Beat B4rig Sbt kocki Meas Tempo 120 2H Rhuthr E e Edit the parameters and press the YES OK key 3 Verify that you have made the settings you want e Display the tempo map list and check the tempo map Cancel Adding a tempo map to insert a rhythm pattern If you want to create a new tempo map press the Insert button A tempo map will be inserted at the specified measure and the measure numbers of subsequent tempo maps will move backward by the corresponding number of measures 1 Check the location at which you want to insert the tempo map e Display the tempo map list and check the current tempo map In this example we will insert a tempo map at the beginning of the song 128 84 04 Sbt Rocks d l Bh1 Bes 2 Create a new tempo map e Select the NEW button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box e Set the parameters Select TempoMapees Param Tseri Meas api g4 PA Cancel Tempo 128 Beat Br d Rhythm BSbt Rock e Turn the Insert button On and press the YES OK key 3
174. ar the effect When you have finished making adjustments press the STOP key 2 Creating the master track In order to create an audio CD from a multi track song you will need to combine the tracks into two tracks of data Here we will bounce record the completed song creating a stereo master mix on tracks 1 and 2 1 Use the MASTER fader to adjust the recording level Play back the entire song and adjust the MASTER fader so that the CLP indication does not appear for the master LR level meter Select the tracks where the master mix will be recorded Bounce recording p 64 For the tracks that you will record tracks 1 and 2 set the TRACK STATUS keys to REC Set the remaining tracks 3 12 to PLAY 3 Select bounce recording as the recording mode Press the BOUNCE key to access the BOUNCE RecMode tab page and set Select RecMode to Bounce eouncetn S 001 01 000 Te Select Fechlode 4 Select the bounce mode Access the BOUNCE Bounce tab page and select 12Tr 2Tr as the BounceMode Retk 001 01 000 B BounceMade Record irtuallrack Set Record VirtualTrack to specify the virtual tracks of the record tracks on which you will record If you want to record on the currently selected virtual tracks select Current Move the current location to the beginning of the song p 32 T Begin bounce recording Press the REC k
175. ara 8 D Ia e E E T remote 68 DE e ENA 127 DEMO SONG vacisescncierosssiesiecsriser neta 16 Dialog DOX cz orsctieretesscsneniaient 12 DIGIT Al etcieadersrtsensmsetetets ten aduaciuns 98 Digital opa esns 36 98 Disc At ONCe ccccccccceeeeeeeeccceeeees 66 93 POTN AEN 74 115 Drive serosa a 75 DNA O eae E 130 E Editing a SONG secccrsieini 34 116 COpying d SONE cy siierie earnest 34 Deleting a SON cece eee 35 MOVING a SOND svete aceon 34 Protecting a SONG s es 35 Editing an Cl CCE sscniascises aauosepasasen 43 Effect Ale Ori hiies 86 89 Effect On Off ccsseeeeeeees 87 89 Effect POS raiadranstiaitogemcaiacse 86 Controlling an effect from an ex ternal device ceeecesseeeeeeeeeeenees 44 Rename secccsocssecssesassessdesacvevdecenensee 44 DAC EEEE NEE E TA 44 Effect Send eeeeeeeeeesserrrreessserreeses 90 WI GECTS viscicrectasveasaveverencersoewncnsaneess 125 EPO CULCON dice ivesisnscsndsadchcusinsabecbine 86 89 FIND LOCA ernn 119 EE EEEE A E EAA 26 37 88 99 Three band equalizer 37 Error MESSAGES aieri i 147 Expression pedal asdiccistssatcecassriecn 44 External effect eseese 45 External Send ccccccccceeeeseseseseeees 90 F PAC 1 N A A NOATE AE 8 LEFF KEV uncie 8 32 Final Chl OC sevsecicsosssescstarcessavesdessie 43 91 Finalize cccceecesccceccceccceeeessessseseees 94 Foot controller visi sessrcisiccvecsssvereasnceres 44 Foot switCh ecserin 101 COITO L
176. as N g SEE N m N cs N Xx gt o ce Ne t O N S Insert lin2outx2 Effect Control Insert 1in1 outx8 Insert 1in outx4 Modeling effects PAEQ Parametric 4band EQ Fc1 Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 0KHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Ok 0 EEA AEAEE EA Ae eet ne 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G1 Gain AB ieescovess zressuesaeestirs 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 1 Fc2 Band2 Cutoff HZ 50 5 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Q2 Oaea T tA 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G2 Gain AB cceiszessvvestenaecsiacs 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 2 Fc3 Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 3 Q3 Q ie 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 G3 Gain OB iercrcsearazveccunesacaneeies 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 3 Fc4 Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 4 Q4 Q oeeie 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 G4 Gain OB dsvinrasceoactrastncseaes 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 4 Ue oe cee ee er 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level Exctr Exciter Blend Exciter Blend 00 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Empha Emphatic Point 0 0 140 Sets the frequency range to be empha sized EQTHM saninin 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Sets the gain of Low EQ
177. ation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key 6 Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the IN location to verify that the data was normalized as you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 As the specified region IN OUT is set longer it will correspondingly take longer for processing to be fin ished and for the Completed indication to appear Rhythm i a Effects Mixer r and w N 5 N e Q Q oz lt MIDI USB Drive Data catia Oo DB OW NV O a t D 63 64 This section explains how you can adjust mixer parameters such as EQ fader and effects for each recorded audio track to combine the tracks into a two track stereo mix and record the mix on the D1200 or onto an external two channel re corder e g DAT recorder MD recorder cassette tape re corder as a finished song This mix can also be used to create an audio CD using the optional CDRW 1 1 Bounce recording You can use bounce recording to combine multiple tracks into two tracks Use this when you want to master your song and create an audio CD Instead of mastering your completed song to an external two track recorder saving your master on two tracks of the D1200 is also a good option You can use bounce recording to do the
178. ation that was preserved press the STORE key once again instead of pressing a locate memory key For details on these functions and on how to register a location refer to Locate gt p 32 Mark p 39 or Scene p 39 37 MARK key Use this key to register a desired location within the song as a Mark or to jump instantly to a previously reg istered mark Parts and their function Basic operation Objects in the display and their function Preparations Listening to the demo song 10 This key is also used to edit the marks you have regis tered for example by renaming or deleting them p 33 119 When you create an audio CD using the Disc At Once method these markers are used to separate the tracks p 66 38 SCENE key Use this key to register settings such as CHANNEL faders PAN BALANCE knobs EQ and effect send as a scene at the desired time within the song If Scene Read is turned on when you play back the registered scene will be selected automatically You can also use this key to perform scene editing operations such as sort rename or delete gt p 39 120 This key will light if Scene Read is on 39 AUTO PUNCH key Use this key to turn the auto punch in out function on off to make pre post roll settings and to check the start end locations p 54 122 This key will light if Auto Punch in out is on 40 LOOP key Use this key to switch looping on off
179. aural file this will be Clip1 6 Import the data to the clipboard e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key e The display will ask AreYouSure Press the YES OK key to execute the operation e When the operation is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key l The longer the file being imported the longer it will take for this operation to be finished and the Completed display to appear 6 Register the TO location p 33 Registering a location to one of the Locate keys D Select the Copy command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to Copy Track vesttrack 6 001 01 000 GE CopyT rack Clipz 1 2 Select the clipboard as the copy source track Set SourceTrack to Clip2 Select the tracks 1 and 2 as the copy destination tracks Set DestTrack to 1 2 Specify the number of times that the data will be copied Set Times to 1 Copy the clipboard data to the track e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key e The display will ask AreYouSure To execute press the YES OK key e When the copy operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key The data will be overwritten onto the copy destination track 2 Press the TO LOC3 key play back from the TO loca tion and listen to the playb
180. ays overwritten MstEff2 Select and edit master effect 2 Select and make settings for master effect 2 For an explanation of the parameters refer to MstEff1 Se lect and edit master effect 1 The send level from each channel i e the input level to the effect can be adjusted in the EffSnd2 tab page EffSnd1 Adjust send levels to master effect 1 Adjust the send level from each mixer channel to master ef fect 1 seni 047E 000 05 044 el 3 bale Oo oO Oo Stet LAMSte tte RE ffond 1 Re Ttond2 BAussende 2 1 SendLevelMeter SND 1 CLP 8 18 42dB Indicates the send level to master effect 1 The vertical axis is the level 2 SENG sessesesesstses Ch1 6 7 8 11 12 000 100 Adjusts the send level from each mixer channel to mas ter effect 1 Specifies pairing for adjacent mixer channels p 38 86 EffSnd2 Adjust send levels to master effect 2 Adjust the send level from each mixer channel to master ef fect 2 For details refer to EffSnd1 Adjust send levels to master ef fect 1 AuxSend Adjust the external send levels Adjust the send level at which each mixer channel is output from the AUX OUT jack For details on connecting and using an external effect refer to p 45 fauxt_ 652 6 001 01 000 gt 3 i Tark iB o B A Mste ffl AMstetf2 HET Sind 1 f 1 SendLevelMeter SND A CLP 8 18 42dB Indicates the send level to the AUX OUT jac
181. b page If you want to move to another tab page stop playback A TrackMonitorLevelMeter cccccssscssssccssseees Indicates the track monitor level Watch the level meter to verify that the sound that will be written to CD does not clip and that the level is not too low This will be displayed if TrackMonitor is on CDR RW Create and play back an audio CD 1 CD R RW Information ccccccccsssssssccccccceeees TrkO1 99 BlankDisc NoAudioTracks NoDrive Indicates the track that be played from the CD R RW disc Trk01 99 The track number on the CD R RW disc BlankDisc An unused CD R RW disc is inserted NoAudioTracks Either a CD R RW disc has not been inserted or no playable audio tracks were found on the disc NoDrive A CD R RW drive is not connected Check that the CDRW 1 is installed correctly 2 Size DeviceType Free Used R RW DA Indicates the time that can be written on the CD R RW disc and the type of disc Time display Free Indicates the free time on the disc Used Indicates the used time on the disc The time is displayed in units of min minutes sec sec onds O MASTER RHYTHM TUNER MOO on NA DD erect ea LY INSERT I Moneual COUNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO F9 METER AUTO N LOCI SYSTEM UNDO ps SCRUB m LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB 94 Disc type R The disc is a CD R RW The
182. be copied three times starting at the TO location of track 2 ce ie 001 01 000 gt CopyT rack a z E E A edit Tk 1 Register the IN OUT and TO locations p 33 118 Use the IN time to specify the beginning of the copy source region the OUT time to specify the end of the copy source region and the TO time to specify the loca tion to which the data will be copied 2 Select CopyTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose CopyTrack 3 Select the copy source track number Use SourceTrack to select track 1 4 Select the copy destination track number Use DestTrack to select track 2 If you selected two or more tracks for SourceTrack you must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track 6 Specify the number of times that the data will be copied Set Times to 3 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key The copied data will be overwritten onto the copy des tination track 7 Check the results of the editing operation Press the TO LOC3 key and play back from the TO location to verify that the data was copied correctly If you are not satisfied with the result
183. blink p 48 STOP PLAY REC HAUA SE e O o fe ON 3 When you are ready to perform press the PLAY key REW FF STOP PLAY REC SE EI Oo Haa gt i a The REC and PLAY LEDs will light When recording starts begin performing You will hear the rhythm pattern you selected Go ahead and play along 4 When you have finished playing press the STOP key REW FF STOP PLAY REC W L Haa da Pi I gt ooo SCRUB ON lt lt gt gt Recording will stop and the REC and PLAY LEDs will go dark In the track view screen a heavy line will indicate the region that you recorded EJ Trki 6 8i7 ade32 Sy rs re Ea 7 Play back Now let s play back the song you just recorded Press the track 1 and 2 TRACK STATUS keys to set them to PLAY LED lit green 2 While holding down the STOP key tap the REW key The counter display will move to the beginning of the song REW FF STOP PLAY MA Le ka gt l P gt SCRUB ON 3 Press the PLAY key to begin playback During playback the PLAY LED will light green Use the MAS TER fader to adjust the volume REW FF STOP PLAY REC e gt gt
184. c and press the YES OK key Operation Exe Backup Insert Next Disk j Af terInsert PressOk COR INE Control MOT A Sune MMC Je Rs Dieko Backup 6 1 U f Erec z Are You Sure Control MOT f Sune MMC Je Rs Dieko e When the backup is complete the display will indi cate Completed Press the YES OK key After data is backed up to CD R RW the automatic compare function will compare the disc to ensure that a faulty backup CD is not created If you press the Cancel button while data is being written to CD R writing will be aborted and the disc will be incomplete In the case of a CD RW the data that had been written up to that point will be erased Backing up to the internal USB drive Here s how to back up the selected song to the internal USB drive Select the song that you want to back up p 31 1 3 Selecting different songs execute 001 01 000 t Backup 1 Son HI 2 Select Backup 1 Song In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to select Backup 1 Song You can also press the I button and press the ENTER key to view and choose Select Backup Restore Type 3 Verify the song for backup Make sure that the song you want to back up is selected in Source 4 Select the backup destination drive Select the Drive button and press the ENTER key
185. cancel your selection Editlype NormalizeTrack If an audio source was recorded at an inappropriately low level you can use this operation to raise the level of the data in the specified region IN OUT to the maximum level pos sible without clipping amp This operation will overwrite the data of the destination track IN OUT IN OUT Max Level Max Level execute l 001 01 000 B 1 2 DestTrack sccsccccccsseee 1 12 1 2 11 12 Selects the track in which the audio data will be normal ized For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 3 Exec Execute ccccccccsccccscsccccssssccccssccccceeees Executes the track editing operation Displays the waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT more precisely p 108 Import Import WAV files A WAV file that was saved on a CD ROM R RW or on the USB drive can be pasted into a track of the D1200 You can also use the clipboard to paste the WAV file at a location oth er than the beginning of the song The D1200 lets you import WAV files of the following formats Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz Bit depth 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit Number of channels 1 monaural 2 stereo If you want to import a WAV file from your computer use a USB cable to connect your computer to the D1200 and save the WAV file on the D1200 s USB drive Then continue with the procedure described below amp
186. cccccceseees 000 100 Adjusts the return level from the master effect to the master bus As you increase this value the effect will be applied more deeply 5 RetBall ccccsscccssssssscceseees L63 CNT R63 Adjusts the return balance from the master effect to the master LR bus L and R indicate the left and right channels of the master bus Ea Zw a LLJ Q Z a gt o n fe OO QZ Lu Ei D an a a QZ SOLO INPUT OUTPUT O METER AUTO IN LOCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB OO 90 p 87 Insert effect Bypass Fs RENOMO ccrcsssssssesesssesesoresvorsdesedecscesesssssec cecedestses Edits the name of the effect program Select the effect program whose name you want to edit press the Rename button to open the dialog box and edit the name You can input a name of up to sixteen characters p 31 l After you edit the program name use Store to save it The effect program name you edited will be discarded if you fail to use Store Saves the edited effect program in one of the master effect user area memories u001 u032 In the StoreEffect dialog box specify a user area number and use the Exec button or the YES OK key to execute the Store operation If you decide to can cel press the NO CANCEL key amp Effects are alw
187. cccsscsssessseeseeees 0 100 Depth Depth souscievisinestsinnsscnvecinieasseis 0 100 Reso RESONANCE eceeseeesees 100 100 Mix Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Delay Selects LFO Waveform Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Selects LFO Waveform Sets the LFO speed Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the resonance amount Sets the phaser effect balance This effect generates a time delayed copy of the input signal This effect is mono in stereo out DTime Delay Time 00cccceee 1 680ms Fdback FeedBack cccce 100 100 HiDamp High Damp cscceees 0 100 LoDamp Low Damp cccccceeee 0 100 Mix Wet Dry e Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet S Dly Stereo Delay Sets the delay time Sets the feedback amount Sets the high frequency attenuation of the feedback Sets the low frequency attenuation of the feedback Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds This is a variation of Delay that allows two channels of simul taneous input The parameters are the same as for Delay Pitch Pitch shifter This effect shifts the pitch of the input signal You can choose from three types fast response minimum tonal change and a setting between these two Since a dela
188. ce the input level of a guitar will differ depending on whether it has single coil or humbucking pickups adjust the input trim to an appropriate level before you adjust Threshold For a single coil guitar leave the trim set to approximately 10 at a point where the noise is not too loud and then adjust Threshold so that the sound is not cut off unnaturally Since NR2 is optimized specifically for pre amp it operates dif ferently than NR Comp Compressor Limiter Ratio Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Thrshl Threshold AB 0 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied PUCK PAHAGCK coiestslenniimenaes 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release sscssssscece 1 100 Sets the release time GLevel Gain Adjust dB ccceees Inf Sets the compressor output gain 38 240B CompT Tube Compressor Limiter This is a vacuum tube type compressor Ratio Ratio ccccce 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Thrsh Threshold dB se 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Attek AAGCK cicitccedvesiniinauvionts 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release sscssssseceecee 1 100 Sets the release time GLevel Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Sets the compressor output gain Tube Tube Type SS 1 99 Burn Vacuum tube characteristics 135 gt NY x
189. ceee a h Selects the virtual track of the copy destination track DestTrack 5 Exec Execute cccccccssssccsssscccccsssccccssseceeees Executes the track editing operation Editlype SwapWholeTrack Swaps exchanges the entire swap source track the current ly selected virtual track with the specified virtual track of the swap destination track Use this when you want to rearrange the order of the record ed tracks For example when you have finished a song you could use this operation to place the final data for all tracks in virtual track a When you execute this operation the track data of the Source Track and DestTrack will be exchanged SourceTrack rear DestVTrack a h l SourceTrack Doo O DestVTrack a h execute f 0071 01 000 B 1 Swap wholeTrack 2 1 z a Mtr 1 6 Hutrr IEH EditTrk 4 Import H Export 4 2 SOURCE Orcs cs cate serectesnsteeesevescessssssssccneseens 1 12 1 2 11 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the swap source track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 3 CSTR GCK soseri e A 1 12 1 2 1 1 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the swap destination track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 4 DEStV WGC cee ccseseccecececscetececessteesstedecedec ees a h Selects the virtual track of the swap destination track DestTrack whose data will be exc
190. chlode 2 Press the TRACK STATUS key for the track that you want to record to set the status to REC LED lit red 3 Use the CHANNEL fader to set the recording level e Press the METER TRACK VIEW key e Select the mH button and press the ENTER key to select PostFaderLev and press the YES OK key Select DisplayMode PreFaderLey E CST rk Miew1 6 4 PostPaderLey E OT rkView 12 CT rkViewl 12 high as possible without allowing the level bar to reach CLP 4 Move the counter location to the point in the song where you want to begin recording p 32 Start recording from the beginning of the song 001 01 000 or 000 00 000 6 Press the REC key the REC and PLAY LEDs will blink Press the PLAY key the REC and PLAY LEDs will light Begin performing on your instrument D When you are finished performing press the STOP key the REC and PLAY LEDs will go dark Listen to the playback to verify that your performance was recorded correctly 1 2 Switching the virtual track for recording The D1200 has twelve tracks and each of these provides eight virtual tracks labeled a h For example when you record a solo part you can record two or more takes each on their own virtual track and se lect the best one later Or when bounce recording ping pong recording you can specify two unrecorded virtual tracks as the recording destination al
191. cidentally 150 3 Inserting a disc A Make sure that the D1200 is powered on Open the disc tray Press the eject button of the CDRW 1 to open the disc tray At this time the tray will only open halfway Manually pull out the tray far enough that the disc can be placed on the tray Eject button amp When you use the CDRW 1 for the first time remove the pickup stopper from the disc tray before using the drive 2 Place the disc on the tray Place the disc accurately on the tray with the label facing upward 3 Close the disc tray Push the disk tray in until it is completely closed A If the D1200 does not recognize the disc re install the CDRW 1 as described in Installing the CDRW 1 4 Removing a disce Press the eject button to open the disc tray 2 Gently remove the disc from the disc tray 3 Push the disc tray in until it is completely closed Emergency disc removal Normally you will be able to remove the disc as described above However if this is not possible due to a power failure or other problem you can also remove the disc as follows To use this method you will need a pin like object of less than 2 mm diameter such as a straightened paper clip Insert this straight into the manual eject hole and push The disc tray will be forced open Excessive use of this method may cause the CDRW 1 to malfunction A This proced
192. ck Be MNS OU EEEE On Off On The new tempo map you create will be inserted Turn this setting on if you want to add a pat tern at the specified measure Off The new tempo map you create will over write the previous tempo map at this location Turn this setting off if you want to replace the pattern at the speci fied measure Edits the tempo map settings Select this when you want to edit an existing tempo map Use TempoMap to select the tempo map that you want to edit and then press this button The SelectTempo Map Param dialog box will appear allowing you to edit the settings Select TempoMlapees Param Delete TeripoMlap tHE Are You Sure 4a SelectAli ccccccccssssscccccccssssees On Off Selects all tempo maps for deletion On All tempo maps will be deleted when you press Yes The tempo map number will be dis played as Off The single tempo map selected by TempoMap will be deleted when you press Yes SelectAll l Tempo map number and measure number later than the deleted tempo map will be shifted towards the begining of the song Pattern Length Pattern Position sssccsesees Indicates the length number of measures of the rhythm pattern selected by SelRhythm and the currently playing measure Reference TmpTrk Create a tempo track There are two ways to record the tempo track Record MIDI clock You
193. ck 4 Press the EQ key Select the EQ EQ1 4 Eq5 8 or Eq9 12 tab page that contains the EQ settings you want to adjust EQ gt p 37 88 001 01 000 fal Os 2 Select the EQ you want to adjust The following EQ controls are provided for each channel Low EQ gain L 34 High EQ gain H Oe Mid EQ gain M Mid EQ frequency F 3 Adjust the gain and frequency Adjusting the gain in the direction will cut the sound and in the direction will boost the sound aan the mid EQ frequency setting will cause the mid range boost cut to affect a higher frequency range Lowering it will cause the boost cut to affect a lower frequency range 4 Press the PLAY key to start playback You can also adjust the EQ while you listen to the playback 26 Quick Start Tutorial 3 Applying master effects to several tracks Here we will select several tracks and apply master effects to them The D1200 contains two master effects By combining two different ef fects you can simulate complex spatial environments that could not be produced by a single effect alone For example you could apply RV1 ReverbHall to master effect 1 and RV5 ReverbRoom to master effect 2 so that you can vary the character of the reverb applied to each instrument by adjusting the two send levels on each channel In this way you can use two different effects in conjunction with each othe
194. ckup has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key After data is backed up to CD R RW the automatic compare function will compare the disc to ensure that a faulty backup CD is not created If you press the Cancel button while data is being written to CD R writing will be aborted and the disc will be incomplete In the case of a CD RW the data that had been written up to that point will be erased Operation Backing up to the internal USB drive Here s how to back up insert effect U055 from the user area to the internal USB drive Eset S 001 01 000 Select BackupUserData In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to select Backu pUserData You can also select the FH button and press the ENTER key to display Select Backup Restore Type and make your selection 2 Select U USB DOS as the backup destination drive Select the Drive button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select U USB DOS and press the YES OK key 3 Select the effect that you want to back up Move the cursor to Source and use the VALUE dial to select Ins055 4 Verify the backup destination drive and file name The name of the effect being backed up will be the file name Make sure that Destination is set to U effect name
195. cord a digital signal using the S P DIF input The S P DIF input contains a sampling rate converter If the connected input source has a sampling rate of 48 kHz or 32 kHz it will automatically be converted to 44 1 kHz Inputting audio from a DAT connected to the S P DIF IN jack into mixer channels 1 and 2 Lower the MASTER fader of the D1200 and use an optical digital cable to connect the digital output of your DAT to the S P DIF IN jack 2 Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 tab page cigit e 001 01 000 Chi ithe iCh3 ChAiChS ChE da oa Se chi 6 fin ie Select the Digiln button and press the ENTER key A message of Obey Copyright Rules will appear Dic ital Tpit heu Copyright Ea Co ves ii Are You Sure chi e Aen 12 nea 4h Solo Monitor Wl Phase Carefully read the owner s manual section COPY RIGHT WARNING gt p 1 and if you accept the con ditions press the YES OK key in response to AreYouSure The digital input is now enabled 3 Select the Ch1 icon and turn the VALUE dial to select S P DIF L Then select the Ch2 icon and turn the VALUE dial to select S P DIF R The digital input from the S P DIF IN jack is assigned to mixer channels 1 and 2 Cr 001 01 000 oa chi e fen i2 fnar 4h Solo Monitor Phase 4 Play back your DAT and press the track 1 and 2 TRACK STATUS keys to set them to INPUT LED l
196. d data will be copied Displays the waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT more precisely p 108 6 Exec Execute ccccccccsscccssssccccscssccccssscceeees Executes the track editing operation Reference EditType OptimizeTrack Optimizes the track data in the IN OUT region of the opti mize destination track execute 6001 01 000 E 1 OptimizeTrack__ 1 Erec Tee per Eh eait Tek Import f Export 2 DEOK aaa 1 12 1 2 1 1 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the track that will be optimized For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 3 00 a en ae nee EEA Normal Erase Silence Erase Punch Noise Selects the type of optimization that will be performed Select Optimize Mode Cancel Erase Silence Erase Funch Moise Normal This operation re creates the audio events in the IN OUT region to prevent DiskBusy errors from occurring If there are no gaps between one audio event and the next or if the gap is small the data will be com bined into a single event If there are extended gaps between audio events the data will be re created in a way that avoids wasting space By setting the IN OUT region to the beginning and end of the song and executing the Optimize Track opera tion you can re create the data in a form that will be ide al for hard disk access IN OUT _ DestTrack er Hors DestTrack
197. d in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty 2002 KORG INC 1409 CTH Printed in Japan KORG INC 15 12 Shimotakaido 1 chome Suginami ku Tokyo Japan
198. dance Nominal level Maximum level Source impedance lt INPUT 3 4 gt Connectors Input impedance Nominal level Maximum level Source impedance lt GUITAR INPUT gt Connector Input impedance Nominal level Maximum level XLR 3 31 type 48 V phantom power switchable 1 4 TRS phone jack balanced 5 kQ XLR 3 31 22 KQ TRS phone jacks 60 dBu TRIM max 4 dBu TRIM min 48 dBu TRIM max 16 dBu TRIM min 600 Q 1 4 TRS phone jack balanced 22 kQ 60 dBu TRIM max 4 dBu TRIM min 48 dBu TRIM max 16 dBu TRIM min 600 Q 1 4 phone jack unbalanced 1 MQ 60 dBu TRIM max 4 dBu TRIM min 48 dBu TRIM max 16 dBu TRIM min Source impedance 600 Q lt MASTER OUTPUT L R gt Connectors RCA phono jack unbalanced Output impedance 150 Q Nominal level 10 dBu Maximum level 2 dBu Load impedance 10 kQ or higher lt MONITOR OUTPUT L R gt Connectors RCA phono jack unbalanced Output impedance 150 Q Nominal level 10 dBu Maximum level 2 dBu Load impedance 10 kQ or higher Appendix lt AUX OUTPUT gt Connectors 1 4 phone jack unbalanced Output impedance 150 Q Nominal level 10 dBu Maximum level 2 dBu Load impedance 10 kQ or higher lt PHONES OUTPUT gt Connector 1 4 stereo phone jack Output impedance 100 Q Maximum level 50 mW 32 Q lt S P DIF INPUT OUTPUT gt Connector optical
199. data is backed up automatically when you back up a song When restoring from the USB drive the Re store UserData dialog box will not appear if there is no effect user data of the same file name the song name DFX file you are restoring l Before any songs are restored the restore destina tion capacity will be checked and the restore opera tion will not be executed if there is insufficient capacity DiskUtil Disk drive management Here you can format initialize the drive check the drive erase a CD RW disc connect to your computer via USB and update the system software of the D1200 amp When you format a drive or erase a CD RW disc all data on that drive or disc will be lost Execute 0001 01 000 _ 2 H CheckDriver5 T 1 1 USB Mode eeeesseeosseecossecoseeccsseecsssecsseeecsseeoo Allows your computer to communicate with the D1200 When you want to connect the D1200 to your computer press this button to access the USB Mode screen and the connected computer will recognize the USB drive l If you want to exit this screen while your computer is connected to the D1200 by a USB cable you must per form an operation on your computer to dismount or disconnect the USB drive before you actually discon nect the USB cable p 77 2 SelOperation CheckDrive S EraseCD RW Format S Format U FormatALL LoadSystem C LoadSystem U Selects the operation that wi
200. ding level 10 MASTER fader This fader adjusts the overall volume of all channels The volume adjusted by this fader is output from the MASTER OUT L R jacks and the S P DIF OUT jack e When recording an external input i e when the BOUNCE RecMode tab page Select RecMode parameter is set to Input the master fader adjusts the volume level of the master LR bus e When bounce recording i e when the BOUNCE RecMode tab page Select RecMode parameter is set to Bounce the master fader adjusts the record ing level to the track s whose TRACK STATUS is REC 11 REW key This key changes the location to an earlier time rewind while stopped or moving If you hold down the STOP key and press the REW key you will move to the previous numbered song if you are already at the beginning of the song or to the beginning of the current song if you are in the middle of the song 12 FF key This key changes the location to a later time fast for ward while stopped or playing If you hold down the STOP key and press this key you will move to the end of the current song if not already at the end or to the beginning of the next song if you are already at the end of the current song If the Scrub function is on you can press this key to per form Slow Play p 34 13 STOP key This key stops recording or playback halting the recorder 14 PLAY key This key play
201. dure Make auto punch in out settings Refer to steps of Auto punch in out gt p 54 2 In the LOOP Loop tab page turn Loop On tec _Ie 001 01 000 In z 6 1 04 ut a5 01 008 wave 3 Begin recording e When you press the REC key you will move to the begining of the pre roll time and enter record ready mode The REC key LED will blink e Press the PLAY key to begin playback Playback will occur during the pre roll time and recording will begin when you reach the IN time The REC key LED will light When you reach the OUT time recording will end and the post roll region will play back The REC key LED will blink When the post roll time ends you will automatically move to the beginning of the pre roll time and the same operations will be repeated e Press the STOP key at a point outside the recording area IN OUT to stop 4 Use the Undo Redo function to compare the recorded content and choose the best take e Press the UNDO key to display the Undo list The Undo list shows Record Track for the most recent recording Level00 and each preceding recording Level the number of loops you recorded minus 1 Current Level HA C_ l Recordings that you made before you performed loop recording will also appear in the list as RecordTrack e From the Undo list turn the VALUE dial to choose a recorded take Then select the
202. e con trolled Me a a Minimum value of parameter to be con trolled Param Select the parameter to be controlled The parameters that can be selected will differ depending on the program For example the Cho Fl Depth selection for Param will control the Depth parameter of the Cho Fl When this is Off control will not occur Max Min Specify the upper and lower limits of the range in which the parameter value will be controlled By exchanging the Max and Min values you can for example reverse the effect that occurs when a pedal is advanced and released The available values will depend on the effect Max and Min will not be displayed when Param is set to Off or Wah Using a pedal to control wah As explained in 5 Controlling an effect from an external device p 44 make settings for Device etc and select an effect program that provides a wah 2 Press the EffectIcon button for Cntrl and set Param to Wah 3 Press the EffectIcon button for Wah and set Mode to Pedal Modeling effects Guitar type Uses insert effect 1055 PA1 Brit70 s GUITAR EFFECT baad i I mo Cia TORE CABINET O Bass type Uses insert effect 1071 EB1 BassTubeComp EFFECT E E i S Chorus i S FEFA a Delay Bela e TORE O Mic type Uses insert effect 1074 MS1
203. e in the IN OUT region of track 1 execute 0071 01 000 B H FadeTrack 1 HEC Mir 1 6 BVtr Wen EditTrk K Import H Export DestTrack 1 Register the IN and OUT locations Register the locations at which you want the fade in to start and end p 33 118 2 Select FadeTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose FadeTrack Select the fade in destination track number Set DestTrack to track 1 4 Select the fade in curve Operation Select the Mode button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box SelectF adeMlode oO al CUB alll CUE Me CEJ Cancel CC d CIF ik A Du ha For this example select curve A and press the YES OK key to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the IN location to verify that the fade in was created as you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 As the specified region IN OUT is set longer it will correspondingly take longer for proce
204. e overdub tracks to REC red If you want to record in monaural set only one track to a TRACK STATUS of REC red The D1200 remembers the last state of Modeling mode even when the power is turned off and will be available when you turn the power on again A modeling effect you edit cannot be saved as an effect program as it is Edited Modeling effects must be saved as an insert effect user program gt p 46 1 Applying a modeling effect to your guitar The D1200 provides various modeling effects for use with a guitar including simulations of distortion type effect devic es amp heads and speaker cabinets Press the MODELING key move the cursor to Gui tar in the left of the screen and press the ENTER key or the YES OK key to enter the guitar modeling effect screen GUITAR EFFECT TubedOc m EEEN 32 anasan 2 Select a distortion type effect Of the three knobs located below the display turn the left knob DRIVE to select one of the ten distortion type modeling effects 8 Select a pre amp tone Turn the center knob TONE to adjust the tone of the vacuum tube premp model Vacuum tubes add a unique non linear distortion that modifies the overtone struc ture of the sound 4 Select the cabinet Turn the right knob CABINET to choose one of eleven cabinet types 6 Edit the effect parameters Move the cursor to DRIVE TONE or CABINET in t
205. e three times starting at the TO location of track 2 sourceTrack 6 001 01 000 GE H ReverseTrack SourceTrack DestTrack Times Register the IN OUT and TO locations p 33 118 Select ReverseTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose ReverseTrack 3 Select the reverse source track number Use SourceTrack to select track 1 ORS 4 Select the reverse destination track number Use DestTrack to select track 2 If you selected two or more tracks for SourceTrack you must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track 6 Specify the number of times that the data will be copied Set Times to 3 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key T Check the results of the editing operation Press the TO LOC3 key and play back from the TO location to verify that the operation produced the results you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 As the specified region IN OUT is set longer it will correspondingly take longer for processing to be fin ished and for the Completed indication to appear Optimize
206. eate the appropriate tempo maps Tempo settings will play back in synchronization but measures will become incorrectly aligned if the time sig nature changes do not match If you want to use a foot switch to input the tap tempo connect an optional PS 1 foot switch to the FOOT SWITCH jack of the D1200 Choose how you will record the tempo In the RHYTHM TmpTrk tab page select either MeasTap tap at the beginning of each measure or BeatTap tap at each beat ReeMeastap 6001 01 000 Select Tee ules Type BeatTap RecStart Record the tap tempo track e Select the RecStart button and press the ENTER key The D1200 will enter the record ready mode Ss on Oe Rec TermpoTrack MeasTap OH StartTepel PLA Yor Font e When you press the PLAY key or a connected foot switch the song will begin playing and tap tempo recording will also begin e While you listen to the playback record the tap tempo by pressing the PLAY key or foot switch at the intervals you specified in step The counter will be displayed while you record the tap tempo Reo eine T e Track OH Meas 885 ces STOP A When using the PLAY key to record tap tempo do not strike the key any more forcefully than necessary Doing so may damage the hard disk etc After you have input the last tap press the STOP key For example if you are inputting four measures of a 4 4 time signature tap four times in
207. ected rhythm will sound The rhythm will sound during playback and recording If you want to record the rhythm refer to 3 Recording the rhythm Adjusting the rhythm volume Select RhythmVol and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the volume Setting the tempo and time signature Select TempoSource and choose the tempo source For this example we will select Manual so that the tempo time signature and rhythm pattern will not change You can also select the button and press the EN TER key to choose from a list If you want to change the tempo time signature and rhythm pattern during the song you must create a tempo map p 49 2 Select Tempo and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the tempo 3 Select Beat and turn the VALUE dial to specify the time signature Selecting a rhythm pattern Select SelRhythm and turn the VALUE dial to choose a rhythm pattern You can also select the E button and press the EN TER key to choose from a list 2 Listening to the rhythm while you record a performance Here s how you can listen to the rhythm pattern as a guide while you record your playing 1 Use the procedures described in 1 Selecting and play ing a rhythm to turn the Rhythm On and make any other necessary settings 2 Connect your instrument and get ready to record Refer to 1 Assigning inputs to the mixer p 22 Pr
208. ects Time ER Time msec 10 1600ms_ Sets the time length of early reflection PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200ms Sets the time taken from the original sound to the first early reflection EQTrim EQ THM srscsasecconssecieteseincapwte 0 100 Sets the input level of EQ applied to the effect sound LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 415 0 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of High EQ Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds 37 LS6 Rotary Speaker This effect simulates a rotary speaker and obtains a more realis tic sound by simulating the rotor in the low range and the horn in the high range separately The effect also simulates the stereo microphone settings ODSW OverDrive SW cesees Off On Overdrive on off DGain OverDrive Gain cccseee 0 100 Degree of distortion DLevel OverDrive Level ccceee 0 100 Output level of overdrive DTone OverDrive Tone ccceseceeees 0 15 Tone of overdrive SPsim Speaker Simulator Off On Speaker simulation on off Mode Mode Switch Rotate Stop Switches between speaker rotation and stop Speed Speed Switch Slow Fast Switches the speaker rotation speed between slow and fast RotAcc Rotor Acceleration 0 100 Determines how quickly the rotor rotation speed in the low range is switched Ro
209. ed after the name of that effect program 6 Specify the parameter and range that will be controlled e Select the EffectProgramName button and press the ENTER key The Effect Algorithm dialog box will appear show ing the structure of that effect program ox 001 01 el 0 CE E A E bos EUL snc Treml jg Edit Cntrl Icon Operation e Select the EditCntrl Icon button and press the ENTER key to open the ControlDevice dialog box ControlDeyice Par arn Trl Speed A AYHz Hax 2E ABHz Min e Select Param and turn the VALUE dial to select the parameter that you want to control e Turn the VALUE dial to set Max to the maximum value and Min to the minimum value e When you have finished making settings press the YES OK key e In the Effect Algorithm dialog box press the YES OK key If you want to save these settings save them as de scribed on p 44 6 Now you can operate the expression pedal or external MIDI controller to control the effect 6 Using an external effect You can take the Send signal from the AUX OUT jack and run it through an external effect processor The output of the external effect can then be connected to the INPUT 1 IN PUT 4 jacks and returned to the mixer channels or to the master LR bus Sending the playback sound to an external effect and using INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 jacks to return it to the master LR bus
210. ed fe Off o 3 pote Offl 4 port HinsEffifInsktt2 HInsktt3 Inset Eine h i 3 Select the Assign button and press the ENTER key In the dialog box that appears select PlayTrack Irk SelectEf fectassign Input PlayTrack D x oo o 2 72 When you have made your selection press the YES OK key 4 Select the SelectEffType button and press the ENTER key to Effect types p 42 85 select the effect type SelectEf fectType FE a tes ink FE C in outs lindoutyd HC linloutsg For this example select linloutx4 Make your selection and press the YES OK key Step 4 Mastering 25 6 Specify the channel where you want to insert the effect Select the InsertTo button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select InsertEffect AssignChannel For each effect turn the VALUE dial at SelectCh to select the input output channel For this example set effect 1 to channel 3 When you have made the setting press the YES OK key 6 Select an effect program In the insert effect InsEff1 tab page select the effect program that you want to use Select EffectNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select an effect program EFfecttumber 5 001 01 000 7 Press the PLAY key to begin playback You can also select an effect program while you listen to the play back 2 Adding EQ equalization to each tra
211. ed two or more tracks for SourceTrack you must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the IN location to verify that the operation produced the results you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 oS Operation Expand compress a track Exp CompTrack This command expands or compresses the specified region IN OUT of recorded track data to fit the specified region TO END of the specified track e The expanded or compressed data can be created ina different track while preserving the original data e You can specify whether to convert the pitch e You can simultaneously convert one or more adjacent tracks of data e The converted data can be copied one or more times in succession This command can be used in ways like the following e To convert drum loops of differing tempo to the same tempo e To make a phrase occupy a specific length of time Copying expanded compressed track data Here s how the IN OUT region of track 1 can be con verted to the length of the track 2
212. eees 1 100 Depth of distortion Level OVEN a siercicnietegssouciemencectnts 0 100 Output level Tube Tube Type SS 1 99 Burn Vacuum tube characteristics Bias UDO DIAS lictiiciiedocenscketeininamenie 0 100 Vacuum tube bias level 1 TubeOD Classic FatDist Metal Seattle BigFuzz TopBst US HiG B Stack Direct The Tube parameter lets you vary the way in which the sound is distorted by vacuum tubes It simulates the way that distortion is influenced by the amplitude number of vacuum tubes and their age As you increase the value of this param eter non linear distortion will increase and the overtone structure will change It is best to raise the Drive value and then adjust the Tube value The Bias parameter adjusts the bias point of the vacuum tubes that distort the sound In conjunction with the Tube parameter this will vary the overtone structure The Bias parameter will have a greater effect when the Tube setting is high NR Noise Reduction This effect suppresses noise Thrsh Threshold scscesecees 40 0 1 0 Sets the level at which the effect begins to apply NR2 Noise Reduction This effect reduces the noise It is optimized specifically for use in a pre amp chain Thrshl Threshold cecccces 40 0 0 0 Level at which noise reduction begins to apply Decay Decay cscassitenchspheriececseucantacien 0 20 Decay time Threshold must be adjusted according to the input level Sin
213. ees 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 4 Trim Trim ace evecentesrinle Genre torauanceens 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level 94 MN7 Amp Simulator Type Amplifier Type AMP1 5 Selects the type of guitar amplifier 95 MN8 Multitap Delay The parameters are the same as for Mt Dly 96 MN9 Chorus Flanger2 The parameters are the same as for ChF2 97 MN10 Phaser The parameters are the same as for Phaser Effect Parameter List 98 MN11 Expander This effect makes the sound tighter and improves the dynamic range and S N ratio by compressing signals that are below a specified level Thrshl Threshold ccccecceseseseecseees 0 127 Sets the level at which the effect begins to apply Attack Attack ecexsagtinncanentannuenbinacenss 1 100 Specifies the length of the attack Relse ReICaSe c ssscsescseseesseeees 1 100 Specifies the length of the release Ratio Ratio seis ctccndedaindavasxscendtne 1 0 1 inf 1 Specifies the compression ratio Respo RESPONSE sccesescsescseseeees 1 100 Specifies the speed at which change will occur in response to the input Effect Control Cnirl Control Select the parameter that will be controlled by an expression pedal or an external MIDI controller and specify the range of parameter values for control Param Parameter ccccsscsesssesssssessseees Name of parameter to be controlled MaKe Maximum value of parameter to b
214. en en Indicates the undo level that is selected by Level Os UNO eee eee ene ean ne A Executes the Undo You will return to the state prior to executing the opera tion selected in the UndoList 7 REGO PAE E Executes Redo You will return to the Level 00 state amp The content of the list are maintained until the next re cording or track editing pattern When you record or ed it the data will be deleted for levels subsequent to executing the last undo The contents of the list will also be deleted when you select a different song and record or edit A The hard disk of the D1200 maintains an operation his tory for up to the last 99 recording and editing opera tions letting you use the Undo function to return to an earlier state of your work This means that old data that no longer exists in a track will remain on the disk with 126 out being deleted This will consume disk space and may cause the available recording time to appear short er In such cases you can recover this disc capacity by turning off the power of the D1200 to delete the Undo history Effect Parameter List ee Example Algorithm number Category number Algorithm name 1 RV1 Reverb Hall Parameter name shown on screen Range of parameter Explanation parameter name Time Reverb Time S C ssccssseeseeseen 01 10 0s Sets the reverberation time MUR Parameters marked by an in front
215. ene changes from affecting the pan settings of channels 1 and 2 you would turn 1 2 and the PanBal button On Select SceneFilter InsEtt Mstetiy Mstet2 Cancel The second page contains parameters that apply to the overall mix As in the first page turn On filtering for parameters that you do not want to be affected by scene changes Press the YES OK key to apply the settings 3 9 Using MIDI to control scenes MIDI output When the scene changes a scene change message pro gram change will be transmitted in the following cases e When you use SceneNumber in the SCENE ReadDel tab page to switch scenes e When you press the STORE key and SCENE key to register a scene e When SceneRead is On and the scene changes during playback or recording MIDI input If SceneRead is Off scene change messages pro gram changes that are received will cause the D1200 to select the scene of the corresponding number If SceneRead is On these messages will not be received regardless of whether the D1200 is playing recording or stopped Gba ss S 001 01 000 Connect an external MIDI device p 79 In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page set GlobalCh to match the channel of the external MIDI device that will be transmitted the messages If you want the D1200 to transmit MIDI messages set the SYSTEM USB MIDI
216. eps Connecting a guitar to the GUITAR IN jack assigning it to mixer channel 1 and adjusting the levels 1 Set the INPUT 1 TRIM knob to the minimum position 4 dB and lower the MASTER fader Then connect your guitar to the GUITAR IN jack jack on the front edge of the D1200 2 Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 tab page select the Ch1 icon and turn the VALUE dial to select INPUT1 The GUITAR IN input jack is now assigned to mixer channel 1 cm mps E 001 01 000 omal raul The Che Chi ChS ChE METES TES Chl 3 Press the track 1 TRACK STATUS key to set it to INPUT LED lit orange 4 Press the METER TRACK VIEW key Select the button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select DisplayMode Pref aderLey i PostFaderLey E OTrkMviewt 6 G T rkView 12 CT rkView1 12 Select the PreFaderLev radio button press the ENTER key and press the YES OK key When you play your guitar the track 1 level meter will move accordingly While you watch the level meter adjust the INPUT 1 TRIM knob Raise the TRIM knob as far as possible without allowing the level meter to reach the CLP level when you play your guitar at its loudest level 35 Upgrading MIDI USB Drive Data paia be Rhythm i a Effects i and w the system EJ PreFdr PkHold E 000 006 084 Epa es e Set the MASTER and CHANNEL 1 faders to unity
217. epth of LFO modulation Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds 129 Insert 1in2outx2 Insert 2in2outx2 Insert 2in2outx2 Master Final Effect Insert 1in outx4 Insert 1in1 outx8 Effect Control Modeling effects Final 18 MOS St Tremolo Stereo Tremolo This effect modulates the volume level of the input signal The effect is stereo and offsetting the LFO of the left and right phases from each other produces a tremolo effect between left and right LFO LFO Waveform TRI SIN Vintage Selects LFO Waveform Up Down Shape LFO Shape 0008 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Phase LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Sets the LFO speed Depth DENIM sctiinssssessstasaraseransseseniens 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Mix Wet Dry s s s 1111an Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds LFO Waveform This parameter selects the LFO waveform Vintage wave simu lates the characteristics of the tremolo created on a guitar amplifier Combining this effect with the Amp Simulation will make a realistic vintage tremolo amplifier sound LFO Phase degree This parameter determines the difference between the left and right LFO phases A higher value will simulate the auto pan effect in
218. er the mic modeling effect screen lt a Eit Soft Comp O VHMAMICS 2 Use the knobs located below the display to select the desired type for studio mic and dynamics 3 Edit the effect parameters Move the cursor to STUDIO MIC SIM or DYNAMICS in the display and press the ENTER key to access a screen where you can edit the parameters of the corresponding effect For example if you enter the DYNAMICS screen three parameters will appear ATTACK RELEASE and LEVEL You can adjust these parameters by turning the three knobs located below the display If you want to make more precise adjustments turn the VALUE dial to adjust the value If the input level is too low or too high dynamics type effects may not produce the result you expect Accord ing to your input source adjust the trim to obtain an ap propriate level If you are using line input set the MIC SIM IN MIC parameter to Line If you are using a dynamic mic set the IN MIC parameter to the type of mic you are us ing 4 Saving your modeling effect set tings The modeling effects you edit in Modeling mode are pre served even when the power is turned off When you turn on the power again the state of the three effects for guitar bass and mic will be preserved A modeling effect that you edit in Modeling mode can also be edited in greater detail as an insert effect You will then be ab
219. erLR button to turn it On Wo Can t apply the final effect _ Ifyou are monitoring the sound from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks the master LR bus output may be turned off Inthe INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page press the MasterLR button to turn it On Can t apply external effect AUX OUT _ The external send level may be at zero or nearly zero Inthe MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND AuxSend tab page use AUX to raise the external send level L_ Is the output of the external effect connect to the INPUT 1 INPUT 4 jacks and assigned to a mixer input Make the appropriate assignment in the INPUT OUT PUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page _ Have sub input settings been made correctly p 67 99 Rhythm Rhythm sound is not output L Inthe RHYTHM SetUp tab page Rhythm may be turned Off RHYTHM key dark gt Turn Rhythm On The recorder may be stopped Appendix Press the PLAY key The rhythm will sound when the recorder is recording or playing If you want to check the rhythm while the recorder is stopped access the RHYTHM SetUp tab page You may have selected a silent rhythm pattern The rhythm volume may be too low In the RHYTHM SetUp tab page use Rhythm Vol to adjust the volume If you are using tempo maps use the TmpMap tab page Edit button to adjus
220. ert effect 1 0 86 InsEff2 Select and edit insert effect 2 0 eee 87 InsEff3 Select and edit insert effect 3 0 87 InsEff4 Select and edit insert effect 4 0 0 0 88 InsEff5 8 Select and edit insert effects 5 8 0 88 Bo E E naar E E E 88 Eq1 4 Adjust the EQ for mixer channels 1 4 88 Eq5 8 Adjust the EQ for mixer channels 5 8 88 Eq9 12 Adjust the EQ for mixer channels 9 12 89 MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND cceeeeeeeeeeeees 89 MstEff1 Select and edit master effect 1 0 0 89 MstEff2 Select and edit master effect 2 0 00 90 EffSnd1 Adjust send levels to master effect 1 90 EffSnd2 Adjust send levels to master effect 2 90 AuxSend Adjust the external send levels 90 FINAL EP PEG icttecnwestccnaeeieeictecn aetcipontie 91 FinalEff Select and edit the final effect 91 BOUNGE sisirain aaia ainara nde vencexee 92 RecMode Select the recording mode cceeeeee 92 Bounce Parameters for bounce recording 92 OD eccrine Sadi ice ese A T 93 Prepare Prepare to create an audio CD 93 CDR RW Create and play back an audio CD 93 TUNER c icocapin oepa 95 RAY THM cacicnseascosaaiaraiteaatetcecdeiaeacsbantedpiedeves 95 SetUp Specify the tempo and rhythm 95 TmpMap Tempo map editing cece eens 96 Tmp ItK Create a tempo tra Ck iersinii 97 INPUT OUTPUT SOLO ec co cccsixetcnutesocsesersctearennss s 98 Ch1 6
221. es Ie 1225 24 04 3 6 4 52 le HONINPDO SO UCC ie aatecescte arene coceccceaverecsencsssssveresencceees Manual TempoMap TempoTrack Specifies the tempo source Press the E button and make your selection in the dia log box that appears Select TempoSource Pt Tempotap i TempoTrack Manual The current Tempo and Beat settings will be used It will not be possible to automatically change the tempo time signature and rhythm pattern during the song TempoMap The tempo time signature and rhythm pattern will change automatically during the song according to the tempo maps you create Use the Tmp Map tab page to create tempo maps TempoTrack The tempo will be determined by the recorded tap tempo or MIDI clock Use the TmpTrack tab page to record tap tempo or sequencer tempo and then select TempoTrack here The time signature will follow the settings you created in the TmpMap tab page TempoTrack can be selected after the data is created 2 TEMpo ccccsscccssssccesseccssseceeess 40 240 Specifies the tempo when TempoSource is set to Manual If TempoSource is set to TempoMap this area will indicate the tempo for the current time location as speci fied by the tempo maps you created in the TmpMap tab page If TempoSource is set to TempoTrack this area will indicate The range is J 40 240 3 Beat
222. eser 0 001 01 000 tr0 Setup ATmpMar ATP Tki SelRhythm Vol Rhythm If you want the tempo time signature and rhythm pattern to change during the song you will need to create tempo maps p 49 2 Specify the tempo time signature and rhythm pattern Select TempoSource and select the tempo source For this example choose Manual The same tempo time signature and rhythm pattern will be used throughout the song Select Tempo and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the tempo Select Beat and turn the VALUE dial to specify the time signa ture Select SelRhythm and turn the VALUE dial to select a rhythm pattern Select Vol and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the rhythm vol ume bl Recording U UUU UUU Uun 1 Access the track view screen so you can view the status of the record ing tracks Press the METER TRACK VIEW key select the I button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select DisplayMode PreFaderLev J PostF aderLey E S Trkviewi 6 G QT rkView 12 CT rkview1 12 In SelectDisplayMode select the IrkView1 6 radio button and press the ENTER key Then press the YES 7 OK key Trigger recording p 54 E Trki 6 aetet e0 S r Pe EMM i 5 seo de 1 2 L RLR 2 Press the REC key to enter record ready mode Recording the rhythm The REC and PLAY LEDs will
223. ess the PLAY key to play back and turn the PAN and BALANCE knobs to adjust the stereo positions of tracks 1 12 Adjust the playback and recording levels Use the CHANNEL faders to adjust the playback lev els e Press the METER TRACK VIEW key e Select the button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select PostFaderLev so that you can view meters for the faders Use the MASTER fader to adjust the recording level When you have finished making adjustments press the STOP key Move the current time to the beginning of the song p 32 Begin bounce recording Press the REC key to enter record ready mode LED blinking and press the PLAY key to begin recording LED lit When you are finished recording press the STOP key to stop Check the recorded results e Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the recording tracks 1 and 2 to set them to PLAY LED lit green e Either lower the faders of the remaining channels or go to the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Solo tab page and turn 1 2 On e Press the PLAY key to listen to the playback and then press the STOP key to stop Combining twelve tracks of audio and recording them on two currently unused virtual tracks Here s how to combine the audio of tracks 1 12 virtual track a selected for all tracks and record the mix onto virtual track b of tracks 1 and 2 Perform bounce recording as described in C
224. ess the REC key to enter record ready mode and the rhythm will start playing Press the PLAY key and recording will begin Play along with the rhythm pat tern you selected With these settings the rhythm cannot be recorded 3 Recording the rhythm Here s how you can take a rhythm pattern and record it as part of your song Recording a rhythm pattern on tracks 1 and 2 Make settings as described in 1 Selecting and playing a rhythm e Turn Rhythm Off If this is On the sound will be output in duplicate both to the tracks and to the master LR bus e The volume will be adjusted by the mixer input channels The RhythmVol is the send level only to the master LR bus so you do not need to set it e Make any other settings as necessary 2 Specify the input channels e Select the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 tab page e Select the Ch1 icon and turn the VALUE dial to select RhythmL In the same way set Ch2 to RhythmR chi Rhythmt 3 001 01 000 Olea Chi The CHS iCh4 iChS Che dese ag chive fenriz 3 Record the rhythm Refer to 1 1 Basic recording p 53 Operation 4 Setting the tempo ofa song By selecting one of the three options for TempoSource you can either play an entire song at the same tempo change the tempo during the song or synchronize it with an external MIDI device e Manual tempo The entire song is
225. ess the STOP key The PLAY LED will go dark Even if there is no more audio playback will not stop until you press the STOP key You can also use a PS 1 foot switch sold separately to start or stop playback p 101 2 2 Program playback This function lets you play two or more songs in the order you specify It is convenient to use this when recording to DAT or MD To create a program play list 1 Access the SONG PrgPlay tab page Gelsong atsonghPrsPlay 2 Select the song you want to play first Use the scroll buttons to select 01 in the program play list and turn the VALUE dial to choose a song 3 In the same way select the second and following songs To delete a song from the program play list select that song and turn the VALUE until it reads The program play list will be preserved until you turn off the power To play back a song program list 1 Access the SONG PrgPlay tab page 2 Press the PLAY key to begin playback The programs will play in the order of the list starting with the first song During playback you can press the FF key to move to the next song Pressing the REW returns you to the begining of the current song If you are already at the begining of the current song pressing the REW key will move to the beginning of the previous song 3 Press the STOP key to stop playback You can use program list playback only while the
226. ess the YES OK key to execute the settings If you press the NO CANCEL key the settings will be cancelled amp The insertion location setting of the lowest numbered effect will take priority For example if you set effect number 1 to the same setting that was already made for effect number 4 the setting for effect number 4 will be cancelled A setting that has already been made for ef fect number 1 cannot be selected for another effect number 3b 3c E When Assign is set to In Specifies the return channel 3a Input In1 4 DrL DrR CL CR Off Indicates the input jack into which the effect is inserted p 98 3b Effect secrsssssesssssocsisssssssissssssessssssess 1 4 Indicates the effect number 3c SelectCh ccccccsssssssccccceeseees Off 1 12 Specifies the channel to which the effect output will be returned E When Assign is set to Trk Specifies the insertion channel effect return insertion channel 3a SelectCh ccssscsccccccssssees Off 1 12 Selects the mixer channel into which the effect is inserted If SelectEfflype is 2in2outx2 only odd num bered channels can be selected in SelectCh OO i a EIEI A 1 8 Indicates the insert effect number 3c OutputCh eeessseessooeessoeessoeeessoe Off 1 12 Indicates the channel to which the effect output is returned This will i
227. eversed and reversed Gate on off Thrshl Threshold cscecsessscsereseees 0 100 Sets the level to which the Gate is applied Attack Attack sisnixcantapeanatdasinceniacins 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse RelCaSe cssscssscsssesesees 1 100 Sets the release time DTime Delay Time msec 0 100ms Sets the delay time of the gate input Mix Wet Dry cc0 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds With Envelope Select L R Mix the left and right channel sig nal mixture will trigger the gate on off When L Only or R Only is selected the gate is controlled by either of the channel sig nals dry sounds Exciter Blend This parameter sets the depth intensity of the Exciter effect Posi tive values give a frequency pattern to be emphasized different from negative values Emphatic Point This parameter sets the frequency to be emphasized Higher values will emphasize lower frequencies Enhancer Dly L msec Enhancer Dly R msec These parameters set the delay time for the Enhancer left and right channel Specifying a slightly different delay time for the left and right channel will add a stereo image depth and width to the sound 26 DY6 St Decimator Stereo Decimator This effect creates a rough sound like a cheap sampler by lower ing the sampling frequency and data bit length You can also simulate noise unique to a sa
228. ey A song named NEWSONG will be created following the last existing song MakeNewSong 3 001 01 000 i E 882 NEWSONG E Tempo Manu 120 84704 Metrod 1 2 Editing the name of a song Songs on the D1200 are designated by name Song names can be up to 16 characters in length The D1200 contains 100 lo cations for songs numbered 001 100 Songs are assigned to these numbered locations in the order they are created Both the song names and the order number can be freely edited By default each newly created song will be named NEW SONG So that you will be able to distinguish it from other songs we recommend that you assign a name to your song before you continue Press the SONG key to access the SelSong tab page If you want to edit the name of a different song select that song first 31 3 Selecting different songs 2 Use the CURSOR keys to select the Rename button and press the ENTER key The RenameSong dialog box will appear b emBJs ONG 3 Edit the song name Use the 1 i buttons to move the cursor Then turn the VALUE dial to edit the character The buttons in the display have the following function 0 9 Selects numerals e g 0 A a Selects alphabetical characters e g A Press this button again to select lowercase alphabeti cal characters e g a Symbol Selects symbols Inse
229. ey to enter record ready mode LED blinking and press the PLAY key to begin recording LED lit When you are finished recording press the STOP key to stop Check the recorded content Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the recording tracks 1 and 2 to select PLAY mode For the remaining tracks 3 12 either lower the faders to the mini mum position or set their TRACK STATUS keys to MUTE Return to the begining of the song and press the PLAY key to hear the results Press the STOP key to stop 3 Writing to CD Finally we will use the CD R RW drive to create an original CD of the song you just recorded Press the CD key to access the Prepare tab page First let s select the two tracks you bounce recorded and use Track Monitor to listen to them In SelTrks select the master tracks to which you bounce recorded your mix For this example select 1 2 PreparesForwriteTocd 000 49 Jol sars ee Lehf TrackMonitor Turn TrackMonitor on and press the PLAY key You will hear tracks 1 and 2 which you selected in SelTrks 2 Insert a commercially available blank CD R disc into the CDRW 1 3 Access the CD CDR RW tab page Make sure that CD R RW Information indicates BlankDisc BlankDise CO Monitor FreeirSior Usediseiee F 4 Write to CD Select the WriteToCD button and press the ENTER key Select the writing speed For this example select
230. f two tracks For example if you want to create an audio CD of a five minute song you will need as much free space as occupied by a ten minute monaural recording Writing a song to an CD Select the song that you want to write 2 Listen to the mixed down song Use the faders and knobs to adjust the volume and pan etc of the tracks and play back to check the result To enable recall of the registered scenes turn the SCENE ReadDel tab page SceneRead setting On 3 Apply a final effect gt p 43 4 Bounce record to two tracks Mix your song down to two tracks as described in 1 1 Combining multiple tracks into two tracks p 64 If a song containing no silence at the beginning i e at zero time is written to CD some sound at the begin ning of the song may be skipped when the CD is played back If this is the case insert about 0 5 seconds of si lence at the beginning of the mixdown audio data p 58 109 InsertTrack 6 Access the CD Prepare tab page PreparesForwriteTocd 000 49 mae SelTrkst oo Lenha e Turn the DiscAtOnce button off e Set SelTrks to the two tracks where the final mix that you want to master is recorded e Turn TrackMonitor on and press the PLAY key to hear the sound of the tracks you selected in SelTrks Watch the meters to see whether the level is too low or too high clipping 6 Insert a disc into
231. fect user data individually only to the USB drive You can also save all effect user data when you back up song data amp When you restore this data the effect user data current ly on the hard disk will be overwritten Backing up to CD R RW Here s how to back up all effect user data to a CD R RW disc selectbrive A001 01 000 CEETETETEELELEETS Oped Backup User Data 2 ime pid EftfAll Ci Coe ee we 4 C Insert a CD R RW disc into the CD R RW drive 2 Select BackupUserData In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to select Backu pUser Data You can also select the button and press the ENTER key to display Select Backup Restore Type and make your selection 3 Select C CD as the backup destination drive Select the Drive button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select C CD and press the YES OK key 4 Make sure that Source is set to EffAll 5 Make sure that Destination is set to C CD 6 Back up the data Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key A screen will ask you for confirmation Here you can spec ify the writing speed Exem ond Ad AA E Data Speed Drive ackup User Are You Sure Exec Control A MIDI A Sync A MMC Be u RstH DiskUtil e Press the YES OK key to begin the backup e When the ba
232. fferent way the ID may not necessary be a number 6 Perform operations on your external MIDI sequencer When you perform stop play fast forward rewind record and locate operations on your MIDI sequencer the D1200 will be controlled For details refer to the manual of your MIDI sequencer You can transmit MTC MIDI Time Code or MIDI Clock messages from the D1200 to control the timing of your MIDI sequencer while the sequencer controls stop play fast forward rewind record and locate op erations on the D1200 Synchronizing two D1200 units Here s how you can make two D1200 units play back in synchronization One D1200 will be the master and the other will be the slave 1 Set the master D1200 so that it will transmit MMC and MTC In the SYSTEM USB Sync tab page set Select MIDI SyncMode to MTC Mstr In the SYSTEM USB MMC tab page set Select MMC Mode to Trans mit mo USB Drive Data paia be Rhythm i a Effects Mixer r and w Upgrading the system 79 For this example set MMC DevID to 10 MMcMaster 001 01 000 Select MMC Mode MMCBeyIB HAE Cott aS WE 2 Set the slave D1200 so that it will receive MMC and MTC In the SYSTEM USB Sync tab page set Select MIDI SyncMode to MTC Slave In the SYSTEM USB MMC tab page set Select MMC Mode to Receive Set MMC DevID to the same setting as the
233. file The audio track data you copied to the clipboard can be saved as a WAV file on a CD R RW disc or the USB drive The D1200 can export WAV files in the following formats Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz Bit depth 16 bit 24 bit Number of channels 1 monaural 2 stereo When you export a WAV file to a CD R RW the data will be in I509660 level 1 format After exporting a WAV file to the USB drive you can connect a USB cable and save the WAV file on your computer When you export 24 bit clipboard data you can select whether it will be exported as 16 bit data or as 24 bit data If you select 16 bit export you can specify whether dithering will be performed on the data Dithering will make the quantization noise less noticea ble Serectorive _ E 001 01 000 Indicates the status of the clipboard indicates the number of tracks in the clipboard 2 DrriveList scscccccsssssccccssssscccccsseess S C U Selects the drive For details on the drive refer to Drive gt p 103 3 Rename cccccccsccccsccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsceceecs Press the Rename button to access the dialog box and assign a name to the WAV file You can assign a name of up to six characters to the WAV file The seventh and eighth characters will be assigned au tomatically as follows according to the number of tracks you are exporting MN When exporting one track monaural file ST When expo
234. following e Combine twelve tracks of audio and overwrite record them on two tracks e Combine twelve tracks of audio and record them on two currently unused virtual tracks e Combine ten tracks of audio with two external audio input sources and record them on the remaining two tracks After recording or track editing you can use the Undo function to return to the state prior to recording or track editing gt p 126 If you record to virtual tracks check the selected virtual tracks after executing Undo 1 1 Combining multiple tracks into two tracks Combining twelve tracks of audio and overwrite record ing them on two tracks Here s how to combine the audio of tracks 1 12 and overwrite record the mix onto tracks 1 and 2 1 Select bounce recording as the recording mode e Access the BOUNCE RecMode tab page e Select Bounce eouncetn S 001 01 000 Te Select Fechlode 2 Select the bounce mode e Access the BOUNCE Bounce tab page Retk 001 01 000 B BounceMade Record irtuallrack Current e Select 12Tr 2Tr as the BounceMode 3 Specify that the currently selected tracks will be used for recording Set Record VirtualTrack to Current Select the tracks on which you will record Set the recording track 1 and 2 status to REC LED lit red Set the remaining tracks 3 12 to PLAY LED lit green Adjust the pan of the playback tracks Pr
235. for Reverse Track Ending time of the data to be expanded compressed for Exp Comp Track Ending time for Optimize Track Ending time for Fade Track Ending time for Normalize Track Reference TO LOC3 The time location that you register for the TO LOC3 key is used for the following purposes e Locate point 3 e The following times for track editing operations Starting time of the copy destination for Copy Track Starting time of the reverse copy destination for Reverse Track Starting time copy destination time of the expanded compressed data for Exp Comp Track END LOC4 The time location that you register for the END LOC4 key is used for the following purposes e Locate point 4 e The following time for a track editing operation Ending time of the expanded compressed data for Exp Comp Track You can register a location as a Mark and move to that reg istered location You can also assign a name to each mark and use marks to designate sections of a song When you use Disc At Once to write an audio CD the marks you registered will be written to the CD as track markers to indicate where each song on the disc begins Up to 100 marks can be registered in a song Mark Edit marks 1 MarkNumber ccccsscccssssseees 001 100 Selects the mark number The name and time of the mark are displayed beside the mark number Mark numbers are u
236. fy that it plays cor rectly You and your Korg D1200 have now created an original CD of your own performance Operation Song and Locate 1 Creating naming and selecting songs This section will cover how to create a song how to name a new or existing song and how to select an existing song The D1200 has 100 song locations 1 1 Creating a new song Before you begin recording you will need to create a new song where the recording will take place Press the SONG key to access the SelSong tab page selectTimeDisp kA 001 01 000 _ E H 881 DemoSongae l E Tempo Manu 120 64704 Metrod 2 Use the CURSOR keys to select the New button and press the ENTER key The MakeNewSong dialog box will appear MakeNew Song SongType a 16bit 12Track CJ 2tBit 6Track Mixer Set PreySang 3 Use the radio buttons to select the bit depth which will determine the number of tracks and the mixer settings Then press the ENTER key Use the SongType radio buttons to select the bit depth and number of tracks and press the ENTER key to make the setting 16Bit 12Track A song using 16 bit recording playback will be created Tracks 1 12 are available in this mode 24Bit 6Track A song using 24 bit recording playback will be created Tracks 1 6 are available in this mode Select the desired MixerSet radio button in the same way p 116 4 Press the YES OK k
237. gain 0 dB e Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page e Select the MasterLR button and press the ENTER key to turn it On highlighted e Slowly raise the PHONES LEVEL knob or MONI TOR OUT LEVEL knob and verify that you hear sound from the headphones or from the monitor speakers etc connected to the MONITOR OUT jacks chive chi reaa Sole Monitor A Using the tuner The D1200 has a built in tuner Here s how to tune an instrument connected to the INPUT 1 or GUITAR IN jack DIZ 00 Tiree 1 Press the TUNER key to access the tuner screen 2 Use Calib to specify the reference frequency Normally you will set this to 440 Hz 3 Play a note your instrument e The note name that is closest to the input pitch will be displayed Ifthe pitch is correct will appear at the 0 posi tion in the center of the meter and the flat and a sharp symbols will both light If the pitch is flat only will light If the pitch is sharp only will light The amount of pitch deviation is displayed in units of cents 100 cents semitone 1200 cents 1 octave This page cannot be selected during recording or play back Nor can you perform recording here In order to detect the pitch accurately the effects will automatically be turned off while this page is displayed 36 1 2 Digital input The D1200 lets you input and re
238. ge while recording or playing Nor can you record while in this page So that the pitch can be detected accurately effects will automatically be turned off while this page is displayed M200 ii 1 CENT Scale cccccccccccssscssssceeees 50 50 When the tuning is correct the W symbol will be at the 0 position in the middle of the meter and the ie flat indicator and f sharp indicator will both light If the pitch is flat only the flat indicator will light If the pitch is sharp only the sharp indicator will light The pitch deviation is displayed in units of cents 100 cents is one semitone and 1200 cents is one octave 2 NoteDisplay ssscccsssssccsssrecesssecesees C B Indicates the name of the note that is closest to the input pitch It is not possible to detect two or more pitches simulta neously 3 Calli cccccccsssssesseees 435 440 445Hz Adjusts the calibration frequency Normally you will leave this set to 440 TUNER RHYTHM Here you can make settings for the tempo time signature and rhythm metronome of the song If the counter is displaying MBT measure beat 1 96th beat the counter will operate according to the specified tempo Tempo rhythm settings can also be made in the SONG SelSong tab page gt p 116 SetUp Specify the tempo and rhythm emposeurce 10011 01 000 17 1 ten
239. ght Rules Es When using digital input or when creating an audio CD carefully read COPYRIGHT WARNING gt p 1 and observe the terms Error messages amp INIT Internal Hard Disk Drive The data stored on the hard disk and used to start up the D1200 has been damaged for some reason When you press the YES OK key all data will be erased from the hard disk and the disk will be initialized so that the D1200 can start up correctly However all data on the hard disk will be lost When you turn off the power do so using the correct proce dure p 15 AE Timeout L Check the connections of the CD R RW drive and the AC DC power supply If there are no problems with the connections it is possi ble that a malfunction has occurred Blank Disc L Nothing has been written on the CD media Can t Play CD L The audio CD could not be played Ifthe CD has not been finalized finalize the CD before you attempt to play it If the CD has already been finalized check the connec tions of the drive If you find no problem with the con nections or operation try using different media gt Disc Full L When writing an audio CD the CD has insufficient space Write to new CD media Disk Error _ Failed while writing to the disk drive Execute CheckDrive in the SYSTEM USB DiskU til tab page If this message still appears delete that song If the message still
240. h P4EQ Cho Fin P4EQ Phaser P4EQ MtDelay Comp Wah Comp Ampsim Comp OD HiG Comp P4EQ 1094 MM10 Comp Cho FI 1095 MM11 Comp Phaser 1096 MM12 Comp MtDly 1097 MM13 Exctr Comp 1098 MM14 Exctr Limtr 1099 MM15 Exctr Ch Fl 1100 MM16 Exctr Phasr 1101 MM17 Exctr MtDly 1102 MM18 Limitr P4EQ 1103 MM19 Limtr Ch Fl 1104 MM20 Limtr Phasr 1105 MM21 Limtr MtDly 1106 MM22 0D HG Ch FI 1107 MM23 OD HG Phasr 1108 MM24 OD HG MtDly 1109 MM25 OD HG AmpSm 1110 MM26 Wah AmpSim 1111 MM27 Deci AmpSim 1112 MM28 Decima Comp 1113 MM29 Ch FI MtDly 1114 MM30 Phasr Ch FI 1115 MM31 Amp Tremolo 1116 MM32 Reverb Gate 1117 MM33 MicSim Lmtr 1128 MN11 Expander Bass Multit Bass Multit Bass Multi2 Bass Multi3 Vocal Multit Vocal Multi2 Bass Multi 1 Bass Multi 1 P4EQ Wah P4EQ Cho Fing P4EQ Phaser P4EQ Mt Delay Comp Wah Comp Ampsim Comp OD HiG Comp P4EQ Comp Cho Fing Comp Phaser Comp Mt Delay Exciter Comp Exciter Limiter Exciter Cho Fing Exciter Phaser Exciter Mt Delay Limiter P4EQ Limiter Cho Flng Limiter Phaser Limiter Mt Delay OD HiG Cho Fing OD HiG Phaser OD HiG Mt Delay OD HiG AmpSim Wah AmpSim Decimator AmpSi Decimator Comp Reverb Gate MicSim Limiter Compressor2 Limiter Gate Exciter2 Parametric 4band EQ P4EQ Amp Simulator Multitap Delay Chorus Flanger Phaser Expander Limitr ChFl1 Phaser Mt Dly P4EQ ChFI2 Phaser Mt Dly ChFl1 Phaser Appendix MASTER EF
241. hanged 5 Exec Executte cccccccccscccsscsccccscsccccccscccceees Executes the track editing operation Reference Editlype FadeTrack Fades in or fades out the track data in the IN OUT region of the destination track The level of the audio data in the IN OUT region will fade smoothly toward the OUT time amp This operation will overwrite the destination track IN OUT IN OUT execute 0071 01 000 B 1 fe FadeTrack De DeK sa ace ccc seca os ceces coset sce es testvecevenscoesaaees 1 12 1 2 11 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the destination track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 3 Exec Execute eee Executes the track editing operation Displays the waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT more precisely p 108 Selects the fade curve for the fade in or fade out Select adeMode E Cancel 5a 5a SelectFadeMode cccsssssccccesseee A F A This curve is suitable for a conventional fade in B This curve is suitable for creating a cross fade by per forming a fade in and fade out on two tracks at the same time location C This curve inverts curve A lengthening the time that the sound is heard D Fade out using curve A E Fade out using curve B F Fade out using curve C Press the YES OK key to confirm the fade mode you selected Press the NO CANCEL key to
242. hat the song data has been damaged or lost In this case the song data will be erased but the drive will be usable once you initialize it Drive Condition Error _ This message may appear if you attempt to play a CD that has not been finalized Finalize the CD before you play it If this message appears when you are operating the CD R RW drive an error has occurred in the drive Check the drive connections If you do not find a prob lem with the connections or operation try using differ ent media Drive Full _ The drive has no more free space Turn the power off and then on again If you have been recording or performing track editing the immediately previous data will be saved on the drive If the message still appears delete unwanted songs or select another drive Illegal Disc Appropriate CD media was not inserted when you at tempted to execute the operation Illegal Drive Operation _ The operation you attempted to execute was not appro priate for the selected drive For example this will appear if you attempt to load the system from a drive that does not contain the system Select the appropriate drive or operation 147 Block diagram Index Rhythm Pattern List Effect Program List D1200 specifications About the CDRW Messages Troubleshooting MIDI implementation chart Illegal Fat Number Some of the data on the hard disk has been damaged for some reason
243. hat you register for the IN LOC1 key is used for the following purposes e Locate point 1 e Punch in time for auto punch recording Playback start time for loop playback Playback start time for in out playback The following times for track editing operations Starting time of the copy source for Copy Track Starting time of the inserted silence for Insert Track Starting time of the erased region for Erase Track Starting time of the deleted region for Delete Track Starting time of the swap source and swap destina tion for Swap Track Starting time of the data to be reversed for Reverse Track Starting time of the data to be expanded compressed for Exp Comp Track Starting time for Optimize Track Starting time for Fade Track Starting time for Normalize Track OUT LOC2 The time location that you register for the OUT LOC2 key is used for the following purposes e Locate point 2 Punch out time for auto punch recording Playback end time for loop playback Playback end time for in out playback The following times for track editing operations Ending time of the copy source for Copy Track Ending time of the inserted silence for Insert Track Ending time of the erased region for Erase Track Ending time of the deleted region for Delete Track Ending time of the swap source and swap destina tion for Swap Track Ending time of the data to be reversed
244. he MIDI connectors of the external MIDI device with which you want to transfer data MIDIIN connector Receives MIDI messages from another MIDI device Connect this to the MIDI OUT connector of the external device MIDI OUT connector Transmits MIDI messages from the D1200 Connect this to the MIDI IN connector of the external device MIDI channel settings MIDI uses sixteen channels 1 16 to independently con vey data to multiple MIDI devices If the transmitting device is sending data on MIDI channel 1 the receiv ing device must also be set to MIDI channel 1 in order to receive this data gt p 101 SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page GlobalCh 2 MIDI messages used by the D1200 Note On Note velocity aftertouch pitch bend The D1200 uses these messages to control effects Program change The D1200 uses these messages to switch scenes Control change The D1200 uses these messages to control mixer and effect parameters MMC MIDI Machine Control MMC messages can be transmitted from the D1200 to control an external MMC compatible sequencer or recorder MMC messages can be transmitted from an external sequencer or recorder to con trol the D1200 MTC MIDI Time Code MTC messages can be transmitted from the D1200 to synchronize an external sequencer or re corder The D1200 can also receive MTC messages and syn chronize to them About the MIDI implementation chart The owner s manual of each MIDI
245. he YES OK key DLA_8S WAY To return Select lt and press the YES OK key Pressing the YES OK key will confirm your selection and pressing the NO CANCEL key will cancel your selection DG Delle nnna enn enadi de eia You can delete a WAV file or folder from the USB drive Select the WAV file or folder that you want to delete and press the Delete button to delete it You can preview audition the first two seconds of the selected WAV file If you select a WAV file of an unsupported format the following error message will appear Pita SAMPLE RATE NOT 44 1k This will appear if the WAV file has a sampling rate other than 44 1 kHz SAMPLE BIT NOT FIT This will appear if the WAV file has a bit depth of other than 8 bit 16 bit or 24 bit ILLEGAL WAV DATA This will appear if the WAV file is unsupported for a reason other than the above 3 DestTrack c0000 1 12 1 2 11 12 clip Selects the destination track into which the WAV file will be imported 114 CLIP will be 1 if the selected WAV file is monaural or 2 if it is stereo A FUNG O wacszsnccesessseeesecescceesescessvsceaxeneeanies Gal E Indicates whether the selected WAV file is monaural or stereo fal The selected WAV file is monaural Fal The selected WAV file is stereo 5 Exec Execute cccsscsseescacesccsessconcnshoasdesteosessncaceses Executes the WAV file import operation Export Export a WAV
246. he last recording or editing operations can be cancelled or recalled The ten types of track editing operation include Time Expansion Compression which lets you match the tempo of previously recorded phrases of differing tempo and Normalize which boosts under recorded tracks to an appropriate level You can assign as many as one hundred marker points to each song and specify four locate points for easy access to song locations for editing Preparations Basic operation Objects in the display and Parts and their function their function Listening to the demo song High capacity built in 40 GB hard disk drive USB connec tor for smooth data exchange with an external USB hard disk drive or computer A high capacity 40 GB hard disk drive is built in Of the capacity of this drive 2 GB is allocated as a USB drive that can be used from a computer connected to the USB connector allowing data to be shared The remaining capacity is used as the song drive for stor ing songs Since WAV files can be imported or exported it s easy to transfer audio data to or from your compu ter FAT16 compatible Optional CDRW 1 CD R RW drive lets you create audio CDs If the CDRW 1 CD R RW drive sold separately is installed you can use it to backup restore songs or effect data export import WAVE files or create audio CDs You can also insert an audio CD in the drive patch the signal to a mixer channel and record it W
247. he display On the other hana references en Press the YES OK key to execute or the NO CAN closed in square brackets such as key knob CEL key to close the dialog box without executing dial or fader refer to controls or items on the front You can also make your choice by selecting the OK or panel or rear panel of the D1200 Cancel button and pressing the ENTER key g Radio buttons a Current c Popup d Toggle parametr button Sion This type of button is used to select one of multiple choices Select one of the radio buttons and press the Tremposoufce 151001 01 000 ESE Hangal ize ad ao Metrod vo Gra Rhuthm Oft e Tab page b Edit cell a Current parameter This is the name of the parameter that is currently h Icons selected by the cursor In the case of icon type parameters such as EQ or faders h Icons the value is shown at the right These are objects shaped like sliders or knobs To edit the value select the icon and turn the VALUE dial b Edit cell This is a parameter that is underlined in the display When you use the cursor to select an edit cell the parameter value display will be highlighted and can be HEY Dermosongee Al CEE edited Cancel To edit the parameter value in the edit cell use the VALUE dial p 8 or popup buttons in the display Bag DernoSongae4 c Popup button i Scroll buttons When you select one of these buttons
248. he display and press the ENTER key to access a screen where you can edit the parameters of the corre sponding effect Effects Mixer i and w gt D 5 MIDI USB Drive Data pata be Rhythm Upgrading the system A5 GUITAR EFFECT er LE ee wh For example if you select TONE three parameters will appear BASS MIDDLE and TREBLE You can adjust these parameters by turning the three knobs located below the display If you want to make more precise adjustments turn the VALUE dial to adjust the value To return to the previous screen move the cursor to the Exit button in the upper right of the display and press the ENTER key or press the CANCEL key A If the guitar input level is not appropriate you may not obtain the distortion or noise reduction effect you ex pect Watch the input peak LED while you use the input trim to adjust the level so that it is neither too low or too high clipping 2 Applying a modeling effect to your bass The D1200 provides various modeling effects for use with a bass including dynamics type effects as well as modulation and ambience type effects such as chorus and delay These effects can also be applied to clean undistorted guitar sounds Press the MODELING key move the cursor to Bass in the middle of the screen and press the ENTER key or the YES OK key to enter the bass mode
249. he export destination drive e For this example select C CD 7 Edit the name of the WAV files e If you want to change the name of the file select the Rename button and press the ENTER key Edit the name in the RenamefFile dialog box p 31 1 2 Editing the name of a song e When you export six tracks simultaneously the 7th and 8th characters of the file name will automatically be set to a number 01 06 You cannot change this The file cannot be saved if an identically named file al ready exists on the USB drive Specify the date and time of the WAV files e Press the Date button to access the dialog box move the cursor to the date or time you want to change and use the VALUE dial to set the data and or time Make export settings e Press the Option button to open the dialog box and specify the CD writing speed p 115 e If you turn the Finalize button on it will not be possible to write any additional data to that disc p 94 Export the files from the clipboard e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key If you are exporting a 24 bit song as a 16 bit WAV file make bit and Dither settings p 115 e The display will ask AreYouSure Press the YES OK key to execute e When the operation has been executed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key 4 Drive and data compatibility between models
250. he speed at which data will be written to the CD 1x Write at 1X speed 2x Write at 2X speed 4x Write at 4X speed 6x Write at 6X speed 8x Write at 8X speed After the data has been written the following message will appear If you want to write the same song to a dif ferent CD disc press the YES OK key If not press the NO CANCEL key WriteSongTaCb ReR Ww Completed f write another CD Loe If you pressed the YES OK key the following message will appear and the disc will be ejected from the CD drive Insert another disc and press the YES OK key WritelD Insert NextDisk a ae i H AfterInsert PressOkK Cance CR _ Since the image file still remains it will take less time to create the second and subsequent discs The image file that is temporarily created before writing an audio CD will not change even if you change the writing speed l Depending on your setup writing at 4X or faster may not be successful In this case try a slower writing speed A It is not possible to select a writing speed that the CDRW 1 does not support While the data is being written you can select the Abort button and press the ENTER key to abort writing to the CD In the case of a CD R the disc will be come unusable If you are using a CD RW disc perform the procedure described in 3 Erasing a CD RW disc p 76 before you use it 6 CD Monitor sssscccccccvessxesencccscccecsieoceceose
251. he waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT more precisely p 108 EditType DeleteTrack Deletes the track data in the IN OUT region of the delete destination track When you execute this operation the data of the IN OUT region will disappear and the track data that follows the de leted region will move forward IN OUT DestTrack ae DestTrack a LV 1 DeleteTrack 1 U a eit Tek f 2 IDG STIN ACK scenes ssevecersacctesescacesensecestscastveseesssescercs 1 12 1 2 11 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the track from which data will be deleted For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 WV AVG E E E Displays the waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT more precisely p 108 A Exec Execute ccccccssscccsssccccsssscccssssecceees Executes the track editing operation Editlype SwapTrack Swaps exchanges the IN OUT region of the swap source track with the IN OUT region of the swap destination track When you execute this operation the data of the IN OUT regions of the selected tracks will be exchanged IN OUT SourceTrack A i t DestTrack a a B IN OUT SourceTrack DestTrack LEE A iie iytrrfagedit Tk Import Export 110 Di SOURCE e E teestors cer ertees eee 1 12 1 2 1 1 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the swap source track
252. hen writing an Audio CD you can write each song separately Track At Once or write the entire disc in one operation Disc At Once for example to make a CD of a continuous live performance where markers are inserted in the song to indicate the tracks of the audio CD Auto chromatic tuner function An auto chromatic tuner is built in letting you to tune a connected guitar or other instrument The panel pro vides dedicated keys for the tuner for tuning at any time Backlit LCD display with adjustable angle The backlit 240 x 64 pixel LCD screen is easily readable even in dim locations and you can adjust the angle for best visibility The display contrast is also adjustable Auto Save function automatically preserves your data at power off The D1200 features an Auto Save function that automat ically saves your recorded or edited songs and phrases to the hard disk whenever you switch songs or turn off the power What is ems f MsS Resonant structure and Electronic circuit Mode ling System is Korg s proprietary technology for digital ly recreating the numerous factors that produce and influence a sound ranging from the sound production mechanisms of acoustic instruments and electric elec tronic musical instruments to the resonances of an in strument body or speaker cabinet the sound field in which the instrument is played the propagation route of the sound the electrical and acoustic response of mics and speakers a
253. hether effect user data will be restored gt Restore UserData Exot E 00l 01 000 Col Resto re Selects the restore source drive p 103 You can select either C CD or U DOS gt POUNCE asssesssesscssosesosesososcosseososossesosesosesosseosseosss Selects the restore source song or effect Press the button and make your selection in the dialog box When restoring from CD RestoreList 5 001 01 000 E Restore am oe gt RHE 3a BackUpFileList ccssccssssscssssecesseeeeees Selects the file to restore Select RestoreSoang SelectAll Lor EEI DernoSongae i Cancel ECES Dero Songaas If you turn on the SelectAll button all songs will be restored Press the YES OK key to finalize your selection or press the NO CANCEL key to cancel your selection When restoring from the USB drive execute A00 01 O00 i Resto re Reference 3b BackUpFileList cccssscsssssccsssecssseeesees Selects the file to restore CE SONGHAR1 DEK Cancel SONGAGG2 DBE Folders are shown as folder name in the BackUpFileL ist screen To see the contents of a folder select folder name and press the YES OK key To return select lt and press the YES OK key Press the YES OK key to finalize your selection or press the NO CANCEL key to cancel your selection amp It is not possible to restore all data at once
254. iass 0 100 Fdback Feedback 100 100 EQTrim EQ TAG sscccecteciercndntinaensess 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15dB HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 150B Mix Wet Dry ceseceeeees Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Switching between overdrive and hyper gain mode Sets the degree of distortion Sets the overdrive output level Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Sets the delay time Selects LFO Waveform Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the feedback amount Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Sets the delay time Selects LFO Waveform Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the feedback amount Sets the EQ input level Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger 139 Insert 1in2outx2 Insert 2in2o0utx2 Insert 2in2outx2 Master Final Effect Insert lin loutx4 Insert 1in1 outx8 Effect Control Modeling effects Final Phaser LFO LFO Waveform cecccees TRI SIN Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Manual Manual
255. ieeiausests 12 0 12 Sets the amount of pitch shift in steps of a semitone Adjust Adjust L50 CNT R50 Sets the cancelling position Himix Center Hi Mix ccccecceseeeees 0 100 Sets the mixing amount of the high fre quency portion of the center position Lomix Center Lo Mix cccccceseseees 0 100 Sets the mixing amount of the low fre quency portion of the center position 134 Insert lin2outx2 These algorithms can be selected for an insert effect if Select Eff Type is set to 1in2outx2 Effects GT1 VO2 are multi effects for guitar bass vocal and contain three to five effects connected in series Example Algorithm number Category number Algorithm name Name of effect in the chain 39 GT1 Guitar Multil Dist NR Cho FI S Dly The chain structure of each multi effect is shown below For an explanation of the parameters of each effect in the chain refer to Effects within multi effect programs GT1 VO2 and their parameters on the following page GT1 GI6 Category Guitar multi 39 GT1 Guitar Multi 1 Dist NR Cho FI S Dly 40 GT2 Guitar Multi2 Wah Dist NR Delay 41 GT3 Guitar Multi3 Dist NR AmpSim CabRes Delay 42 GT4 Guitar Multi4 Comp P4EQ AmpSim Cho Fl S Dly 43 GT5 Guitar Multi5 Wah Comp P4EQ Cho Fl S Dly 44 GT6 Guitar Multi Comp P4EQ Pitch Delay AS1 AS3 Category Guitar amp simulator 45 AS1 Am
256. ield in the upper part of the dialog box This on off setting is the same as the Effect On Off button in step Changing one will also change the other Speed G 14Hz EQTrim 98 Mode Normal DTime 188s LFO Fdback 8 HEQG 66 Depth 11 LEQG 6A e You are done editing press the YES OK key If you want to adjust another effect select its EffectIcon button press the ENTER key and edit the parame ters e In the EffectAlgorithm dialog box press the YES OK key T You can assign a name to your edited effect program e Select the Rename button and press the ENTER key to open the RenameEffect dialog box p 31 1 2 Editing the name of a song e When you are done naming the effect press the YES OK key Rename ffect ATS GuitarMultisS To save the effect program e Ifthe song is playing press the STOP key to stop playback EffectNumber E 001 01 000 E e Select the Store button and press the ENTER key to open the StoreEffect dialog box StoreEt tect GTS GuitarMultis EEE F1 ReverbHall e Specify the number in which you want to save the effect program select the Exec button and press the ENTER key to save the effect program When you save the effect program the data will be overwritten to that number and any existing settings will be lost 5 Controlling an effect from an external device You can use an e
257. igiln button On and assign the digital input to the input of the desired channel p 37 Is the sampling rate of the digital input supported Sampling rates of 96 kHz are not supported JE 144 The input or recorded sound is noisy or distorted _ Is the TRIM knob set appropriately The sound will be distorted if TRIM is set too high and noisy if it is set too low Inthe METER TRACK VIEW page set Select Display Mode to PreFaderLev and adjust the TRIM knobs of the INPUT 1 GUITAR IN INPUT 4 jacks as high as possible without allowing the level meter to reach the CLP indicator Ifthe effect input or output is still distorted make the fol lowing adjustments Input e Insert effect While you watch the meters in the INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 Ins5 8 tab page use the TRIM knob to adjust the input volume so that CLIP does not light e Master effect While you watch the meters in the MAS TER EFFECT AUX SEND EffSnd1 or EffSnd2 tab page adjust the send volume so that CLIP does not light e Final effect While you watch the meters in the FINAL EFFECT FinalEff tab page adjust the volume of each channel so that CLP does not light Output e Insert effect Adjust the effect parameters or TRIM and listen for any distortion e Master final effect While you watch the meters in the MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND EffSne1
258. ika Ing 2 tf i Egin io Inge poti w k aw a PECETE HEFE 2 Select the Assign i button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select Input In and press the YES OK key 3 Select the SelectEffType m button and press the ENTER key Select the 2in2outx2 effect type as shown in the screen in step 1 and press the YES OK key 4 Now we need to insert the effect between INPUT 3 and channel 9 and between INPUT 4 and channel 10 Select the InsertTo button and press the ENTER key Step 1 Quick recording Select InsertEffect AssignChannel Inge 1 b a Ina 2 ort Inte ftia Inde ote In the display you will see the two insert effects shown as boxes labeled 1 and 2 The numbers to the left show which inputs are feed ing the effect the numbers to the right show to which channels the effect is being output Highlight the number to the upper right of effect 1 Turn the VALUE dial until the display shows In3 and In4 on the left and channels 9 and 10 on the right and press the YES OK key Select an effect program Effect Program List gt p 154 Access the INSERT EFFECT InstEff1 tab page Select EffectNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select an effect program When you have made your selection press the YES OK key Step 2 Overdubbing Step 3 Mixing 3 Overdubbing 1 Select the playback tracks For each track that
259. ill light 2 Play back the song Move to the location from which you want to play back and press the PLAY key to play the song When you reach the location at which a scene was regis tered the scene will change automatically 39 Upgrading MIDI USB Drive Data paia be Rhythm i a Effects i and w the system 3 3 Recalling a scene At any time you can manually recall the mixer settings reg istered in a scene regardless of the time at which the scene was registered To recall the mixer settings registered in a scene BESSHEW SCEHE EditLoc EdtFiltr we wrt Scenehumber SceneReadiott 1 Access the SCENE ReadDel tab page and turn Sce neRead off e When this is off the SCENE key will be dark If SceneRead is On it will not be possible to recall a scene that was registered at another time location 2 Recall the scene In the SCENE ReadDel or MixView tab page move the cursor to SceneNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select a scene The selected scene will be recalled 3 4 Changing the time at which a scene is reg istered You can change the counter location of a registered scene so that it is selected at a different place in the song EditSceneLoc BOLINEW SCENE 961 01 608 SceneReadiott 1 Recall the scene As described in 3 3 Recalling a scene select the scene whose time you want to change 2 Change the time of the
260. im Wah AmpSim MM27 Decimator AmpSim Decim AmpSim MM28 Decimator Comp Decim Comp1 MM29 Cho Fling Mt Delay ChFI2 Mt Dly MM30 Phaser Cho Flng Phaser ChFl2 MM31 AmpSim Tremolo AmpSim Trml MM32 Reverb Gate Reverb Gate MM33 MicSim Limiter MicSim Lmir Effect Parameter List Effects within multi effect programs MM1 MM33 and their parameters Here are explanations of the parameters of each effect in the multi effect chains listed above PAEQ Parametric 4band EQ Fc1 Band1 Cutoff Hz 20Hz 1 0KHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 TO eaa aT 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G1 Gain GB visvsssssedovssusereeuesvens 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 1 Fc2 Band2 Cutoff Hz 50Hz 5 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Q2 Q esisiini 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G2 Gain OBI wsvscininnstucennintatangslens 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 2 Fc3 Band3 Cutoff Hz 300Hz 10 0kKHz Sets the center frequency of Band 3 CFG Venere ceicencnianictiencaen atone 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 G3 Gain OB wsneiihcatenetwtamnaues 18 18dB Sets the gain of Band 3 Fc4 Band4 Cutoff Hz 500Hz 20 0kKHz Sets the center frequency of Band 4 OE O renee ene Teer etree eet 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Gain4 Gain AB eeee 18 418dB Sets the gain of Band 4 Trim Trim pereererene
261. ime Sets the limiter output gain Selects the type of guitar amplifier Selects whether the harmonic noise caused by a decrease in sampling fre quency is generated or not Sets the sampling frequency Sets the data bit length Sets the ratio of cut of the high range Sets the decimator output level ODHIG OverDrive HighGain Mode Drive Mode ee ne OD Overdrive HiG Hi Gain Drive Drive ssssasiaeiesieiasecvemeecuautinaceies 1 100 Level Output Level sssessseseseees 0 50 LoFc Low Cutoff Hz 20Hz 1 0kHz LoG Gain AB sasccsahscdesceshan seinans 18 18dB Md1Fc Mid1 Cutoff Hz sna eee 300Hz 10 0kHz Md1Q Q nenn 0 5 10 0 Md1G Gain AB sccccscsesceceesee 18 180B Md2Fc Mid2 Cutoff Hz ee aati temeetnetenenscntentanels 500Hz 20 0kHz MA2Q Gl viusnututeicedacvnnveuaat 0 5 10 0 Md2G Gain AB ccceeeee 18 18dB ChFI1 Chorus Flanger1 DTime Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0ms LFO LFO Waveform cccccseee TRI SIN Speed Frequency H7Z 0 02 20 0Hz Depth GOI siecseneuctevicnsenecdbeassierarnvers 0 100 Fdback Feedback 100 100 Mix Wet Dry ecceeceees Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet ChFI2 Chorus Flanger2 DTime Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0ms LFO LFO Waveform cccccceee TRI SIN Speed Frequency H7Z 0 02 20 0Hz ADS PUIG sctsntascassnstnbsiciasnicemnian
262. in step Q of Recording D1200 mixer control data 2 Enable control change reception by the D1200 In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page set the Mixer Control parameter Control Change Recv to ON Put the external MIDI sequencer in play ready mode Start playback on the D1200 When you press the D1200 s PLAY key to begin play back the external MIDI sequencer will begin playing in synchronization The previously recorded mixer control data will be transmitted from the MIDI sequencer and the mixer settings of the D1200 will change Operation Upgrading the system l Downloading the system fle The most recent system file can be downloaded from the Korg website www korg com For details on the proce dure refer to the Korg website Upgrading via CD ROM R RW Insert the media containing the system file into the CDRW 1 Upgrading via USB Use a USB cable to connect the D1200 to your computer and copy the system file to the root folder the same location as the KORG folder of the USB drive 2 Upgrading the system 1 Load the system file In the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page use SelOp eration to choose either LoadSystem C if loading from a CD ROM R RW or LoadSystem U if loading from the USB drive execute 001 01 000 _ q Load System C s 2 Execute loading of the system file Press the Exec button In response to
263. ine To restore the factory settings the track set to REC lower off Press the amp button and the selected modeling effect e If you make settings for stereo recording by setting will return to the factory settings two TRACK STATUS key to REC the InsertTo setting will change to Inl 1 upper line the track set to REC lower line the track set to REC 1 f g e If you have not set TRACK STATUS to REC the 5 Operation in Modeling mode InsertTo setting will not change Limitations in Modeling mode e Only the INPUT 1 or GUITAR IN jacks can be used e The INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 and Ch7 12 tab pages will be displayed as follows and you cannot make Input settings in Modeling mode seichPair E 001 01 000 Modeling Mode chi e thr ie pineal Sole Monitor fl Phase J e A maximum of two tracks can be recorded simulta neously e If you play back a scene or switch scenes while in Modeling mode the insert effect settings registered in that scene will not be reflected e You cannot set TRACK STATUS to INPUT orange 5 1 Internal operation in Modeling mode In Modeling mode various functions will be set automatical ly in the following cases When you enter Modeling mode e The MODELING key will light e All current assignments in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 and Ch7 12 tab pages will be memorized the Digiln button will be turned off
264. ing mode ss sssesesssesessseseeness 45 Modulation cccccceessssseeeeeeeeees 129 Monaural TY De ienccnesscecvectenrsonevesyeey 140 MONO sneno 38 Monitor L R Meter 125 Monitor OU UN inean 100 IY E E L EET EA 79 84 Multi effect eeeeeeeern 139 MUTE erc 8 98 N New song Creates a NEW SOng eseese 116 O OUT LOCZ asiceacsicteebharteacesaveeiieviabe 118 V ELC OIG saseor 22 157 Effect Program List D1200 specifications About the CDRW Messages Troubleshooting Rhythm Pattern List Block diagram MIDI implementation chart p Paea 8 38 86 98 PAN anhi barn nie 37 Phantom POW CF sass coor creme 7 Phantom power switch 11 VAS OY E E T ENY 100 Play Frotar kina 124 PEAY lt a O 8 Play MO eeveeriacosarna cue tee 124 Post fader level meters 125 Pre fader level meters 0 0 125 Programi changeoil 79 Programi Play siiciersciei essere 118 Program playback of songs 118 Frolec enon 35 R Radio Dutton snsmceraciororea 12 RECI KEV en EE 8 Recording in stereo s ssssesessesesese 37 Recording mode sersrerecahi 92 REG Oep E 126 Rename oeio AN 31 ReStatt anniornieeiemremacinsas 16 INCOSE O LG inenen annn 102 Eftect uset Gaba anceuscseianeoeas 71 DOME dalanna 69 Return Dalan Espacen 89 Reni leve teniciahiessssntcattutvletewes 89 REVEtD an 127 REW Ke Vaeau 8 32 RAVENI aiiai aa 48 95 98 Adjusting the rhythm volume 48 Rhythm on off fasera nir
265. input Adjust the input EQ in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO InEq1 4 tab page The playback can be adjusted by the Channel EQ the In put EQ will not affect the playback Adjust the channel EQ in the EQ Eq1 4 Eq5 8 or Eq9 12 tab page _ The Input EQ cannot be applied to the digital input or rhythm Input EQ can be used only on the analog input Can t record _ The D1200 s CHANNEL fader may be lowered When the BOUNCE RecMode tab page SelectRec Mode setting is at Input The D1200 s MASTER fader may be lowered When the BOUNCE RecMode tab page SelectRec Mode setting is at Bounce C Is TRACK STATUS set to REC for the recording desti nation track Is there enough space on the drive Set the counter display to FreeTime and check the available recording time p 32 84 Increase the free space on the song drive by deleting un wanted songs or songs you have already backed up p 68 102 Is the input source you want to record assigned to a mix er channel Inthe INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page assign the input source to a mixer channel p 35 _ Is the recording mode Select RecMode appropriate p 53 92 4J U Can t use digital input _ Ifyou want to use digital input go to the INPUT OUT PUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page and turn the D
266. it orange Next check the digital input audio levels For instruc tions refer to steps and of Connecting a gui tar to the GUITAR IN jack and assigning it to mixer channel 1 A Insert effects cannot be used when using digital input Operation 2 Adjusting the mixer In the mixer section you can create the overall mix by ad justing the volume tone and panning of the inputs that are assigned to each mixer channel or to the recorded sounds that are being played back For details on adjusting the effects refer to Effects p 42 2 1 Adjusting the volume Use the CHANNEL faders to adjust the input recording or playback volume of each channel Raise or lower the fader to set the appropriate volume The CHANNEL faders adjust the gain in a range from silence all the way up to 12 dB Normally you should set the faders to unity gain 0 dB the input signal is output at the same volume and low er the faders of channels that are too loud rather than raising the faders of channels that are too quiet This will make it less likely that the sound will clip distort e If pairing is on use the odd numbered channel fader to adjust the volume p 37 e Fader settings can be registered in a scene gt p 39 To adjust the volume level of each input channel Use the CHANNEL faders to adjust the volume level of each mixer channel assigned in the INPUT OUT PUT SOLO
267. ith each struc ture refer to Effect Program List p 154 SelectEf fectType H linzoutxe 2 linlouts4 FF O 2inZoutye CO dindouts 1in2outx2 or linloutx2 Select this when you want to use two mono in stereo out effects This is ideal when you want to add spaciousness to a lead guitar or vocal The effects can also be used as 1 in 1 out monaural effects amp You cannot select this if Assign is set to Trk 2in2outx2 Select this when you want to use two stereo in stereo out effects This is ideal for use with stereo input sources such as keyboard linloutx4 Select this when you want to use four mono in mono out effects This is ideal for sources with a fixed pan position such as rhythm guitar linloutx8 Select this when you want to use eight mono in mono out effects This is ideal for sources with a fixed pan position such as drums amp You cannot select this if Assign is set to In CO MASTER RHYTHM Tuner II co aounce FNAL erc 1 cq BM n Keo erect EEC EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO nn METER AUTO IN LOCI UNDO Hreacy view SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP pynicy SCENE MARK apnoea SONG TRACK USB 3 INSELtTO ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsecs Selects the location at which the insert effect will be inserted Press the i button to open the dialog box and make settings Pr
268. ive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC 4 Handling of the internal hard disk Do not apply physical shock to this device In particu lar you must never move this device or apply physi cal shock while the power is turned on This can cause part or all of the data on disk to be lost or may dam age the hard disk or interior components When this device is moved to a location where the temperature is radically different water droplets may condense on the hard disk If the device is used in this condition it may malfunction so please allow several hours to pass before operating the device Do not repeatedly turn the power on off This may damage the D1200 This device begins to access the hard disk immedi ately after the power is turned on Never turn off the power while the HDD access indi cator is lit or blinking Doing so can cause all or part of the data on hard disk to be lost or may cause mal functions such as hard disk damage If the hard disk has been damaged due to incorrect operation power failure or accidental interruption of the power supply a fee may be charged for replacement even if this device is still within its watranty period COPYRIGHT WARNING This professional device is intended only for use with works for which you yourself own the copy right for which you have received permission from the copyright holder to publicly perform record broadcast sell and duplicate or in connec
269. ive management eseseseerersrererersereree 105 I yates cerca tes E A a 108 Vtr1 6 Select virtual tracks 1 6 eeeeecccceeeseeeeceeeeeeees 108 Vtr7 12 Select virtual tracks 7 12 00 eeececcceseeecceeeeeeees 108 EditTrk Perform track editing operations 108 limpor mpor WAV TCS essan 113 Export Exporta WAV Plescmiseiisnisme 114 SONG TEE E E E eN 116 DEIOONE Selecta SONP secevacsestiacemetanaivrndichadeviddeieeaeets 116 EditSong Perform song edit operations sessseeeressseeee 116 PrgPlay Program playback of songs eseseereeseserereseseen 118 IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 END LOC4 0 118 MARK erect cei cares E esate ae sede gious 119 Mark Edit aS apse rere ste enceswiteteseeacuntordnenccandurostaateoanneneas 119 SCEN E eara e E Se eat eases sate A E 120 ReadDel Switch scene playback on off and edit scenes 120 MixView Viewing pan and fader scene data 004 121 AUTO PUNCH err css tcc oe ecenceaieesetse iene seco E A EEAS 122 AtPunch Settings for auto punch in out recording 122 LOOP eee a E E E ere 123 Loop Settings for loop playback and recording 123 TRIGGER eienen E E E e enin 123 Trigger Settings for trigger recording eee 123 SERUBD aera a E a 124 METER TRACK VIEW c ccccccesccccecsccccsccccscccessccceescceees 125 UNDO eats sacs heres a e Gee uesoe ccs tee seave auioeuane theese E 126 MASTER RYM Tuner 11 co aounce ENA VD erect ea INSERT I Moneual
270. ives three dimensional depth and spread to the sound because the signal is output from the left right and center Speed SIG scscssiccraisicesrncacsuansehueyiets 1 100 Sets the LFO speed Depth DEIN escsisicceracinaiveaneiseineews 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Shimmr Shimmer vsccssanesscsrecasrecnres 0 100 Sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO waveform Mix Wet Dry ccceee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Shimmer This parameter sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO wave form Increasing this value adds more shimmering making the cho rus effect more complex and richer 130 Dynamics DY1 DY7 Category Dynamics type effects 21 DY1 St Compressor Stereo Compressor This effect compresses the input signal to regulate the level and give a punchy effect It is useful for guitar piano and drum sounds This is a stereo compressor You can link left and right channels or use each channel separately Envelp Envelope Select L RMix Indivi Determines whether the left and right channels are linked or used separately Sens SeNSItivity ccsseccsccseeseseees 1 100 Sets the sensitivity Attack Attack ssndcwvgaussisnurrvsrstriirednesiiein 1 100 Sets the attack level EQTrim EQ Trim scccesctstasittarsnavacvecnrsess 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 415 0 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB
271. just the dynamics of drums that are recorded in stereo or apply Reverb to create spaciousness when playing back the track linl outx4 These are mono in mono out chain effects You can use four of these chain effects simultaneously These are ideal for sources whose stereo position is fixed such as rhythm guitar e When recording four vocals simultaneously you can apply Exciter Comp to voices that lack impact and Limiter P4EQ to powerful voices 1 in 1 out x 8 during track playback only Only during track playback you can use eight mono in mono out effects These are ideal for sources whose stereo position is fixed such as drums e You can use Comp Limiter Gate or Expander to adjust the dynamics of each recorded track or apply Chorus Phaser or Delay In the case of a 24 bit song only six of these effects can be used 1 1 Applying insert effects while you record analog or rhythm only While recording you can apply effects to the input from in struments connected to the INPUT 1 GUITAR IN INPUT 4 analog input jacks or to the internal rhythm sounds if they are input to a mixer channel If the optional CDRW 1 is in stalled you can also apply effects to the sound from an audio CD Applying an effect to a guitar connected to the GUITAR IN jack and recording it to track 1 Plug in the guitar and select the track where you want to record Refer to Connecting a guitar to the GUITAR IN
272. k The vertical axis is the level Ze DKs Ch1 6 7 8 11 12 000 100 Adjusts the send level from each mixer channel to the AUX OUT jack Specifies pairing for adjacent mixer channels gt p 38 86 Reference FINAL EFFECT The final effect is applied to the master LR bus to improve the overall balance of the song The D1200 lets you use one stereo final effect FinalEff Select and edit the final effect The final effect is applied to the entire sound of the master output and is used mainly to improve the overall balance of the completed song 1 InputLevelMeter InL R CLP 8 18 42dB Indicates the effect input level The horizontal axis indicates the effect input and the vertical axis indicates the level For details on adjusting the input level p 22 2 EffectNumber FOOO FOO1 032 u033 064 Selects the effect program u033 u064 is the user area in which you can store effect programs that you have edited 3 BQMEMOChascssresaceeeseesssesisiers EffectProgramName When you press this button the Effect Algorithm dia log box will appear Here you can view the structure of the program and turn the effect on off HALL o A O00 00 000 C ae 3a Effectlcon scccccccsssssscccsssssccccccsssccccssessecs 3b Effect On Off ccccccssssssccccceees On Off Refer to EffectIcon and Effect On Off for the insert effect
273. l CDTrack2 CDTrack3 ICD Trackd re i i i i Tr3 i 7 Tr Tr5 4 4 X X seconds or longer 4 seconds or longer 4 seconds or longer 4 seconds or longer e There will be no space between the songs e When using Disc At Once you can write only one song to disk You will not be able to add other songs to the disc e Up to 99 marks are valid e The beginning of the selected track will automati cally be the first song of the CD track 1 e You must register the marks so that each song each track written to the CD is at least four seconds long If a song is less than four seconds long an error will occur e Marks that are later than the end time of the selected tracks will be ignored Off The disc will be written using the Track At Once method e Up to 99 marks are valid e Mark locations will not be used e You may add other songs later e If you want to play back the CD you will need to perform the Finalize operation 3 TrackMonitor cccccccccsssssssssssssssscees On Off Lets you monitor the sound that will be written to the CD By turning this on and playing back you can hear the audio of the tracks selected by SelectTracks without it being routed through the mixer i e without EQ or effects This lets you hear the sound that will actually be written to CD without having to adjust any settings During playback you will not be able to move to anoth er ta
274. l being received by your MIDI sequencer Check the Select MIDI Sync Mode setting gt p 79 102 L If TempoSource is set to TempoTrack has MIDI clock or tap tempo data been recorded on the tempo track gt p 51 _ Have the appropriate synchronization settings been made on your MIDI sequencer Refer to the owner s manual of your MIDI sequencer Block diagram Index Rhythm Pattern List Effect Program List D1200 specifications About the CDRW Messages Troubleshooting MIDI implementation chart The D1200 won t receive MMC In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page is RcevMMC turned On _ In the above page is MMC DevID set to match the MMC device ID setting of your MIDI sequencer p 79 102 For some MIDI sequencers the MMC device ID setting may differ Is your MIDI sequencer set to transmit MMC Refer to the owner s manual of your MIDI sequencer Can t use MIDI to control effects or scenes Are the D1200 and your MIDI sequencer set to the same MIDI channel Inthe SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page check the Glo balCh gt p 79 101 The D1200 does not synchronize as a slave If the D1200 is set as an MTC slave it may take several seconds for synchronization to occur Can t control another device via MMC Inthe SYSTEM USB MMC tab page is Select MMC Mode set to Transmit Isthe MMC s
275. l monitor the external input assigned in the Input tab page when the track is recording or stopped and will monitor the playback of the track when the track is playing Off Mixer channels whose TRACK STATUS is REC will always monitor the external input Phase Specify the phase of the mixer channels Here you can invert the phase of each channel This applies to playback tracks If audio equipment whose hot and cold pins were reversed have been recorded in stereo you may experience problems such as an unstable stereo image or cancellation You can correct such situations by inverting the phase of the signal Phases Revs E 001 01 000 let 2 p e T AM ENEG EI EI Chine QchT iagneqi 4y Sole jMonitor A Phase N Normal Phase The phase of this channel will not be inverted Normally you will use the N setting R Reverse Phase The phase of this channel will be inverted Specifies pairing for adjacent mixer channels gt p 38 86 Reference SYSTEM USB Control Foot switch and control change device pedal MIDI settings zeme Q01 0l 000 ma 1 3 4 1 Pol FootSwPolarity sssccssscsssscesseees Specifies the polarity of the foot switch Connect a foot switch separately sold option PS 1 or equivalent to the front panel FOOT SWITCH jack and set this parameter so that the symbol lights when you press the foot switch 2 Func FootSwFun ction
276. lave device set so that it will receive MMC The D1200 does not transmit mixer parameters In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page is Control Change Trans turned On Is the device receiving the control changes set to record each MIDI channel 1 12 The D1200 does not receive mixer parameters In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page is Control Change Recv turned On CD R RW CD R RW drive option is not recognized Is the CD R RW drive option installed correctly Turn off the power of the D1200 and check the connec tions p 150 Can t write No further data can be written to a CD R RW disc that has been finalized p 65 76 No data can be written to a CD RW disc that contains data written by another device LI Failed while writing to CD Select a slower writing speed Use media that is recommended for your drive Bie ae Some writing speeds cannot be selected when writing a CD The speeds that you can select will depend on the type of media and on the specifications of the CDRW 1 p 93 4 Can t play back on an audio CD player _ Did you finalize the disc Inthe CD CD R RW tab page press the Final but ton to finalize the disc p 65 146 Did you use CD R media Some CD players are unable to play back CD RW media We recommend that you use CD R media TE Have you tried using a different type of media
277. lay five seconds before and after the current locate point 10sec Display ten seconds before and after the current locate point 20sec Display twenty seconds before and after the cur rent locate point 40sec Display forty seconds before and after the current locate point Trk View 7 12 Display tracks 7 12 gt TrkView1 6 TrkView 1 12 Display tracks 1 12 gt TrkView1 6 2 Snd1 2 MonL R MsEL R cccccsssccsssscccceeecs These are the level meters for Snd1 2 effect sends 1 2 MonL R monitor L R and MstL R master L R MstL R is also displayed at the right edge of the page in SONG TRACK BOUNCE and EQ modes al lowing you to check the master LR level SPO Oeaae cece ucecccccceccecetauszeceeeesecd eceos 0 8s co Specifies the time that the maximum level of the level meter is held in the display PeakHoldT ime 2s This setting applies to the level meters of all pages Press the PkHold button to open the dialog box and make the desired setting Press the YES OK key to apply your selection or press the NO CANCEL key to can cel it 0 8s 0 8 seconds co The peak hold indicator will be held forever The hold indicator will be cleared when you use the PkHold indicator to open the dialog box 12 MASTER RYTM Tuner 11 co aounce ENA VD erect ea INSERT I Moneual COUNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUT
278. layback of tracks 9 12 Refer to Eqi 4 Adjust the EQ for mixer channels 1 4 MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND By adjusting the send levels of each channel you can send its signal to one or both master effects and use them to add overall depth and balance The D1200 has two master effects and both can be used simultaneously Use AUX send if you want to apply an external effect MstEff1 Select and edit master effect 2 4 5 3 1 OutputlevelMeter sseessoessseessocesoeessocesoeesooee OUT L R CLP 8 18 42dB Indicates the output level of the effect The horizontal axis indicates the effect output and the vertical axis indicates the level The send level from each channel i e the input level to the effect can be adjusted in the EffSnd1 tab page 2 EffectNumber M000 M001 032 v001 032 Selects the effect program u001 u032 are user area programs in which you can store the effect programs you edit 3 EGHEMOCh es seccosncessnccevensiese EffectProgramName When you press this button the Effect Algorithm dia log box will appear Here you can view the structure of the program and switch the effect on off HALL o A O00 00 000 C 3a Effectlcon ccccccsssssessccsssccssccccsccssocsncscesonss 3b Effect On Off ccccssscrcessseeceees On Off p 86 Insert effect EffectIcon Effect On Off 4 RetLev cccccccccccccccccccccccccccc
279. lda pcenas e AE 68 1 Backing up and restoring song data cce 68 2 Backing up and restoring effect user data 70 3 Reading and writing WAV files eee 71 4 Drive and data compatibility between models of the Digital Recording Studio series eseseeeeeeeeeen 74 DIVE cocainei EEA E 1 l Checking the Nata disk iwssecvssswudsetusrectte ais 75 2 Formatting the hard disk cece neeeeeeees 75 3 Erasing AiG DKW Cis Giese coo ccic heen ieee ies 76 Be SIPING CAPACI sesirsstems test sounna suivat vontbedartitnsascastiyccentts 76 USD P A EE A N EEEE EE E 11 1 Saving data to your COMPUEET eee eee 77 MID cctsestsocesrenecinenicecesuseceerasieecansaeceerevewest 79 Te WIND CORNECTHONS pier diecds aera mietalenties 79 2 MIDI messages used by the D1200 cee 79 Dis RO SUNS MID ea A E 79 Upgrading the system cccsceeeceeeeeaeeeaes 81 1 Downloading the system file 0 cee eee 81 2 Upgrading the syste rreren ai 81 Reference 80 COUNTER cc ccccecccecccccceccesecssecsceesecaseees 84 Counter Counter display sereias 84 MODELING sstcscccansccesicassesteecksaacsesasstisicenestae 84 Category Select an effect category ccc 84 Modenng Lorren ernea AAN 84 Mod lng 2ra a n oa A nice A 85 INSERT EFFECT zicczcsiciasssauevexevahanesechesstesaaceese 89 InsAss Specify the insert location and type of the meern eNe eaae TAT caesarean 85 InsEff1 Select and edit ins
280. le to save the edited insert effect as a user program and re call it when desired amp You cannot use Modeling mode to edit an effect pro gram that has been saved as an insert effect Operation If you want fo edit the effect in greater detail and save it e The last used modeling effect settings will be 1 Edit the effect in Modeling mode p 45 restored 2 Access the INSERT InsEff1 tab page The MODELING key will go dark The display will show the insert effect program that you had been editing as a modeling effect When you exit Modeling mode e The MODELING key will go dark e With the exception of tracks whose TRACK STA TUS is set to REC the audio input settings to the mixer will return to the state prior to when you entered Modeling mode 3 Edit the settings as an insert effect and save Refer to To edit an effect p 43 and To save the effect program p 44 For details on using an effect program that you saved When you change the track status refer to 1 Using insert effects p 42 If you change the TRACK STATUS while in Modeling r mode the InsertTo setting of the insert effect will To exit Modeling mode E To exit Modeling mode press the NO CANCEL key e Ifyou make settings for monaural recording by set several times to make the MODELING key go dark ting only one TRACK STATUS to REC the InsertTo setting will change to In1 gt 1 upper l
281. lect this if you want to erase all data saved on the song drive and USB drive Since this will initial ize only the management area it will not require much time Off Select this if the DiskError message appears frequently Buick A substantial amount of time will be required if you ex ecute the format operation with Quick turned Off 40 GB approximately 10 hours 30 minutes 2a FORCE veccasccsssscsscasacacessaubeversesecesenndes On Off Execute formatting even if the drive contains protected songs EE On Forcibly execute formatting even if the drive contains a song protected by Protect Song Force JOff If a song protected by Protect Song exists on the drive the Song Protect message will appear when you attempt to execute and the operation will be aborted Press the YES OK key to begin the format operation LoadSystem C LoadSystem U Update the D1200 s system program This operation loads the operating system from the CDRW 1 or USB drive and rewrites the operating system program of the D1200 For details refer to Upgrading the system p 81 10 INSERT I EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL RHYTHM TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO METER AUTO IN OCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK i TRACK Vir1 6 Select virtual tracks 1 1 Select
282. ling effect screen 2 ATERS EER A horus Delay AMBIENT 2 Use the knobs located below the display to select the desired type for the dynamics vacuum tube and ambi ent effects 3 Edit the effect parameters Move the cursor to DYNAMICS TONE or AMBI ENT in the lower part of the display and press the ENTER key to access the effect parameter screen for the corresponding effect For example when you access the DYNAMICS screen the three parameters ATTACK RELEASE and LEVEL will appear You can adjust the values of these three parameters by turning the three knobs located below the display If you want to make precise adjust ments to a parameter you can also use the VALUE dial to edit the value If the sound is distorted you can either lower the input trim or lower the DYNAMICS level If the input level for the dynamics type effect is not ap propriate you may not obtain the result you want Use the trim control to adjust the level appropriately for the input 3 Applying a modeling effect to a mic The D1200 provides various modeling effects for use with a mic such as simulations of different types of studio mic and dynamics type effects These effects are ideal for processing signals from a dynamic mic or line input Press the MODELING key move the cursor to Mic at the right of the screen and press the ENTER key or the YES OK key to ent
283. ll can be selected here EffAll All effect user data Ins001 128 Insert effect user data Mst001 032 Master effect user data Fin033 064 Final effect user data 28 Be DEV sce stn vutesasanccavecwedessivudieateiessieesiawesses S C U Selects the backup destination drive gt p 103 A Destination cscssccsees C CD U EffctName Indicates the backup destination drive and drive infor mation C CD or U filename Normally if you have set the SourceEffNo parameter to EffAll the file name will default to backup source song name DFX and if you have selected an individ 10 INSERT I EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL RHYTHM TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO F9 METER AUTO IN LOCI SYSTEM UNDO Ea SCRUB m LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK i ual effect this file will be named backup source effect name DFI for an insert effect DFM for a master effect DFF for a final effect A When backing up to CD R RW you must use a blank disc If you set Drive to U USB DOS you can change the name of the backup destination file gt p 103 You can input a filename of up to eight characters 6 Exec Execute cccccccccsssscccsssccccccssccccessceees Executes the backup Backing up to CD R RW Exe z Data ackup User area il 6a Speed ssscccssrrceeees 1x 2
284. ll be performed on the drive Press the i button and make your selection from the list SelectOper ation M CheckDrive S CIEraselO Ry Formate Formate Format All G LoadSystem C i LoadSystem L Details of each operation are explained separately below CheckDrive S Check the song drive This operation detects errors on the song drive and repairs them Perform this operation if DiskBusy error messages appear frequently After executing this operation you will still be able to use the song data if no major errors had oc curred on the drive amp It is not possible to check the USB drive 10 INSERT I EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL RHYTHM TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO nn METER AUTO IN LOCI SYSTEM UNDO Hreacy view SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP J pynicy SCENE MARK TT apnoea SONG TRACK nt peme E 001 01 000 _ CheckOrive 5 1 USE Mode Control MIOI E syne A ANC Jp Diskuti 1 Exec Execute cccccsscccsssscccssssccccssscccceesees Executes the check drive function la Ared ccccccccsscccccesees Unused Full CurSng Specifies the area that will be checked Unused Of the unused area check and repair the first 2 GB that will be used next Full Check and repair the entire area CurSong Check and repair the area used by the cur rently selected song Press the YES OK button to begi
285. ll receive MMC Off The D1200 will not use MMC 2 MMCDevID MMCDevicelD 000 127 Specifies the device ID that will be used to transmit and receive MMC In order to transmit or receive MMC you must use a MIDI cable to connect the D1200 and the external MIDI device set the two devices to the same Device ID and make the appropriate setting in Select MMC Mode If you set the device ID to 127 the D1200 will receive MMC messages of any ID number and will transmit MMC messages using ID 127 to which all devices will respond B U Rst Backup and restore Here you can backup data to a CD R RW disc or the USB drive and restore the backed up data The following data can be restored e D1200 backup data e D1600 backup data track 1 12 data only e D12 backup data e D16 backup data track 1 12 data only For details on compatibility between these models refer to p 68 amp When backing up to CD R RW it is not possible to save multiple sets of data on a single disc setectDrive 001 01 000 1 Backup 1 Son AAT 1 B U RstType Backup1Song BackupAll Songs BackupUserData Restore Select the type of backup or restore operation Press the E button and make your choice in the dia log box Select Backup Restore Type O BackupliserData O Restore Each type of backup restore operation is explained sep arately below Reference B U Rstlype Back
286. lowing you to combine twelve tracks of data into two tracks without erasing any ex isting tracks gt p 64 Recording on a different virtual track 4 Select a virtual track In the TRACK Vtr1 6 or Vtr7 12 tab page select the track that you want to record and turn the VALUE dial to select an unrecorded virtual track SelectAll ee Aer NESET ek Import Euport A Recorded track Selected track Adjust the recording level of the input device and record Refer to 1 1 Analog input p 35 1 3 Recording while you listen to other tracks play The process of recording while you listen to other tracks play is called overdubbing For example you can use this to record a solo while listening to previously recorded backing tracks Check the recording mode Access the BOUNCE RecMode tab page For Select RecMode choose Input record the audio input inputon E 001 01 000 Te Select Rechode e Slowly raise the CHANNEL fader and the level meter of the input channel will move according to the level of the input signal Adjust the level to be as 2 Use the CHANNEL fader to set the recording level Refer to 1 1 Basic recording Rhythm i a Effects Mixer r and w N 5 N e Q Q oz lt MIDI USB Drive Data catia Upgrading the system 53 54 3 Select the playback tracks Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the
287. m a CD R RW disc insert the disc into the CD R RW drive RestoreList 3 001 01 000 j Restore eem TT eee TETIT c J al HO 2 Select Restore In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to select Restore You can also select the button and press the ENTER key to display Select Backup Restore Type and make your selection 3 Select the restore source drive Select the Drive button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select either C CD B or U USB DOS and press the YES OK key 4 Select the restore source song Select the E button and press the ENTER key In the Select RestoreSong dialog box select the desired song When restoring from a CD R RW Select the song to be restored from the file list Select RestoreSong EEIE DemoSongae i oT SelectAll ECES DernioSongaas If you want to restore all songs turn on the SelectAll button 69 MIDI USB Drive oe a be Rhythm i a Effects Mixer pins w Upgrading the system Select the song and press the YES OK key When restoring from the USB drive Select the song to be restored from the file list CEJ SONGHaR1 DEK Cancel SONGHAE DBE It is not possible to restore all songs at once Select the song and press the YES OK key If you are restoring a single song select the restore de
288. master 10 On the slave D1200 press the PLAY key to enter play ready mode If you do not want the slave D1200 to receive mixer con trol messages you can either set the master D1200 so that it will not transmit these messages or set the slave D1200 so that it will not receive these messages Using MIDI for mixer control 3 Press the PLAY key on the master D1200 The slave D1200 will receive time code and will begin playing as soon as it achieves synchronization with the master D1200 It may take several seconds for synchronization to be achieved Using MIDI for mixer control In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page you can set Con trol Change Trans or Recv to ON so that the D1200 will transmit or receive mixer parameters Recording the D1200 s mixer control messages Here s how D1200 mixer operation data can be recorded on an external MIDI sequencer Connect the D1200 and MIDI sequencer as follows Make synchronization settings on the D1200 and exter nal MIDI sequencer Set the D1200 to be the master and the external MIDI sequencer to be the slave Make settings so that the MIDI sequencer will synchronize to the MIDI clock or MTC messages transmitted from the D1200 p 102 2 Enable control change transmission from the D1200 In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page turn the Mixer Control setting Control Change Trans to ON Gba s S O01 01 0
289. meters of the cur rently recalled scene have been edited You can register your changes by using OvrWrt in the SCENE Read Del tab page 12 MASTER RYTM Tuner 11 co aounce ENA VD erect ea INSERT I Moneual COUNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO METER AUTO IN LOCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB AUTO PUNCH AtPunch Settings for auto punch in out recording Auto punch in out recording is a function that automatical ly starts recording punch in and stops recording punch out at the locations you specify ahead of time If AutoPunch is On when you record punch in out re cording will be performed fautoPunch 6001 01 000 1 In 609 601 000 Out 612 601 066 1 AutoPunch cccccccsssssscccccccessssssccees On Off Switches the auto punch in out recording function on off AutoPunchOn On Auto punch recording will be used when you record If this is On the AUTO PUNCH key will light When you begin recording playback will begin prior to the IN time by the length of the specified pre roll time Actual recording will occur in the IN OUT region and playback will then stop following the specified post roll time gt RolTime Off Recording will occur normally es MUN E T 000 00 000 Displays the auto punch in time the location at which recording will begin
290. mpler aliasing LPF Pre LPF Off On Selects whether the harmonic noise caused by a decrease in sampling fre quency is generated or not Fs Sampling Frequency Hz 1 0k 44 1k Sets the sampling frequency Bit Resolution ncceescsamsiostesincitncsnadecan 4 24 Sets the data bit length Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Sets the LFO speed Depth GOI siccasenewshenitncceatnscensatarsuart 0 100 Sets the depth of the sampling frequency modulation HiDamp High Damp ssssee 0 100 Sets the ratio of cut of the high range Level Output Level cesssceee 0 100 Sets the output level Mix Wet Dry ceccee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Pre LPF If asampler with a very low sampling frequency receives very high pitched sound that could not be heard during playback it could generate pitch noise that is unrelated to the original sound Set Pre LPF to On to prevent this noise from being generated If you set the Sampling Frequency to about 3kHz and set Pre LPF to Off you can create a sound like a ring modulator 13 Insert 1in2outx2 Insert 2in2outx2 Insert 2in2outx2 Master Final Effect Insert 1in outx4 Insert 1in1 outx8 Effect Control Modeling effects Final Resolution Output Level If you set a smaller value for the Resolution parameter the sound may be di
291. mpleted Press the YES OK key 6 Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the IN location If Disk Busy warnings are no longer dis played and the data plays correctly the data has been optimized successfully If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 As the specified region IN OUT is set longer it will correspondingly take longer for processing to be fin ished and for the Completed indication to appear Rhythm i a Effects Mixer r and w N 5 N e Q Q oz lt F MIDI USB Drive Data Dai Upgrading the system 59 60 Erasing silent audio events Here s how to erase silent audio events from the IN OUT region of track 1 turning them into blank space 1 Register the IN and OUT locations Set the IN point slightly ahead of the silent events you want to erase and set the OUT point to a location slightly after these events gt p 33 118 2 Select Optimize In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to OptimizeTrack 3 Select the optimize mode Select the Mode button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box For this example select Erase Silence and press the YES OK key to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page 4 Select the number of the track that you want to opti mize For this example set
292. n also play back an audio CD For the CD writing method you can choose either Track At Once or Disc At Once You can also retain the image file on the hard disk to quickly write multiple copies of the CD l Some audio CD players are unable to play back CD R RW discs Prepare Prepare to create an audio CD PreparesForwriteToco E 000 49 08 1 SelectTracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Selects the tracks that will be written to the CD The audio data from the first to the last event of the selected track in the selected song will be written to the CD If you want to write the audio data from virtual tracks other than the ones that are currently selected use the TRACK Vtr1 6 and Vtr7 12 tab pages to specify the desired virtual tracks and then specify the tracks here 2 DiscAtOnce eeeeesseeeeeeeecsseececccssssseeeeo On Off Switches the Disc At Once writing method on off On The disc will be written using the Disc At Once method From the first to the last events in the currently selected tracks of the currently selected song will be written to the CD R RW and the disc will then be finalized all in one operation The locations at which you have registered a Mark will be the track divisions of the CD If you write tracks 1 and 2 to the CD DiscAtonce Song TOP Track END 00 00 00 Mark001 Mark002 Mark003 Mark004 Yy Y Y T Trl ip CD Track
293. n of Band 3 B4 Band4 CB cccscscssescssesees 18 418 Sets the gain of Band 4 B5 Band5 AB sscsisssinssicindunanieeaere 18 418 Sets the gain of Band 5 B6 Band6 ABI ss scisccvencaareninrnatd 18 418 Sets the gain of Band 6 B7 Band7 AB issswsisevetdovisccvedsseves 18 418 Sets the gain of Band 7 Mix Wet Dry c0 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Type This parameter selects a combination of center frequencies for each band 33 LS2 St Multiband Limiter Stereo Multiband Limiter This is a stereo multiband limiter Respo RESPONSE 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the modulator input NLevel Noise Level sssssce 0 100 Sets the noise mix level to the Carrier LoGain Low Gain dB 00 12 412 Sets the low range output level of the vocoder HiGain High Gain dB 4 12 412 Sets the high range output level of the vocoder HiMix Modulator High Mix 0 100 Sets the high range output level of the modulator Sets the balance between the vocoder output and the Carrier Bal Vocoder Carrier Carrier 1 99 99 1 Vocode Mix Wet Dry cececeee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Formant Shift By offsetting the Carrier filter you can adjust the height of the fre quency range to which the vocoder effect is applied The tonal qual ity will change
294. n the drive check A The Check Drive operation requires a certain amount of time If Area is Full approximately 4 hours 30 min utes If Area is Unused approximately 25 minutes amp If DiskBusy appears even after you perform the Check Drive operation you will need to optimize the track data gt p 59 111 TRACK EditTrk tab page Optimize Track amp In a studio or similar location vibration due to ultra low frequencies may cause DiskBusy to occur If this is the cause of the error message you can solve the problem by moving the D1200 to a different lo cation rather than executing the Check Drive oper ation EraseCD RW Erase a CD RW disc This operation erases all data that has been written to a CD RW disc When you erase a disc you will once again be able to use the entire disc area as a blank disc amp When you execute Erase CD RW all data on that disc will be lost amp You cannot execute Erase CD RW on a disc other than 106 a CD RW peme lE 001 01 000_ EraseCDb RW 1 USB Mode Exec Execute cccccccccssssscccsssscccccsccceceesees Executes erasure of the CD RW disc an tRecoyver Exe EraseCh AC ni na N yi A Are vou Sure la Quick SW cccscsccccccssssssscccccceees On Off Selects the erasure method for the CD RW nea On A high speed erase will be performed on the entire CD RW di
295. nance amount Sets the phaser effect balance Selects LFO Waveform Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the Tap1 delay time Sets the Tap2 delay time Sets the Tap1 output level Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Sets the damping amount in the high range Sets the effect balance of the multi tap delay Sets the reverberation time Sets the damping amount in the high range Sets the delay time of the reverb sound and gate control signal Sets the EQ input level Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ Sets the effect balance of the reverb Sets the balance between the dry and reverb sounds of the gate control signal Switches between non reversed and reversed Gate on off Sets the level to which the Gate is applied Sets the attack time Sets the release time amp The Gate of 86 MM32 Reverb Gate is connected to the Wet output of the reverb This means that the on off switch of the Gate effect is linked to the Reverb and will be switched on off in con junction with the Reverb 140 Insert lin 1 outx8 These algorithms can be selected as an insert effect if linloutx8 is selected for SelectEffType Different insert effects can be used on each of eight channels tracks Effects MN1 MN11 are monaural type effects A linloutx8 effects cannot be controlled by an expression pedal etc 88 MN1 OverDrive
296. nd edit SCONES ira r EE ENTE E POER 120 MixView Viewing pan and fader scene data 121 AUTO PUNCH ict ccesasigcateceerocieiateeccseieoeeescteess 122 AtPunch Settings for auto punch in out VECOLGIN GS enaa E N E EN 122 LOOP crenis A 123 Loop Settings for loop playback and recording 123 TRIGGER sssr tedn ia araa 123 Trigger Settings for trigger recording s e sese 123 SCRUB cicSsetespatehieceteaseseetataeenanssanssisbedenieses 124 METER TRACK WIEW ccc ecee eee ee ee ee ee ee nena 125 UNDO aries e A 126 Effect Parameter List 127 Insert 2in2outx2 Master Final Effect 127 Insert 2in20utx2 Final ccecceeeeeeeeeees 133 Insert 1in20utx2 2 cceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 134 Insert TiMTOUTXA 0 ccc eee cece e eee eceeeeeeeeeeees 138 Insert CLINT OUIKG eiiesistcatetiecmectdremneeeieion dawn 140 Effect Control sccccosdinccatssntesteiatenieevessstmetedss 141 Modeling effects cccccceeeceeeeeeeceeeecers 141 Appendix 0 143 Troubleshooting cidicccdsieesdiciid Radeceeetiaditaineias 143 Nothing appears in the display c eee eee 143 NO SOWING e rA E sb ichedeeeatescren 143 Channel fader or EQ does not work cceeeeeeeeeees 143 Can t use digital Input sesissssciesaissevsnsiecsestesassinsdntonssscens 144 The input or recorded sound is noisy or distorted 144 Effects dO not apply win sisyraistem ae ansa
297. nd the changes produced by vacuum tubes and transistors Conventions in this manual Keys switches and knobs Keys dials and knobs etc located on the panel of the D1200 are enclosed in square brackets ew Parameters appearing in the display Parameters that appear in the display are enclosed by double quotation marks Buttons and cells refer to objects in the display To select a parameter shown in the display use the CURSOR keys to move the cursor to that parameter p 13 Bold type Settings of panel controls such as faders or TRACK STATUS keys are printed in bold type and parameter values are also indicated by bold type Bold type is also used to emphasize important content in the text Steps 1 Steps in a procedure are indicated as 1 p E This indicates a page in this manual to which you can refer for more information 4S These symbols indicate cautions or advice OO tab page This indicates a page within the display To access that page press the key on the panel Screen displays in this manual The values of various parameters in this manual are only explanatory examples and may not necessary match the displays that appear on your D1200 Parts and their function Top panel 1 PI 0 PEAK gt a A 3 4 TRIM 60 PEAKI PEAK uid PEAK PEKO PEKO 4 TRIM 60 4 TRIM 60 4 TRIM S0 4 TRIM I
298. nd turn the VALUE dial to choose tempo map 001 Tempo map 001 specifies the tempo at the beginning of the song and tempo maps 002 200 can be used to change the tempo at subsequent measures e Select the Edit button and access the Select TempoMap001 Param dialog box Select TempoMlape Param HET Hed Meas L4 4 Beat A44 Tempo 1268 Rhythm e Bobt Focki e Specify the tempo in Tempo the time signature in Beat and the rhythm pattern in Rhythm e Use the ending measure of Meas to specify the number of measures that tempo 001 will continue The starting measure of tempo map 001 cannot be changed from measure 001 e When you have finished making settings press the YES OK key Create anew tempo map to change the tempo time sig nature and rhythm pattern during the song e Select the New button and press the ENTER key The display will read Select TempoMap002 Param Select TempoMaphbs Param AES BBT Tempo 126 Rhuthr E L1 13 leas Beat A44 Sbt Fock e Specify the Tempo Beat and Rhythm settings that you want to use for this new tempo map e Use Meas to specify the starting measure and end ing measure at which tempo map 002 will be inserted e Press the YES OK key to add the tempo map When you add a tempo map any subsequent tempo maps will be renumbered upward
299. ndicate the same channel as 3a SelectCh Specify pairing for adjacent mixer channels Press the amp button to access the following display InputLevelMeter IN1 2 CLP 8 EffectNumber 000 001 amp For channels that are paired the odd numbered knob or fader will control both channels Moving the even num bered knob or fader will not control anything Aa Select ChannelPair 1 2 5 6 To specify the channels you want to pair press a 1 2 5 6 button to turn it on The heart icon will appear Ab Select Function Eq Send Aux Pan Select the function s for which pairing will be enabled Use the EQ Pan buttons to turn on the functions that you want to pair The settings will be applied when you press the YES OK key Fader and track status will always be paired if pair ing is on InsEff1 Select and edit insert effect 1 18 42dB Indicates the input level of each effect The horizontal axis indicates the effect input and the vertical axis indi cates the level IN2 is input only when INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 is set to 2in2outx2 and will not be input otherwise 128 U001 128 Selects the effect program U001 U128 is the user area in which you can save effect programs that you edited If the effect program includes a control function a will be displayed afte
300. nect these jacks to your external monitor system or recording device They output the same audio signal as the S P DIF OUT jack These are RCA phono jacks 10 Phantom power switch 48 V phantom power is supplied to the INPUT 1 2 jacks allowing you to use condenser mics Phantom power is supplied to the balanced XLR jacks and can be switched on off independently for each channel Turn on this switch only for channels that are using a con denser mic l You may damage your equipment if you connect or dis connect a condenser mic while phantom power is turned on Always turn phantom power off before you connect or disconnect a condenser mic l Never connect an dynamic type other type mic or de vice if phantom power is turned on Doing so may dam age your equipment O0O0o0Q LEVEL R MASTER OUT on EJ oF on C _ oF L INPUT 2 5 7 8 9 1 Parts and their function Basic operation Objects in the display and their function Preparations Listening to the demo song Objects in the display and e e Select TempoSource their fu nction PC TempoMap Cy TempoTrack Objects in the display To select an object shown in the display use the CURSOR keys to select it and press the ENTER key g Radio buttons f Dialog box In this manual references enclosed in double quotation marks such as button or tab refer to ob f Dialog box jects in t
301. nel A If the sound is distorted when you use the Mono setting adjust the level on the output device or us ing the TRIM knob 3b Balance scccscccccsssssees L63 CNT R63 Specifies the balance at which the sub input will be sent to the master LR bus in stereo 3c Fader scccccsssssssccccssssscccccccscees 000 100 Specifies the level at which the sub input will be sent to the master LR bus 3d 0 enn On Off E On The sub input will be muted it will not be sent to the master LR bus Off The sub input will not be muted it will be sent to the master LR bus Specify pairing for adjacent mixer channels Press the amp button and make settings p 38 86 Ch7 12 Select inputs for mixer chan nels 7 12 Here you can select the inputs for mixer channels 7 12 Refer to Ch1 6 Select inputs for mixer channels 1 6 Reference InEq1 4 Adjust the EQ for inputs 1 4 Here you can apply EQ equalization to the analog inputs from the INPUT 1 GUITAR IN INPUT 4 jacks Use this when you want to record the sound with EQ applied The EQ is a three band type with shelving type high and low bands and a peaking type mid band with adjustable center frequency l The input EQ cannot be applied to the digital input S P DIF IN or to the rhythm l The InEq1 4 tab page settings cannot be paired cots te Let O01 01 000 oe 1 InputlevelMeter cs
302. ng e You can also adjust the setting by moving the cursor to TONE and turning the VALUE dial 4 NR NoiseReduction ccccsssssseees 01 80 Adjusts the level at which noise reduction is applied e Turn the knob located below CABINET to adjust the setting e You can also adjust the setting by moving the cursor to CABINET and turning the VALUE dial INSERT EFFECT You can apply insert effects to analog input sources as you record them or to the playback of a tracks On the D1200 you can use up to eight insert effects simulta neously amp Insert effects cannot be used if Digiln has been turned On in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page InsAss Specify the insert location and type of the insert effects ed In 001 01 Tr 1e h 1 Assign vickssencezesssanscetssss In Input Trk PlayTrack Selects whether the insert effect will be applied to the analog input or to a playback track In Input Select this when you want to apply an effect to the analog input from an INPUT 1 GUITAR IN INPUT 4 jack Trk PlayTrack Select this when you want to apply an effect to a playback track 2 DEISCHEME DG sec essence cccacecesececceeseveccicsscceaeaecceas lin2outx2 2in2outx2 linloutx4 linloutx8 Selects the structure of the insert effects The available effect programs will depend on this set ting For the effects that are available w
303. nge of 50 200 IN OUT SourceTrack C SS SSS ABC TIMES a oan mona Uy DestTrack TATA ABC END 1 Exp CompTrack_ 1 T Uo tr C Tmeprt fl baport 2 SourcelTrack ceeeeeeee L1 12 1 2 11 12 Selects the expansion compression source track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 3 DestTrack cccccceceeeeee 1 12 1 2 11 12 Selects the expansion compression destination track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 4 Time cccccssssccccsssccccsssccccssscccccsssccscssce L Dees 9Y Specifies the number of times that the data will be cop ied 5 Exec Execute ccccccsccscccsccsccccscsccccscsceccseees Executes the track editing operation li i MASTER RYTM Tuner 11 co qyaounce ENA VD erect ea INSERT I Moneual couNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO METER AUTO IN OCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB Displays the waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO END more pre cisely p 108 Selects the way in which expansion compression will be processed Press the Mode button to open the following dialog box SelectExp CompMade SelectPitch 7a 7b Press the YES OK key to apply the selected processing method Your selections will be discarded if you press
304. ning of a measure 1 TempoMap e essoeesoeeseeeesoeeseeessoeesee 001 200 Indicates the tempo map number that is selected To the right of this number the display shows the start ing measure ending measure tempo time signature and rhythm pattern You can press the E button and make your selection in the dialog box that appears H01 B61 be4 126 Adrad bt Rocki H gi B9 H12 120 84 84 Sbt Rocki l TempoMap cannot be selected if TempoSource is Manual Creates a new tempo map and adds the tempo map The following Select Tempo Map Param dialog box will appear Select TempoMaph Param lt ia H 2a StartMeds ccccccccccccccsssseeee 001 999 Specifies the starting measure for the tempo map that will be created 2b EndMeas sccscssssessssssseees 001 999 Specifies the ending measure for the tempo map that will be created 2 TEMPO secceeetees enas 40 240 Specifies the tempo in a range of J 40 240 2d BOON cies seer cescessenssteccsesiesaes 01 04 16 16 Specifies the time signature 2e Rhythm ccsseceees Rhythm Pattern List Specifies the rhythm pattern If you want the rhythm to be silent during part of the song select a silent rhythm Press the E button and make your selection in the dia log box that appears The available rhythms will depend on the Beat set ting EBlank4 Cancel abt Ro
305. nnection amp You must use the included AC DC power supply EXPRESSION PEDAL EXPRESSION iA E roe 2 Foot controller FOOT SWITCH PS 1 Pedal switch CDRW 1 CD R RW Drive option GUITAR IN Ive PHONES aq 1 3 Connections when using external record ing devices Here are the connections for recording your song onto an ex ternal device DAT MD tape recorder etc e Optical digital S P DIF input jack of a DAT or MD S P DIF OUT of the D1200 use an optical digital cable for connections e AUXIN jacks of a cassette tape recorder or other ana log recording device lt gt MASTER OUT L R jacks of the D1200 1 4 Connections when using an external effect If you apply an external effect to the signal that is sent from the AUX OUT jack connect the return from the effect unit to the INPUT 1 INPUT 4 jacks You can select whether the effect will be returned to the mixer channels in the same way as for conventional in puts or sent directly to the master bus p 45 1 5 Pedal connections Using a pedal switch to perform manual punch recording or play stop operations Connect a pedal switch separately sold option PS 1 to the FOOT SWITCH jack Using a foot pedal to control an effect Connect an expression pedal separately s
306. nnels or when you want to check the send signal The solo signal will be output from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and from the PHONES jack If even one of these solo buttons is On the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO key will blink On Solo will be on Only the corresponding signal will be heard Off Solo will be off If any other signal is being soloed the corresponding signal will be muted 1 6 Mixer channel 1 6 7 8 11 12 Mixer channels 7 8 11 12 S1 S2 Send to master effects 1 and 2 A1 Send to the AUX OUT external output jack R1 R2 Return from master effects 1 and 2 l The volume of each signal is set by the corresponding page or knob When you select a different signal to be soloed the monitor volume may change significantly 2 ClearAl vcsusnsicvecssescecssvsasenxsvcanceenededesssnonsoreaeneees Turns Off all solo signals that are currently turned On by the SelectSolo buttons 3 SoloToMstOut ccccccssssssccccccccsseees On Off Specifies whether the soloed signal s will be output from the MASTER OUT L R jacks Turn this on if your monitor system is connected to the MASTER OUT L R jacks and you want to solo through those jacks MMRR On The solo signal s will be output from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks Off The solo signal s will be output from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and the PHONES jack The On setting is valid only while you are in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO t
307. nputting audio to the mixer eee 35 2 Adjusung TNE Mixer onic uiieea ns tweens 37 3 Registering and recalling a scene 39 ENGGIS coisinnte aat a aE 42 ds USDE MSE EHEC T aein 42 2 Using the nraster Chlects aiid eae n E 43 3 Usine ThefnaleNe tesnenia ran EE 43 AS Edi ng An CMCC sess vous iiae ia aA 43 5 Controlling an effect from an external device 44 p Using an external Effect oemei 45 Modeling MOde ccccecceeeeeeeceeneeeeseeeeas 45 1 Applying a modeling effect to your guitar 45 2 Applying a modeling effect to your bass 46 3 Applying a modeling effect to a MIC ee 46 4 Saving your modeling effect settings 46 5 Operation in Modeling mode cece 47 Rhythm Ssa2 s2 ls ctscrecncedestveseuiuncnoalttcaca eucaueceeiass 48 1 Selecting and playing a rhythm ee 48 2 Listening to the rhythm while you record a PECON ANCES aan a N 48 3 Recording the rhythm sesessssessesssessesssssseseserseseseess 48 4 Setting the tempo of a SONG eessesssssesersrsrseseresereren 49 The RECORDER s srenniairintannddananin ainainen ahan 93 l HRECOLGMING ipe a i 53 Pie Play Dac kanro cdussioncgetunen Sates ts ei nutenynaerenelednat se 56 J TAC OG MEIN ce odes alse yesteletatel aw bcesniraameo ts 57 Masterin cisse pana EA 64 l Bounce recording ours A 64 2 Creating anong mal CDs 65 3 Recording to a master tape ssesesssseseseeseseeserees 67 A ASUS SUDDEN UNS a a a 67 Da
308. nted correctly and press it all the way in Access the USB Mode screen In the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page select USB Mode and press the ENTER key A Do not disconnect the USB cable or turn your computer on off while this screen is displayed 3 A drive named KORG D1200 will appear on the desk top of your computer When you connect the D1200 to your computer for the first time a device driver will be installed 4 Use your computer to back up the data When you open the KORG D1200 drive that appeared in step you will see the contents of the USB drive area within the D1200 s internal hard disk Copy the desired data onto your computer You may also copy data from your computer back to the D1200 s USB drive Drag the added drive into the trash When you want to disconnect the D1200 either drag the drive from the desktop into the trash or select the Spe cial menu command Eject Select the Exit button of the USB Mode screen press ENTER to exit USB mode and then unplug the USB cable from the D1200 Operation 3 Using MIDI What is MIDI MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and is a world wide standard by which performance data can be exchanged between electronic musical instruments and computers 1 MIDI connections Use special MIDI cables to transfer MIDI data Connect these cables between the MIDI connectors of the D1200 and t
309. ntroduction 20 19 pan ROR G Pee E 23D 1200 7 CO CO CO OC OC OC COO CO OD Jee PAN BALANCE waley RR BALANCE vl y ey y oN 2 K SR Sp Spt Spt SR K sk 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 MASTER os Ss E r 1 m N oe m pA s 8 S oa 8 18 17 16 10 INPUT 1 INPUT 2 jacks Use these jacks to input mic line signals such as from a keyboard You can use either XLR jacks or TRS phone jacks and both sets of jacks are balanced Unbalanced phone plugs can also be connected The XLR jacks can supply 48 V phantom power to con denser mics If you connect a plug to the phone jack no signal can be note 3 input from the corresponding XLR jack If you want to use the XLR jack disconnect any plug from the corre sponding phone jack If you connect a plug to the GUITAR IN jack no signal can be input from the INPUT 1 jack If you want to in put a signal from the INPUT 1 jack disconnect any plug from the GUITAR IN jack These TRS phone jacks do not individually allow stereo input INPUT 3 INPUT 4 jacks Use these jacks to input mic line signals such as from a keyboard These are balanced TRS phone jacks Unbalanced phone plugs can
310. o hear the playback of the recording track TRACK STA TUS REC outside the IN OUT region you may have set the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page AutoIn parameter to On p 54 100 If you have selected Cue the cue level of each channel may have been lowered In the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page press Level button then raise the cue levels gt p 38 100 Can t hear the input sound L a dete After connecting your audio source to an input jack did you assign it to a mixer channel In the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page assign the source to a mixer channel p 35 Make sure that audio is being input In the METER TRACK VIEW page set Select Dis playMode to PreFaderLev and watch the meters to verify that audio is being input to each mixer channel If the meters do not move audio is not being input to the channels Are the monitor settings appropriate In the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page select the signal that you want to monitor normally turn MasterLR On E 5 fel If you have turned Rhythm or Cue On raise their volume levels p 38 100 Is TRACK STATUS set to REC or INPUT p 8 Is the TRIM knob raised to an appropriate level If the input sound cannot be heard when you play back a track whose TRACK STATUS is REC did you turn the INPUT OUTPUT SO
311. o select CD L In the same way select the Ch2 icon and select CD R Specify the recording tracks Press the TRACK STATUS keys of tracks 1 and 2 to select REC Check the recording mode Access the BOUNCE RecMode tab page Set Selec tRecMode to Input Press the REC key to enter record ready mode Play back the audio CD Access the CD CDR RW tab page Use the cursor to select the CD R RW transport key and press the ENTER key Press the PLAY key to begin recording When you are finished recording press the STOP key Stop the audio CD Access the CD CDR RW tab page Move the cursor to the CD R RW transport key and press the ENTER key Play back the song and verify that it was recorded cor rectly l The beginning of recording on the D1200 is not synchro nized with the beginning of playback of the CD in the CDRW 1 This means that the above method cannot be used to record the very beginning of the audio CD If you want to record from the beginning of a song make Trigger settings before step 4 of this procedure p 54 151 Block diagram Index Rhythm Pattern List Effect Program List D1200 specifications About the CDRW 1 Messages Troubleshooting MIDI implementation chart D1200 specifications 5 35 C do not allow condensation Operating temperature E Specifications lt Recorder section gt Number of tracks
312. o adjust the contrast A combination of CURSOR keys is used to adjust the contrast UP LEFT Hold the CURSOR UP key and press the LEFT key to make the characters lighter UP RIGHT Hold the CURSOR UP key and press the RIGHT key to make the characters darker Listening to the demo song When the D1200 is shipped from the factory it contains sev eral demo songs Here s how to listen to these demo songs Set the D1200 s CHANNEL faders to the 0 mark and the MASTER fader to co Connect your headphones 2 Turn on the power 3 Select the song that you want to play 4 Set the TRACK STATUS keys of all tracks so that the LEDs are lit green If it is lit a different color or is dark press the key to make it light green PLAY 6 Press the PLAY to begin playback REW STOP PLAY 6 Slowly raise the MASTER fader to adjust the volume level While the song plays adjust the CHANNEL faders PAN knobs and EQ and change the program for the insert effect and master to hear the result D When the demo song ends press the STOP key to stop playback Demo song list The Game Written and performed by Insex In Amber Ted Burger Guitars Bass Jack Bielata Vocals Steve Michael Drums 2000 Ted Burger Jack Bielata All Rights Reserved www insexinamber com Play The Blues Written and performed by Nom
313. ock while this HDD CD access indicator is lit 21 Display This shows various information such as the volume level meters during recording or playback the time locate and parameter settings p 13 You can adjust the angle of the display for best visibility 9 9 MODELING RECORDING he A aut SYSTEM USB TRACK SONG r 5 23M 29 305 315 32 3 4 CURSOR rIN OUT PLAY Lz OUT TO END EQ Loc 2 MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND Wn 3755 385 24 FINAL EFFECT AUTO MASTERING aus 39 40 a BOUNCE TRIGGER SCRUB 414 4 42 METER TRACK VIEW UNDO 43 44_ a TAB m ENTER 22 MODELING key MODELING knobs This key lets you use effects for guitar bass and mic as easily as if you were actually using dedicated hardware devices The effects are controlled by the three knobs located below the display Since there is no need to make complicated preparations for recording you can easily apply an effect and record p 45 84 23 INSERT EFFECT key This key selects the location at which an insert effect is inserted selects the effect type and select and edits effect programs p 42 85 These settings can be registered in a scene 24 EQ key Use this key to adjust the EQ for track playback of each channel p 37 88 These settings can be paired and registered in
314. of the Digital Recording Studio series This section discusses data compatibility between the Digital Recording Studio series models D12 D16 version 2 0 or lat er D1600 and D1200 Be aware of the following points regarding effect user data The algorithms of the D1200 differ from the algorithms of the D12 16 1600 48 PA1 Pre Amp Simulator 49 EB1 Bass Multi 1 52 MS1 Mic Multi If effect user data using these algorithms is restored to the D12 16 1600 it will not produce the same sound Similarly effect user data created on the D12 16 1600 using these three algorithms will not sound the same if it is restored to the D1200 If an insert effect preset is used in a scene the settings will be different when that scene is played back You will need to edit the insert effect settings Using D12 data on the D1200 A CD R RW disc containing D12 data can be used in the same way as D1200 data Using D1200 data on the D12 A CD R RW disc containing D1200 data can be used in the same way as D12 data Using D16 or D1600 data on the D1200 A CD R RW disc containing D16 or D1600 data can be used in the same way as D1200 data However in the case of song data or effect user data the drive list will indicate D16 B and the data for tracks 13 16 cannot be restored Using D1200 data on the D16 or D1600 A CD R RW disc containing D1200 data can be used in the same way as D16 or D1600 data However in the case of song data
315. of the screen parameter name can be controlled by an external device such as an expression pedal gt p 101 Device Insert 2in2outx2 Master Final Effect These algorithms can be selected for an insert effect if 2in2outx2 is selected for SelectEff Type They can also be selected for a master effect or a final effect amp When these effects are used as an insert effect or final effect they are stereo in stereo out However when these effects are used as a master effect they are mono in stereo out Reverb RV1 RV7 Category Reverb type effects 1 RV1 Reverb Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of mid size concert halls or ensemble halls 2 RV2 Smooth Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of larger halls and stadiums and creates a smooth release 3 RV3 Reverb Wet Plate This plate reverb simulates warm dense reverberation 4 RV4 Reverb Dry Plate This plate reverb simulates dry light reverberation 5 RV5 Reverb Room This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make the sound tighter Changing the balance between the early reflections and reverb sound allows you to simulate nuances such as the type of walls of a room 6 RV6 Bright Room This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make the sound brighter Time Reverb Time sec 0 1 3 0s HiDamp High Damp ssssse 0 100
316. old option EXP 2 XVP 10 to the EXPRESSION PEDAL jack A volume pedal will not function correctly even if con nected 1 6 MIDI connections Controlling effects or switching scenes from an external MIDI device e MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device MIDI IN connector of the D1200 p 79 Synchronizing the D1200 with a MIDI sequencer etc e MIDIIN connector of your sequencer gt MIDI OUT connector of the D1200 use a MIDI cable for connec tions e MIDI OUT connector of your sequencer lt MIDI IN connector of the D1200 p 79 1 7 USB connections Save or backup data on your pc e Your PC s USB connector gt the D1200 s USB con nector use a USB cable for connections p 77 Introduction 2 Turning the power on off 2 1 Connecting the power supply 4 Connect the included AC DC power Connect the included power cable to the AC DC power supply 2 Plug the power cable from the AC DC power supply into an AC outlet 2 2 Turning the power on Follow this procedure to turn on the power of the D1200 and each connected device Before you turn on the power be sure to set the volume of each device to the minimum position and turn on the power switches starting with the upstream devices that output the audio signal A Lower the D1200 s MASTER fader to o Lower the volume on external devices to the minimum position 2 Turn on the power of external input device
317. ombining twelve tracks of audio and overwrite recording them on two tracks However in step 8 select b for Record VirtualTrack so that the mix is recorded onto virtual track b Retk 8 001 01 000 B BounceMade Record irtuallrack Pb To hear the bounce recorded result select virtual track b and play back Access the TRACK Vtr1 6 tab page and for tracks 1 and 2 set SelectVirtualTrack to 1b and 2b Operation Combining ten tracks of audio and two external audio sources and recording them on the two remaining tracks Here s how to combine the audio of tracks 1 10 with external audio input sources from INPUT 1 and 2 and record the mix on tracks 11 and 12 Specify the input channels e Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch7 12 tab page e Assign INPUT 1 to Ch11 and INPUT 2 to Ch12 setsubin E 001 01 000 oal Chr 8 cha 18 Chi1 12 Tae her Select bounce recording as the recording mode e Access the BOUNCE RecMode tab page e Select Bounce Select the bounce mode e Access the BOUNCE Bounce tab page e Set BounceMode to 10Tr 2In 2Tr Retk 001 01 000 B BounceMade Record yirtuallrack Specify that the currently selected tracks will be used for recording Set Record VirtualTrack to Current Select the tracks that will be played and recorded Press the TR
318. onger it will correspondingly take longer for processing to be fin ished and for the Completed indication to appear Normalize the level NormalizeTrack In cases where the recorded level is low this command can boost the specified region IN OUT of recorded track data to the maximum volume that will not cause clipping e This command searches for the peak value of the audio data within the IN OUT region and boosts the overall level of all the audio data in the IN OUT region so that the peak value reaches the maximum level e You can normalize the data of one or more adjacent tracks simultaneously If you normalize data that was recorded at an extremely low level any noise included in that region will also be boosted Normalizing the level Here s how to normalize the IN OUT region of track 1 execute 007 01 000 B H MormalizeTrack Exec Arie n eaittrk Tmport Export DestTrack 1 Register the IN and OUT locations Register the locations at which you want normalization to start and end p 33 118 2 Select NormalizeTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose NormalizeTrack Select the number of the track that will be normalized Set DestTrack to track 1 4 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the oper
319. only from the right channel or controlling each channel individually Ratio Ratio cccecee 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Thrshl Threshold CB 000 40 0dB Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Attack Attack ccscssesssssesesseees 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release ssssseeseneen 1 100 Sets the release time GLevel Gain Adjust OB 0cce Inf Sets the output gain 38 24dB SPEQ Side PEQ Insert Off On Toggles between on off of the trigger sig nal s EQ Triggr Trigger Monitor n se Off On Switches between effect output monitor and trigger signal monitor Mix Wet Dry cce Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Fc Side PEQ Cutoff Hz 20 12 0kHz Sets the EQ center frequency for the trig ger signal Q ere te ere meaner 0 5 10 0 Sets the EQ bandwidth for the trigger signal Gain Gain dB eee 18 0 18 0 Sets the EQ gain for the trigger signal Envelope Select When L R Mix is selected for this parameter the left and right channels are linked to control the Limiter using the mixed signal If L Only or R Only is selected the left and right channels are linked and the Limiter is controlled via only the left or right chan nel Effect Parameter List With indivi the left and right channels control the Limiter indi
320. or effect user data the drive list will indicate D12 B A In order to use D1200 data on the D16 you must update the D16 system to version 2 or later Operation Drive The hard disk of the D1200 is divided into a song drive that is used for recording and playing songs and a USB drive that is used to exchange data with a computer Of the total capacity of the hard disk the size of the USB drive is fixed at 2 GB and the remainder is the capacity of the song drive D1200 Song Drive Se USB Drive Perform the procedures described below if you want to erase data from a drive or CD RW or if an error display appears 1 Checking the hard disk This operation checks the song drive of the hard disk for er rors and repairs errors that are found Execute this opera tion if the DiskError error message appears frequently If no major errors are detected on the drive you can continue to use the song data cet 001 01 000 _ 2 Formatting the harddisk Perform this procedure if you want to erase data from the en tire song drive or USB drive or if the Disk Error display ap pears frequently or if checking the hard disk does not improve the situation You can format the
321. ording as a mastering opera tion l If you turn Rhythm On while using bounce record ing the rhythm will also be recorded p 48 2 RecordVirtualTrack 0000 Current a h Selects the virtual track on which recording will occur This setting specifies which virtual track of the record ing tracks selected by the TRACK STATUS key will be used for bounce recording Current The currently selected virtual track will be used for recording a h The specified virtual track will be used for record ing By using a virtual track a h other that Cur rent you can bounce record to two virtual tracks without erasing any of the tracks 1 12 However if the virtual track you select here is the same as the virtual track that has already been selected in TRACK Vtr1 6 or Vtr7 12 the result will be the same as if you had selected Current A To avoid accidentally recording over a track that has al ready been recorded you should use the TRACK Vtr1i 6 and Vtr7 12 tab pages to check on the virtu al tracks that are currently selected and to see which vir tual tracks already contain data Reference If you install the separately sold CDRW 1 option in the D1200 you will be able to create audio CDs p 65 The audio data from the first to the last of the two specified tracks of the currently selected song will be written to a CD R RW Here you ca
322. ounce ENA VD erect ea INSERT I Moneual COUNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO _i METER AUTO IN LOCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK i Sync Synchronization settings oo You can synchronize the D1200 with an external MIDI se quencer to make D1200 audio tracks play along with an ex ternal MIDI sound module Synchronization means that the D1200 and the external MIDI device will use the same clock signal to play back at the identical timing The device that outputs the synchronization clock is called the master and the device that receives this clock is called the slave The D1200 can function either as the master or slave mresiaveon E 001 01 000 1 Select MIDISync Mode csssscesssscssssscessscees MTC Mstr MTC Slave ClockMstr Off Selects the synchronization signal that will be transmit ted and received from the MIDI IN OUT connectors MTC Mstr The D1200 will function as an MTC30NDF MIDI Time Code 30 non drop frame master device MTC Slave The D1200 will function as an MTC30NDF MIDI Time Code 30 non drop frame slave device ClockMstr The D1200 will transmit MIDI Clock Off The D1200 will not transmit or receive synchroniza tion signals 2 MTC RecvErrorLevel cccccccccccssssees 0 9 Specifies the level of tolerance with which the incoming MTC data will be checked when Select
323. ounds Band1 Type Band4 Type Selects a filter type for Band 1 and 4 Special Effect SE1 SE4 Category Special Effect 28 SE1 St Ring Modulator Stereo Ring Modulator This effect creates a metallic sound by applying the oscillators to the input signal LPFLVvI Pre LPF esvesscssssvveviaveeuavieussues 0 100 Sets the damping amount of the high range input to the ring modulator Fc Fixed Frequency HZ 0 12 0kHz Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Sets the LFO speed of the oscillator fre quency modulation Depth LFO Depth cssesssesereees 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation for the oscillator frequency Mix Wet Dry s s s asnan Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Pre LPF This parameter enables you to set the damping amount of the high range sound input to the ring modulator If the input sound contains lots of harmonics the effect may sound dirty In this case cut a cer tain amount of high range Fixed Frequency Hz This parameter sets the oscillator frequency 29 SE2 Doppler This effect simulates the Doppler effect of a moving sound with a changing pitch similar to the siren of an passing ambu lance Mixing the effect sound with the dry sound will create a unique chorus effect Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Sets the LFO speed Pitch Pitch
324. outputs three Tap signals to the left right and center respectively You can also adjust the left and right spread of the delay sound LTime L Delay Time msec 0 1860ms LLevel LOVGN ccscsusuinsutiessstivecstnatseateis 0 50 CTime C Delay Time msec 0 1360ms CLevel Level cccsesssesesseseeeseen 0 50 RTime R Delay Time msec 0 1860ms RLevel Level csssssscssssesssssessseees 0 50 Sets the delay time of TapL Sets the output level of TapL Sets the delay time of TapC Sets the output level of TapC Sets the delay time of TapR Sets the output level of TapR 127 Z X m fe N NX e p lt b 7 Effect Control Insert 1in1 outx8 Insert 1in outx4 Insert 1in2outx2 Insert 2in2o0utx2 Modeling effects Master Final Effect Final Fdback Feedback C Delay 100 100 Sets the feedback amountof TapC HiDamp High Damp sseseseee 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp sscesee 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range Spread Spread 0 50 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Mix Wet Dry cceee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds High Damp Low Damp These parameters set the damping amount of high range and low range The tone of the delayed sound becomes darker and lighter as it feeds back
325. p Simulator 1 NR AmpSim CabRes Cho FI S Dly 46 AS2 Amp Simulator2 NR AmpSim CabRes Treml Delay 47 AS3 Amp Simulator3 NR AmpSim CabRes Phaser Delay Effect Parameter List PAI Category Pre amp simulator 48 PA1 Pre Amp Simulator Drive NR2 Tone Cabinet EB EB3 Category Bass multi 49 EB1 Bass Multi 1 CompT Exctr PAEQ Cho FI S DLY 50 EB2 Bass Multi2 Dist NR Filter Delay 51 EB3 Bass Multi3 Comp P4EQ Gate MS1 Category Mic multi 52 MS1 Mic Multi CabRes MicSim Comp VOI VO2 Category Vocal multi 53 VO1 Vocal Multi 1 Comp Exctr Pitch S Dly 54 VO2 Vocal Multi2 NR DeEss PAEQ Cho Fl S Dly Effects within multi effect programs GT1 VO2 and their parameters Here are explanations of the parameters of each effect in the multi effect chains listed above Dist Distortion This effect distorts the input sound Type DriveType Tube Crunch Scream HotBox Higain Valve Crush Scoop Fuzz Selects the drive type Drive Drive stsicheessisccetatenetutemsedemeteaneie 1 100 Sets the degree of distortion Treble Treble 15 0 15 0 Sets the high frequency tone Level Level scacsceissssersetiesscercacetnicsneats 0 100 Sets the output level Drive This effect models a compact effect unit or amp head Type DEVS TYPE sccicsecccecdoscetsorisnsnexenstenannnes 1 Drive type Drive DriveGaiin ccccesssesessseses
326. pdated automatically in the order of the registered time Dx E E EEEE Edits the name of the mark Select the mark whose name you want to edit select the Rename button press the ENTER key to open the dialog box and edit the name You can input a name of up to sixteen characters p 31 3 Delete ccceccaceeearaccrandiaccedsacavocedeceneteadvelecriucsceuasvess Deletes a mark amp Undo is not available when you delete a mark DeleteMark 68 1 SelectAll Ce e AreYouSure 3a SelectAlll cccccccssccsssssssssssscees On Off Selects all marks for deletion On All marks will be deleted The mark SelectHll number will be indicated as Off The mark selected by MarkNumber will be deleted Press the YES OK key to delete the specified mark s A Recall sexes cs sncaceocsccaccecuexcdesessvevevevev int Se Recalls the mark selected by MarkNumber and moves the current time to that location li i INSERT I EQ EFFECT ODELING COUNTER MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND FINAL RHYTHM TUNER CD BOUNCE EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO _ mo wm D gt wm SZ ra Z e wm O ps UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE E SCENE Mixer settings can be registered as a Scene in a specific loca tion and recalled automatically as playback progresses You can also register frequently used settings as a scene and re call
327. ption via MIDI The 16 channel 4 bus mixer section of the D1200 pro vides three band EQ on each analog input and mixer channel High and low EQ are shelving types and the mid EQ is an adjustable peaking type with a sweepable center frequency Since separate EQ is provided for the inputs and for the mixer you won t need to worry about recording EQ settings being re applied to the playback a problem that often occurs on MTR units containing analog mixers The faders EQ pan and effect settings of the mixer can be stored in one of 100 scenes Scenes can be recalled automatically as playback time passes or can be recalled immediately at any time as general purpose settings MIDI can be used to transmit and receive mixer data such as fader and pan allowing you to use an external sequencer to perform mixer automation The internal effects use Korg s HEMS modeling tech nology to deliver detailed and powerful modeling sounds Modeling mode lets you use easily under standable icon displays and three modeling effect knobs to select modeling effects for guitar or bass edit the parameters and modify values just by using icons and knobs As modeling effects the D1200 provides ten distortion type effects for guitar a vacuum tube simulator and eleven types of cabinet from famous amps from around the world For bass choose from three dynamics type effects and five types of modulation spatial effects such as chorus
328. puts for mixer chan nels 1 Here you can select the inputs for mixer channels 1 6 For details on connecting each input jack refer to p 14 s seor 5 001 01 OOO _ i Chr Chd 18 iChii l2 Digit 2 Input1 4 S PDIF L R RhythmL R CD L R Select a Ch1 Ch6 channel icon and select the source that will be input to each channel INPUT1 4 Input the analog audio signal from an instrument etc connected to the INPUT 1 GUITAR IN INPUT 4 jacks S P DIF L R Input the digital audio signal from a CD or DAT etc connected to the S P DIF IN jack This can be selected if Digiln is On l Insert effects cannot be used when using digital in put RhythmL R Input the rhythm selected by SelRhythm p 96 The rhythm will sound during recording and playback regardless of the Rhythm set ting gt p 96 This rhythm can be recorded p 48 CD L R Input the audio signal from an audio CD inserted in the CDRW 1 CD L R can be selected only if the CDRW 1 is installed Turn this On when you want to use digital input S P DIF IN On You will be able to select S P DIF L or S P DIF R for Ch1 6 amp Insert effects cannot be used if this is On Off You will not be able to select S P DIF L or S P DIF R for Ch1 6 Digital Thue ey Copyright Rules Are You Sure CUE Turn this On if you want to
329. r deletion l Turning the Protect setting on will disable all erasure or writing operations such as recording track editing or registering scenes If the Protect setting is on the settings of the song will also be protected You will be able to adjust the faders or EQ but will not be able to store your changes execute 0071 01 000 B 1 Protect3ong DermoSongae 1 HHI elshaEditsongfPraPlay 2 4 2 DESISONG semirsa 001 100 Indicates the number and name of the song that will be protected If you want to change this select a different song in the SONG SelSong tab page 3 Exec Execute eseoo0esesossosossecsssscssssesssssossse Executes the protect operation Each time you execute the protect setting will be switched on off 4 Protect On Off Mark ccccccseeees On Off If protect is On the lock symbol fy will be dis played If protect is Off the lock symbol will not be displayed Press the Exec button to switch this on off li i MASTER RYTM Tuner 11 co aounce ENA VD erect ea INSERT I Moneual COUNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO METER AUTO IN LOCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB PrgPlay Program playback of songs IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO By arranging songs in the program play list you can auto LOC3 E N D LOC4 matically play them in an
330. r the effect name This will be dis played only for the insert effect assigned to the Ass parameter of the SYSTEM USB Control tab page The effects that you can select will depend on the Se lectEffType setting in the INSERT EFFECT InsAss tab page For details on the effects for each structure re fer to Effect Program List p 154 3 EdilEHecT isisi EffectProgramName When you press this button the Effect Algorithm dia log box will appear showing the structure of the pro gram and allowing you to turn each effect on off An insert effect can consist of up to five effects ox E 001 01 000 cor ey 30 EMEC LOGI cceccesrscstatdesseseceeeeseeeea Selects the effect that you want to edit When you press an EffectIcon button the Effect Edit dialog box will appear Speed 4 14Hz EQTrim 9 Mode Normal LFO Fdback 8 HEQG 66 DOTime 1 amp 8ms Depth 11 LEQiG A For details on each parameter refer to Effect Parameter List p 127 3aa Effect On Off sccssssccccceeee On Off The On Off setting in the display is linked with Effect On Off 3b Bs INCI Macs secs ceca n A Displays the next page DOC PROV cesses chesessscessseeseecetasssssacesesecetesesdeseusnsees Displays the previous page 3b Effect On Off c ccssssssccccceees On Off Switches each effect on off Wied On Turns the
331. r to create complex spatial type effects that could not be achieved by a single effect Press the MASTER EFFECT AUX SEND key to access the MAS TER EFFECT AUX SEND MstEff1 tab page EffectNumber E 001 01 000 MAAS RetLew Cj RetBal iy MstEtt 1 IMste tte ge trond 1 pettond aose ee Select an effect program Effect Program List gt p 154 Select EffectNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select an effect program 3 Set the return level and return balance of the signal that is sent from the master effect to master LR For this example set RetLev return level to 100 and RetBal return balance to CNT center 4 Adjust the send levels The send levels from each channel to master effect 1 can be adjusted in the EffSnd1 tab page ETE Oot 01 000 om EEA me a a Select each Send icon knob and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the send levels In this example we will apply master effect 1 to tracks 1 2 and 9 10 Press the PLAY key to start playback While the song plays listen to the master LR output and hear the effects that are applied Adjust the return level and the send levels so that the master effect level meters do not indicate CLP Erfecttumte E100 1 0 1 000 01 O00 ma RetLev A5 RetBal a Mstetti fMstette Re tfend1 AET Sna prussende To apply master effect 2 make similar adjustments in the MstEff2 and EffSnd2
332. re of the song If the time signature of the song data created on your MIDI sequencer changes during the song create a new tempo map that begins where the time signature changes p 49 l If you want the time signature to change during the song you must create tempo maps accordingly Tempo settings will play back in synchronization but measures will become incorrectly aligned if the time signature changes do not match 2 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of your MIDI sequencer to the D1200 s MIDI IN connector 3 Set your MIDI sequencer so that it will transmit MIDI Clock messages Refer to the owner s manual of your MIDI sequencer 4 Select how tempo will be recorded In the RHYTHM TmpTrk tab page select MIDI Clock 51 Upgrading MIDI USB Drive Data paia be eal Rhythm a Effects Mixer r and w the system 52 recmipicick E 000 00 000 Berne e Type RecStart 5 Record the MIDI Clock data e Press the RecStart button and press the ENTER key to put the D1200 in record ready mode Reo ting For ate Ww MIDI Clock aiting For ol Start Sequencer cotart e Start your MIDI sequencer e When the MIDI Clock data from the MIDI sequencer begins arriving the display will indicate Receiving MIDIClock When the MIDI sequencer has finished playing stop the MIDI sequencer When recording is completed on the D1200 the display will indicate Complete
333. region time is specified by the times that are registered in the IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 and END LOC4 keys p 33 118 IN time the time location registered in the IN LOC1 key OUT time the time location registered in the OUT LOC2 key TO time the time location registered in the TO LOC3 key END time the time location registered in the END LOC4 key You can either register these times to the appropriate keys beforehand or set them using the Wave button of the TRACK EditTrk tab page After executing one of these operations you can use Undo to return to the previous state if you are not satis fied with the result 1 EditType CopyTrack InsertTrack Erase Track DeleteTrack SwapTrack ReverseTrack Optimize Track Exp CompTrack CopyWholeTrack Swap WholeTrack FadeTrack NormalizeTrack Use the dial to select an editing operation Press the i button and choose from the list in the dia log box Select EditTrack Type Copy Insert Delete Exp Comp i Hormalize Erase Swap i Reperse Optimize ICpywhole O Swpwhole Fade Each track editing operation is explained separately below Editlype CopyTrack The audio data in the IN OUT region of the copy source track will be copied to the TO location of the copy destina tion track for the specified number of times You can use the clipboard to copy data to a track of a differ ent song amp When yo
334. rently not at the begining of the song hold down the STOP key and press the REW key to move to the beginning of the song Moving to the end of the song If you are currently not at the end of the song hold down the STOP key and press the FF key to move to the end of the song Operation Using the Locate keys You can register a specific location in one of the Locate keys and then jump instantly to that location You can register four locate points in each song using the IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 and END LOC4 keys In addition to recalling the registered locate points these keys are also used to specify the auto punch re cording times IN OUT and the region for track edit ing For details on the Locate functions refer to p 118 Registering a location to one of the Locate keys 1 Use the counter Counter or the FF REW keys to move to the location you want to register 2 Press the STORE key to memorize the location you selected CE MM A apam a A ABE 2 ae E L selsongl 3 Press either the IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 or END LOC4 key to register the memorized location to that key The registration is completed as soon as you press the key Meam co Fate ie 5 ImeHA 7 41 Bee toredTime E StoredToIN LOC Even while the song is playing or recording you can memorize the location by pressing the STORE key and register it to one of the Locate keys
335. res sor is applied Attack Attack vsiiaveasonisovssvanvesvenlevvestls 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse REICaSe csssccsssscsseseeeees 1 100 Sets the release time LoOfst Low Offset dB 40 0dB Sets the low range gain of trigger signal MdOfst Mid Offset dB 40 0dB Sets the mid range gain of trigger signal HiOfst High Offset dB 40 0dB Sets the high range gain of trigger signal GLevel Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB Sets the output gain Mix Wet Dry 00 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Low Offset dB Mid Offset dB High Offset dB These parameters set the gain of the trigger signal For example if you do not want to apply compression to the high range reduce the High Offset value down below the Threshold level In this way the high range limiter will not respond and com pression will not be applied 24 DYA St Gate Stereo Gate This effect mutes the input signal if its level is lower than the specified level It also reverses the on and off operation of the gate and uses Note On and Off messages to turn the gate on and off Envelp Envelope Select L RMix L Only R Only Selects from Control via the modulation source mixing the left and right signals Only left and Only right Polrty Polarity sis ows avsekesviesuesn csveswianesus Switches between non r
336. riteToLD TrackatOnce d Obey Copyright Rules Speed ox arene key 10 re the p writing process However 7 Ho Yes ate toune za this will produce an incom 2 plete disc Carefully read the section COPYRIGHT WARNING gt p 1 in the owner s manual and press the YES OK key if you accept the terms Writing to disc will begin When writing is finished the display will indicate Completed Press the NO CANCEL key WriteSongToCD R RWw Completed u If you want to create another Write another CD Lees CD with the identical con tents press the YES OK key If you want to write another song select a song then use steps 0 9 to write additional songs Finalize the disc No further songs can be writ If you want to be able to play back the disc select the Final button ten to a disc that has been and press the ENTER key to finalize the disc finalized Finalize the disc only after you have written all the songs you intend to write CO Monitor 00 00 to that disc Freeiliise Usedi6siid A Write Tot A message will ask you to confirm the operation If you are sure that you want to finalize the disc press the YES OK key Finalize oF urther writing Tobi t ise oe Are vouSure When finalization is completed the Completed message will appear and the CDRW 1 tray will open Press the YES OK key a ie leted Ee Play back the disc on an audio CD player to veri
337. ritten or deleted If this Protect setting is turned on it will not be possible to write any parameters of that song for example an error will be displayed if you attempt to record and recording will stop e When you have completed a song you can use this to prevent it from being accidentally rewritten or deleted To protect a song ewe IS 001 01 000 BE Dema nl 0 Select the song that you want to protect gt p 31 In the SONG EditSong tab page move the cursor to EditType and turn the VALUE dial to select Protect Song 3 Make sure that DestSong indicates the song you want to protect 4 Switch the Protect setting on off Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key A symbol will be displayed to indicate the song is protected The on off setting will alternate each time you select the Exec button and press the ENTER key 1 Inputting audio to the mixer The D1200 has four channels of analog input and one two channel digital input Audio from devices connected to these input jacks can be assigned to the mixer channels mon itored and recorded If the CDRW 1 CD R RW drive option sold separately is installed you can also assign the audio from an audio CD to the mixer channels This section explains how to assign the various inputs to the mixer channels 1 1 Analog input Create a new song before you proceed with the following st
338. rom a live recording When you want to make an audio CD from material that was recorded as a single song such as a live recording or a long song you can write it to the CD using Disc At Once Marks registered within the song can be used to indicate the divisions between CD tracks allowing you to create a live CD with no gaps between tracks Also an audio CD created using Disc At Once can be used as a master CD for pressing A When you use DiscAtOnce to write a disc it will be fi nalized automatically No additional data can be writ ten to that disc 1 Make preparations as described in steps of Writ ing a song to an CD 2 Register a mark in each location at which you want to divide the CD into tracks gt p 33 Operation Access the CD Prepare tab page PreparesForwriteTot0 OOO 49 081 e Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page CT 001 01 000 oal e Turn the DiscAtOnce button on e Set SelIrks to the two tracks that you want to mas ter e Turn TrackMonitor on and press the PLAY key to hear the sound of the tracks you selected in SelTrks Watch the meters to see whether the level is too low or too high clipping 4 Insert a disc into the CDRW 1 You must use a blank disc Access the CD CDR RW tab page Make sure that CD R RW Information indicates BlankDisc Write the data e Selec
339. rrererecr aterm errr 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level Excitl Exciter Blend Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Empha Emphatic Point 000 0 140 Sets the frequency range to be empha sized Excit2 Exciter2 This adds Pre LEO and Pre HEQ to Exciter 1 Blend Exciter Blend 0 00 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Empha Emphatic Point 000 0 140 Sets the frequency range to be empha sized Trim EQ Trim sicionscisdcaerecnasessintasieee 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15dB Sets the gain of High EQ Wah Wah Auto Wah FcBtm Frequency Bottom 000 0 100 Sets the lower limit of the wah center fre quency FcoTop Frequency TOp ccscseeeee 0 100 Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Mode Sweep Mode Auto Pedal LFO Selects the control from auto wah mod ulation source and LFO Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Sets the LFO speed Reso RESONANCE sscseescesceeeeees 0 100 Sets the resonance amount LPF LPF ienna Off On Switches the wah low pass filter on and off Mode Select Pedal if you wish to use an expression pedal to control the wah Comp1 Compressor1 Sense Sensitivity 0110111 11111112 1 100 Sets the sen
340. rs and post fader level meters You can also use the track view display to check whether each track contains audio events From the top each level meter segment indicates CLIP 3 6 9 12 18 24 33 42 52 and 66 dB EY PeeFar Feio E 208 02 pea Sr er 9181112 4 1 Select DisplayMode ssccssssssssssscsssesesseees PreFaderLev PostFaderLev IrkView1 6 TrkView7 12 TrkView 1 12 Selects the signals that you want to view Press the button to open the dialog box and make a selection Press the YES OK key to activate your selec tion or press the NO CANCEL key to cancel Select DisplayMode PreFaderLey PostFaderLey E OTrkview1 6 G OT rkView 12 CT rkViewl 12 PreFaderLev Display the pre fader levels of the mixer channels PostFaderLev Display the post fader levels of the mixer channels TrkView1 6 Display tracks 1 6 Areas where audio events exist are shown by a heavy line The current location will always be in the center of the display BE 5 ecd 1 2L RLR la ScaleChangeSW 0 0 5 10 20 40 Changes the size of the region that is displayed in the track view screen Each time you press this button the scale will step through the magnification settings in the range of 5 sec 40 sec The button will be displayed as 4 when expanding the displayed region and as m when shrinking the displayed region 5sec Disp
341. rt Inserts a space moving subsequent charac ters backward Space Selects a space blank Backsp Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location Delete Deletes the character at the cursor location ClearAll Erases the entire name 4 Finalize the changes If you are satisfied with the name you have made press the YES OK key If you decide not to change the name press the NO CANCEL key 1 3 Selecting different songs There are three ways to select an existing song To select a song from the preceding or following song location e Hold down the STOP key and tap the FF key to move to the end of the current song Tap the key once again to move to the beginning of the next song e Hold down the STOP key and tap the REW key to move to the begining of the current song Tap the key once again to move to the beginning of the previous song If you are already at the beginning of the cur rent song e g 001 01 000 holding down the STOP key and tapping the REW key once will locate the begining of the previous song MIDI USB Drive Data paia be Rhythm i a Effects Mixer 31 i o Le _ O i oS ao So gt Upgrading the system To select a song in a non adjacent location 1 Press the SONG key to access the SelSong tab page songumber 001 01 000 Te Demo Song 1 H Tempo Manu 120 a4a Metrod 2 Move the cursor
342. rting two tracks stereo file 01 When exporting four tracks or more a number of 01 12 will be assigned automatically Each file will be monaural Lets you input the date and time of the exported WAV file Press the Date button to access the dialog box and specify the date and time of the WAV file Move the Reference cursor to the date or time field you want to edit and turn the VALUE dial to set the date and time File Date zhgz rairai E Ae Ge BB Cancel Press the YES OK key to apply the specified date and time or press the NO CANCEL key to discard the changes you made The D1200 does not support the time differential with Greenwich Mean Time GMT setting Depending on your computer or operating system the creation date and time of the WAV file may not be displayed correct ly 3 OPNO ee ceesinsecececeseeceneeuicsasececsesessceteneas sess sesanass Specifies how the WAV file will be exported to CD R RW oiean os ann Met CAd Wd Speed E enl Corer E Epir AET ek A Import A Esport 5a CD WritingSpeed 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x If exporting to CD R RW you can specify the writing speed p 94 Only the writing speeds supported by the drive and media you are using will be displayed 5b Finallize cccsccccccsssssssssccccceees On Off You may export additional WAV files to a CD R RW that already contains data but if this is the last addition you w
343. s tination song Move the cursor to Destination and use the VALUE dial to select the restore destination song number Restore the data Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key The display will ask AreYouSure Select the Yes button and press the ENTER key to execute the opera tion If you are restoring a backup that extended across more than one disc you will be asked to insert the next disc when one disc has been read Insert the next disc and press the YES OK key Insert the discs in the order in which they were backed up At the end of the process you can select whether to restore effect user data If you do so the effect user data currently on the hard disk will be overwritten Restore UserData A Overwrite Arevyousure Press the YES OK key The effect user data will be restored overwriting the effect user data that is on the hard disk If you press the NO CANCEL key the effect user data will not be restored If you are restoring from a USB drive the effect user data will not be restored if there is no effect user data file of the same name as the song being restored 7 When the restore operation has been completed the dis play will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key 2 Backing up and restoring effect user data 2 1 Backing up user effect data You can backup effect user data in the following ways e Backup all effect user data e Backup ef
344. s on the drive the Song Protect message will appear when you attempt to execute and the operation will be aborted Press the YES OK key to begin the format operation Reference Format U DOS format the USB drive This operation DOS formats the USB drive eme TE 001 01 000 _ Format U USB Mode 1 Exec Execute cccccccssscccsssssccccssscccccsscceees DOS format the USB drive Format gL DOS FATIE Are You Sure la Quick SW ccccccsccccccsssssssccccceees On Off Selects the type of format press the YES OK key to begin the format operation On Select this if you want to erase all data saved on the entire USB drive Since this will initialize only the man agement area it will not require much time Off Select this if the DiskError message appears fre quently amp A substantial amount of time will be required if you execute the format operation with Quick turned Off USB drive 2 GB approximately 35 minutes Format ALL Format the entire hard disk This operation formats both the song drive and the USB drive of the internal hard disk peme Ie 001 01 000 _ Format All 1 USE Mode 1 Exec Execute scsccsceccccncnnsevsiecdevavscsvesenscsoscscsssse s Executes formatting of the entire hard disk contra MOT A Sune MMC a la Quick SW ccccsccccccccsssssssccccceees On Off Selects the type of format On Se
345. s such as a keyboard that sends an audio signal to the D1200 3 Press the POWER switch of the D1200 to turn on the power The display will show the opening message Then the SONG SelSong tab page will appear selectTimeDisp E9001 01 000 Ee t 881 DemoSongesl E Tempo Manu 120 84704 Metrod The song number that had been selected when you turned off the power will be selected 4 Turn on the power of external output devices such as the monitor system to which the audio from the D1200 is being sent 2 3 Turning the power off Turn off the power when you are finished all operations such as song playback and recording Use the following pro cedure to turn off the power of the D1200 and of each con nected device l Never disconnect the AC DC power supply until the power has been turned completely off Doing so may cause data to be lost When turning the power off set the volume of all devic es to the minimum position and turn off the power switches starting with the downstream devices to which the audio signal is being sent WG Audio that you record on the D1200 and mixer settings etc that you make are saved automatically when you se lect or change songs or when you turn off the power However effect settings you edit outside of Modeling mode will be lost if you turn off the power without sav ing them If you want to keep the effect settings you edited out side of Modeling mode save
346. s you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 Copying track data to a track in a different song Here s how the IN OUT region of track 1 in song 001 can be copied once to the TO location of track 2 in song 002 soweetrack E 001 01 000 E CopyTr Face n ers Wiri e rtrd lo euit Trl Tmport fl Export fe Select song 001 Register the IN and OUT locations p 33 118 Select Copy Track In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose Copy Track 4 Select the copy source track number Use SourceTrack to select track 1 QOS Select the clipboard as the copy destination track Use DestTrack to select Clip 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Com pleted Press the YES OK key The copied data will overwrite the data in the clipboard oesttraxx 5001 01 000 E CopyTrack Chip gt E a ee iyterTegedit Tk A T Select song 002 Register the TO location p 33 118 Select CopyTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose CopyTrack Select the clipboard as the copy source track Set SourceTrack to Clip1 The number indicates the number of
347. s equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harm ful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interfer ence to radio or television reception which can be deter mined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit differ ent from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV techni cian for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the user s authority to operate this equipment CE mark for European Harmonized Standards CE mark which is attached to our company s products of AC mains operated apparatus until December 31 1996 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC And CE mark which is attached after January 1 1997 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Also CE mark which is attached to our company s products of Battery operated apparatus means it conforms to EMC Direct
348. s the acoustical characteristics of a guitar amp Even if you are recording your instrument via a direct line you can produce a realistic sound as though a guitar amp were actually being used Type Amplifier Type ccccceccees AMP1 5 Selects the type of guitar amplifier 136 CabRes CabinetResonator This effect simulates the acoustical characteristics and cabinet resonances of a guitar amp speaker cabinet The AmpSimulator is ideal for direct recording Type Cabinet Type 00 1x 8 1 x 10 1 x 12 2 x 12 4x 10 4 x 12 Dept eea state a 0 100 Tone Selects the type of cabinet Sets the depth of the effect This effect simulates the tone control section of a guitar amp It allows you to adjust the character of the vacuum tubes Sets the low frequency level Sets the middle frequency level Sets the high frequency level Character of the vacuum tubes in the power amp section of the guitar amp Cabinet type Models the effect of the air Output level Bass Bass snsensenseeseeseisseesreseesreren 0 100 Middle Middle c cccssssseeeseees 0 100 Treble Treble ccecsssssssscsssesesees 0 100 Tube Tube Type cccceee SS 1 99 Burn Cabinet This effect models the speaker cabinet of a guitar amp Type CabinetType csccsscssseeeneen 4 Ainan enaa aA hi a 0 100 keveler a a E 0 100 Presne PreSe nce sessscsseeeen 0 100 High frequency level 1 1x8TW
349. s the rhythm on off iM On The rhythm will be sent to the moni tor LR bus or the master LR bus Use the INPUT OUT PUT SOLO Monitor tab page Rhythm button to specify the bus to which the rhythm will be sent p 100 The RHYTHM key LED will light Off The rhythm will not be sent to the monitor LR bus or the master LR bus A During bounce recording the rhythm will be recorded if this is On amp If you make settings in the NPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page to assign rhythm Rhythm L Rhythm R to a mixer channel the rhythm will sound during recording or playback re eardless of this setting amp If Rhythm is On the currently selected rhythm will sound while this tab page is displayed even if the re corder is stopped The rhythm will continue sounding even if you move to the METER TRACK VIEW tab page Pattern Length Pattern Position ssscccssseees Indicates the number of measures length in the pattern selected by SelRhythm and the current measure within the pattern Example L4 1 Playing measure 1 of a four measure pattern TmpMap Tempo map editing By creating tempo maps you can change the tempo time sig nature and rhythm pattern during the song while it plays or records For details on how to create tempo maps refer to p 49 Tempo time signature and rhythm changes can be placed only at the begin
350. s tracks whose TRACK STATUS is PLAY For tracks whose TRACK STATUS is REC pressing the REC key and then this key will begin recording The LED of this key will light while the recorder is recording or playing If the Scrub function is on pressing this key will per form Play From and pressing this key while holding down the STOP key will perform Play To p 34 15 REC key Press this key to enter record ready mode the LED will blink In order to enter record ready mode one or more tracks must be set to a TRACK STATUS of REC When you press the PLAY key the LED will light and record ing will begin If the foot switch function p 101 is set to PunchIn Out the foot switch will perform the same function as the REC key 16 VALUE dial Use this dial to edit values or to move the current loca tion If the Scrub function is on turning this dial will play the track at the corresponding speed 17 CURSOR keys These keys move the cursor They are also used to adjust the contrast brightness of the display 18 POWER key This key turns the power on off p 15 19 MIDI indicator This indicator will light when a MIDI message is received at the MIDI IN connector 20 HDD CD access indicator This indicator will light when the hard disk is being accessed during recording playback or editing or if an installed CD R RW drive is operating l Never subject the D1200 to vibration or sh
351. sc Since only the track information will be erased the erasure will require less time This will not affect writing Off The entire CD RW disc will be erased com pletely Use this setting if the disc is not recognized even after it was erased with the Quick turned on Press the YES OK key to begin the erasure Format S Format the song drive This operation formats the song drive of the internal hard disk eme TE 001 01 000 _ Format 5 1 USB Mode Control MMOL Sunc A ANC Jp URA Diskuti 1 Exec Execute ccccccccsssccccsssccccccssccccsssceees Executes formatting of the song drive Format A S WiBeCleared Are You Sure la Quick SW cececscccssececctvcotasstcncdcdedeces On Off Selects the format type aM On Select this if you want to erase the song data in a single operation Since this will initialize only the management area it will not require much time Off Select this if the DiskError message appears frequently A substantial amount of time will be required if you execute the format operation with Quick turned Off Song drive 38 GB approximately 10 hours 2a FOr ccccccccccsceccsscccccescccesesscecesoees On Off Execute formatting even if the drive contains protected songs mem On Forcibly execute formatting even if the drive contains a song protected by Protect Song Force JOff If a song protected by Protect Song exist
352. shold Attack Release The Attack and Release parameters set the Gate attack time and release time Delay Time This parameter sets the delay time of the Gate input If the sound has a very fast attack increase the delay time so that the signal will be input after the Gate is opened 25 DY5 St Exciter Enhancer Stereo Exciter Enhancer This effect is a combination of the Exciter which adds a punch to the sound and the Enhancer which adds spread and pres ence Blend Exciter Blend 0 100 100 Empha Emphatic Point 000 0 140 LDly Enhancer Dly L msec 0 0 50 0ms RDly Enhancer Dly R msec 0 0 50 0ms Depth Enhancer Depth 00 0 100 EQTrim EQ Trim 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0dB Mix Wet Dry cececeee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Sets the frequency to be emphasized Sets the delay time for the Enhancer left channel Sets the delay time for the Enhancer right channel Sets the determines to what degree the Enhancer effect is applied Sets the 2 band EQ input level Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ Sets the balance between the effect and Ratio Ratio sicesiccsesiscceviee 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Thrshl Threshold CB 00 40 0dB Sets the level above which the comp
353. sitivity Attack Attack vissceisninceaninlassdvaneinatasen 1 100 Sets the attack level Level Output Level scccssceeesees 0 100 Sets the output level of the compressor Comp2 Compressor2 This effect adds Pre LEQ and Pre HEQ to Comp1 Sense Sensitivity 0110111 11111112 1 100 Sets the sensitivity Attack Attack scccsacscerarsseiizrecaravesaniates 1 100 Sets the attack level Trim EQ Trim o oo 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415dB HEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 415dB Level Output Level cccescee 0 100 Lmir Limiter Ratio Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Thrshl Threshold CB 0 40 0dB Attek CATAGK Fa cesitneticrecicbionnestmieueee 1 100 Relse Release sscsseeesceeees 1 100 GLevel Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24dB AmpSim Amp Simulator Type Amplifier Type 0 SS EL84 6L6 MicSim Mic Simulator Refer to p 137 Decima Decimator LPF Pre LPF Off On Fs Sampling Frequency Hz 1 0k 44 1k Bit Resolution ssicssdvicantos Qetontatentatatnce 4 24 HiDamp High Damp sssee 0 100 Level Output Level ccccssee 0 100 Sets the gain of High EQ Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the output level of the compressor Sets the signal compression ratio Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Sets the attack time Sets the release t
354. song that you want to move p 31 In the SONG EditSong tab page move the cursor to EditType and turn the VALUE dial to select MoveSong oO 3 Make sure that SourceSong indicates the song you want to move 4 Move the cursor to DestSong and turn the VALUE dial to specify the destination song number Operation 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When AreYouSure appears press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation is completed the display will indi cate Completed Press the YES OK key to close the dialog box Deleting a song DeleteSong This operation deletes the selected song To delete a song Eee 001 01 000 0 Select the song that you want to delete p 31 In the SONG EditSong tab page move the cursor to EditType and turn the VALUE dial to select DeleteSong O 3 Verify the song that you want to delete Make sure that DestSong indicates the song you want to delete 4 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When AreYouSure appears press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation is completed the display will indi cate Completed Press the YES OK key to close the dialog box Protecting a song ProtectSong This operation protects the selected song preventing it from being edited rew
355. srccsscesecsscceeseenes 001 100 Selects the move destination song number You can select a number in a range from 001 to exist ing song number 4 Exec Execute ccccccssccsscsscccccssccccssssccceeees Executes the Move Song operation If the move destination DestSong number you selected is higher than the move source number SourceSong songs earlier than the DestSong number will be moved forward by one or backward by one if the move destination number is lower than the move source number They will not be overwritten amp Undo is not available for this operation EditType DeleteSong Deletes the selected song execute 3 001 01 000 E 1 Delete Song 661 DemeSongaat Erec 3 GelSong Jeditson 2 DESISONG sisssecsavsavecrse ence nasecsseas 001 100 Indicates the number and name of the song that will be deleted If you want to change this select a different song in the SONG SelSong tab page 3 Exec Execute ccccccccssccccsssccccscsccccssscecceeees Executes the deletion When you execute this operation the DestSong song will be deleted and subsequent songs will be renum bered downward by one amp Undo is not available for this operation EditType ProtectSong Protects the selected song so that it cannot be written or de leted When you have completed a song you can protect it against accidental change o
356. sscccssssscesssscessseccesees 1 2 3 4 CLP 8 18 42 dB Indicates the level of each analog input The horizontal axis indicates the channel and the verti cal axis indicates the level Inputs that are not selected in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 tab page will not be shown here 2 InputHigh Fe 10kHz 15 0 15 0 dB Sets the input high EQ gain This will adjust the high frequency range The region above 10 kHz can be boosted cut over a range of 15 0 15 0 dB 3 WAIMIGR Csscsseeecceresvercessczessezs 100Hz 20 0k Hz Specifies the frequency of the input mid EQ The frequency can be adjusted over a range of 100 Hz 20 0 kHz 4 InputMid sscccesseceeees 15 0 15 0 dB Sets the input mid EQ gain This will adjust the mid fre quency range The region specified by InputMid can be boosted cut over a range of 15 0 15 0 dB 5 InputLow Fc 100Hz 15 0 15 0 dB Sets the input low EQ gain This will adjust the low fre quency range The region below 100 Hz can be boosted cut over a range of 15 0 15 0 dB Solo Select the signal to be soloed Miz Sele SOIC uccan arein itas 1 6 7 8 11 12 S1 2 Al R1 R2 On Off Switches the solo function on off Only the audio signals for which the Solo button is on will be sent to the monitor LR bus Use this when you want to hear only a specific audio channel out of many cha
357. ssing to be fin ished and for the Completed indication to appear Fading out Here s how to fade out the IN OUT region of track 1 1 Register the IN and OUT locations Register the locations at which you want the fade out to start and end p 33 118 2 Select FadeTrack In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select EditType and use the VALUE dial to choose FadeTrack 3 Select the fade out curve A B C fade in curves D E FE fade out curves Select the Mode button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box For example select curve D and press the YES OK key to return to the TRACK Edit Trk tab page If you selected two or more tracks for SourceTrack you must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track 4 Select the fade out destination track number Set DestTrack to track 1 6 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key Check the results of the operation Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the TO location to verify that the fade out was created as you expect If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 As the specified region IN OUT is set l
358. ssse 0 100 Mix Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Resonance Wet Dry Selects LFO Waveform Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Sets the LFO speed Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the resonance amount Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value is dif ferent The harmonics will be emphasized when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you set a positive value for both Reso nance and Wet Dry and if you set a negative value for both Resonance and Wet Dry High Damp This parameter sets the amount of damping of the resonance in the high range Increasing the value will cut high range harmonics 17 MOA St Vibrato Stereo Vibrato This effect causes the pitch of the input signal to shimmer You can use an expression pedal etc to gradually increase or decrease the shimmering speed LFO LFO Waveform ccccscee TRI SIN Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Depth DGD vis scnveerwsnaconacaceousraniayes 0 100 Mix Wet Dry cescceee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Selects LFO Waveform Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Sets the LFO speed Sets the d
359. st use the 2 Selecting q tab page following procedure 1 Select the playback list number Parts and their function Each mode contains numerous parameters which are organ ized into pages These pages are divided by tabs Press the key of the desired mode The following screen shows a page in RHYTHM mode which will appear when you press the RHYTHM key their function Temposource E 001 01 000 1 1 2 Turn the VALUE dial to select a song Objects in the display and 2 Select the desired tab page Use the YES OK and NO CANCEL keys to select the tab page You can also step through the tab pages by repeatedly pressing the key of the currently selected mode Some pages contain only one tab Basic operation 3 Selecting and editing a parameter Selecting a parameter To edit a parameter use the CURSOR keys to select the parameter you want to edit In a list display turn the VALUE dial to move the cur sor Editing a parameter value The way in which you edit or set a parameter value will depend on the type of parameter Preparations Underlined __ parameters or icons such as EQ Use the CURSOR keys to move the cursor to the parameter highlighting it Then turn the VALUE dial to specify the value This is the typical method and also applies to under lined parameters such as Tempo parameters such as EQ that are indicated by icons and locate times
360. stination or copy source track new audio data will be created and this will mean that a greater amount of drive capacity will be used than before the operation was executed In the case of example 2 if you copy the first take to another track before you record the second time execut ing the Optimize Track operation will not delete the A and B regions of the first take and audio data for the Intro and Break regions will be newly created meaning that a greater amount of drive capacity will be used What is USB USB stands for Universal Serial Bus and is an interface for transferring data between a computer and periph eral devices l USB peripheral devices such as hard disks or CD R RW drives cannot be connected to the D1200 The D1200 has a USB connector which you can connect di rectly to your computer and save data to your computer from the USB drive area of the D1200 s internal hard disk Using the USB drive the following types of data can be saved to your computer or loaded from your computer Song data This is data for each track as well as data such as pan and effect settings Since this data is in the D1200 s own unique format it cannot be played or edited on your computer or any device other than the D1200 In order to play this data you must restore it to the D1200 Effect user data This is the data that has been stored in the effect pro gram user area Since this data is in the
361. storted The volume level may also be changed Use Out put Level to adjust the level 27 DY7 St Parametric 4band EQ Stereo Parametric 4band EQ This is a stereo 4 band parametric equalizer You can select peaking type or shelving type for Band 1 and 4 Trim Trim sccnsaevicintsieesicativiastinnesinieies 0 100 Sets the input level B1Type Band1 Type Peaking ShelvL Selects the type of Band 1 B4Type Band4 Type Peaking ShelvH Selects the type of Band 4 Fc1 Band1 Cutoff Hz2 20 1 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 1 QT Qeon inndata 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G1 Gain CB ceseeeeees 18 0 18 0 Sets the gain of Band 1 Fc2 Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 10 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 2 OLE 2 rmerere triers one rar eere 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G2 Gain B cssvssisevvavie 18 0 18 0 Sets the gain of Band 2 Fc3 Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 3 Q3 Q ie 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 G3 Gain AB svivstnsatatnosandinaneet 18 0 18 0 Sets the gain of Band 3 Fc4 Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 0kHz Sets the center frequency of Band 4 Q4 Q ie 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 G4 Gain CB cseeees 18 0 18 0 Sets the gain of Band 4 Mix Wet Dry s s s esseen Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry s
362. sts the vacuum tube character Turn the knob located below TONE to make adjustments You can also adjust the character by moving the cursor to TONE and turning the VALUE dial 4 Select CABINET ccsccsscssseseceeee 12 types 1x8Tweed 1x12Tweed 1x12Black P 1x12AC15 2x12Black P 2x12AC30 2x12ClassicA 4x10Tweed 4x12Classic 4x12Vintage 4x12Modern FullRange Selects the type of cabinet Turn the knob located below CABINET to select the desired type Reference You can also select the type by moving the cursor to CABINET and turning the VALUE dial Ds Facl ry DOIG vccacssecsssnvnseieieiasccescsscsesoeserssvssceesaess Returns the selected modeling effect to the factory set tings Modeling 2 UUU UUU If you want to make more detailed adjustments move the cursor to DRIVE TONE or CABINET and press the ENTER key As an example here are the settings that will appear if you select DRIVE AES TU 1 a O LEVEL Qo NF Ae AA Q 3 ani IL__EAETHET 2 DRIVE cicscccevesssesaseanesnasenssssenarnnennnerens 001 100 Adjusts the depth of distortion e Turn the knob located below DRIVE to adjust the setting e You can also adjust the setting by moving the cursor to DRIVE and turning the VALUE dial Se LEVEL e E suns 000 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect e Turn the knob located below TONE to adjust the setti
363. t Appendix About the CDRW 1 You can use the CDRW 1 CD R RW drive option to do the following things e Use the CDRW 1 to backup and restore e Use the CDRW 1 to create audio CDs e Insert an audio CD into the CDRW 1 assign its output to a mixer channel and record or play the sound of the audio CD e Export WAV files to a CD R RW e Update the system from a CD ROM R RW amp Never use any internal CD R RW drive other than the CDRW 1 1 Cautions for handling e During operation use the unit in a horizontal position e Do not use the unit in extremely cold or hot locations e Do not use the unit in extremely humid locations e Do not use the unit in dusty or smoky locations e Do not subject the unit to vibration or strong physical shock In particular this unit is vulnerable to shock dur ing operation both during reading and writing e Normally the drive uses software ejection so you will be able to open the CD tray by pressing the eject button However if this fails you can forcibly eject the tray by inserting a thin object such as a straightened paper clip into the emergency eject hole e Do not store the unit in hot or humid locations e Never touch the focusing lens e Do not use commercially available lens cleaners e Do not transport the unit with a disc left in the tray e Do not leave the unit with the disc tray open CD R RW handling Please observe the following points when handling
364. t is not possible to rewrite a preset effect program 1 Using insert effects These effects are inserted directly into the signal path of ei ther an analog input signal or a playback track Effects can also be applied to the internal PCM rhythms if they are being routed to a mixer channel There are four types of insert effects The effect programs that are available will depend on the type of effect you select p 127 154 1 in 2 out x 2 1 in 1 out x 2 input only These are mono in stereo out or mono out chain effects You can use two of these chain effects simultane ously These are ideal for adding spaciousness to a lead guitar or vocal e When simultaneously recording guitar and bass you can apply a Guitar Multi effect to the guitar input and a Bass Multi effect to the bass input as you record e When simultaneously recording two vocals you can apply separate Vocal Multi effects to each vocal input as you record e When simultaneously recording vocal and guitar you can apply a Vocal Multi to the vocal and a Guitar Multi to the guitar as you record 2 in 2 out x 2 These are stereo in stereo out effects You can use two of these effects simultaneously These are ideal for a stereo input sources such as a key board e When simultaneously recording a keyboard and rhythm machine you can apply St Chorus to the key board and St Comp to the rhythm machine e You can apply St Comp or St Limiter to ad
365. t the WriteToCD button and press the ENTER key e Select the writing speed When you write using DiscAtOnce finalization will be performed automatically 3 Recording to a master tape 4 Check your completed song Use the faders and knobs to adjust the volume and pan of the tracks and play back to check the result 2 Connect your external recording device Connect your MD or DAT etc to the S P DIF OUT jack or the MASTER OUT jacks 3 Record on the external device e Play back the D1200 song and adjust the level on your external recorder e Start recording on your external recorder and play back the D1200 song By using the Program Play function you can succes sively play back songs in the desired order p 56 4 Using sub inputs You can use any of the analog inputs INPUT1 GUITAR IN INPUT 4 as sub inputs to send audio directly to the master bus e You can play back a completed song in synchronization with an external sequencer that drives a sound module and send the output of your sound module to the sub input e You can apply an external effect to the audio signal sent from the AUX OUT jack and use sub input as the return from the external effect 1 Connect your sound module etc to the analog inputs You can use INPUT 1 GUITAR IN INPUT 4 2 Patch the inputs to the sub in chive Enr 12 nea 4 Solo Monitor Phase e Select the SubIn button and press the ENTER key
366. t the vol ume of each map LOU Rhythm sound does not go away or sounds in duplicate ex cessive volume L Inthe RHYTHM SetUp tab page Rhythm may be On RHYTHM key lit Either change the Rhythm setting from On to Off or use Vol to lower the volume Rhythm may be selected for monitoring In the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Monitor tab page turn Rhythm Off Rhythm may be assigned as an input In the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 or Ch7 12 tab page either select a channel assignment other than Rhythm L or Rhythm R or turn Rhythm Off in the RHYTHM SetUp tab page VAE E A key does not function when pressed _ Some keys do not function while the recorder is playing or recording Stop the recorder and then perform the operation Some keys do not function while Scrub is on Turn off Scrub and then perform the operation p 34 124 Is a dialog box open Press either the YES OK key or the NO CANCEL key to close the dialog box tE pol MIDI MIDI sequencer won t synchronize MIDI control is not possible _ Are the MIDI cables connected correctly gt p 14 79 A MIDI cable may be broken Can t synchronize using MTC or MIDI Clock Are the master and slave settings correct gt p 79 L Does the synchronization signal transmitted by the D1200 match the synchronization signa
367. tTimeDisp k 001 01 000 Ee 1 881 DemoSongas 1 2 w Tempo Manu 128 64 84 Metrod 1 SongNumber csscccsscsssesseeesees 001 100 Selects the song The display shows the song number and song name A EX symbol is displayed if you have selected a 24 bit song and a ig symbol is displayed if the song is pro tected Press the E button and select a song from the list DermoSonghe 1 E C 1 JERE LermnoSongdhz Cancel DemoSong 4 You can also select a song by holding down the STOP key and pressing the FF key or REW key 2 Select DispParameter Tempo Mark Scene Displays the current tempo mark or scene Press the E button and select what will be displayed Select DispParameter Tempo Manu 126 64 64 Metrod i Mark BB LHE MARK Scene G8Bi HEw SCENE Tempo The tempo source tempo time signature and rhythm of the song will be displayed e Tempo Manu 126 64 84 Metro Mark The number and name of the Mark at or before the current time location of the song will be displayed e Mark aal MarkHamebaal Scene The number and name of the Scene at the current time location of the song will be displayed Scene BALE Intro 3 Rename viccscccscccsscscacsaccevcscesedoccscsecsoseseesescsusosaess Select the Rename button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box and edit the song name You can input a song name of up to sixteen characters p 31
368. tTrack Before you make settings here it is a good idea to set the IN OUT and TO times to their approximately location 6a SelectTrack sccccsssccsssseoes Track1 12 Selects the track for which you want to view the wave form and specify a time location Press the I and select from the list 6b Zoom In Out Up Down sscccssecesseeeess Adjusts the size of the waveform display and the play back speed Vertically expands the waveform display Vertically shrinks the waveform display dH Horizontally expands the waveform display F4 Horizontally shrinks the waveform display 6c Locate ccccssssscccccsssscccccssessces In Out To Specifies a counter location When you move the cursor to Locate the Scrub func tion will automatically be turned on and you can turn the VALUE dial to specify a location while hearing only the sound of the track selected by SelectTrack When you press the YES OK key the current time will be overwritten to the location memory for that key e g the IN LOC1 key If you press the NO CANCEL key the setting will be cancelled If you select Wave when the cursor is at SourceTrack the In and Out loca tions may be set If you select Wave when the cursor is at DestTrack then the To location may be set form this screen EditType InsertTrack Inserts blank space into the IN OUT region of the insert destination
369. tab pages 2 Step 1 Quick recording Step 2 Overdubbing D x oo o 2 72 Step 4 Mastering 28 Step 4 Mastering In this step we create a final two track mix and write it to CD R to create an original CD You will need the separately sold CDRW 1 in order to create a CD Applying the final effect UUU UUU Here we will adjust the pan and volume for each track and apply a final effect to the entire song The final effect is used mainly to apply a dynamics type effect such as a compressor to make the overall level more consistent You can apply an effect such as a multi band limiter to add the finishing touch to the sound 1 Adjust the pan of each playback track Press the PLAY key to play back the song and turn the PAN and BALANCE knobs to adjust the stereo position of tracks 1 12 2 Use the CHANNEL faders to adjust the playback level Press the METER TRACK VIEW key to view the level meters Select the button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select PostFaderLev to view the meters corresponding to each fader 3 Access the FINAL EFFECT FinalEff tab page effecttumber 001 01 000 jEr Select an effect program Effect Program List gt p 154 Select EffectNumber and use the VALUE dial to select an effect program Press the PLAY key to play back the song and listen to the output from the master LR or headphones to he
370. ter Vocoder St Pitch Shifter Rotary Speaker Center Canceller Bass Multi 1 Guitar Multid Guitar Multi6 Guitar Multi6 HALL SmtHall WPlate DPlate ROOM BrRoom ER LCRDly StDly Chorus Flangr Phaser Vibrat StTrml AutPan Ensmbl StComp StLimit Vocodr StPitch RotSP Canclr NR Cho Fl Dist JNR NR AmpSim CabRes AmpSim Cho Fl P4EQ Comp P4EQ P4EQ Pitch Dist INR P4EQ Exctr Comp P4EQ P4EQ P4EQ P4EQ Pitch Pitch AmpSim CabRes AmpSim CabRes AmpSim CabRes AmpSim CabRes NR2 Tone Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive Pre Amp Simulator Drive NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 NR2 Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone 5 Dly Delay Cho Fl Delay Delay AmpSim Cho Fl Cho Fl Cho FI Delay Delay Cho Fl Treml Phaser Cho Fl Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Delay 9 Dly 5 Dly 9 Dly 9 Dly 5 Dly 1in2out x 2 F F Paty Programan igor EY a E ea E _ Woe ass Multi 4 P4EQ Wa
371. ter will be once again sent back to the pitch shifter This means that if Feedback is raised the pitch will continue stepping up or down each time feedback is repeated If Feedback Position Select is set to Post the feedback will not pass through the pitch shifter so that raising Feedback will cause the pitch shifted sound to be repeated without further pitch change MicSim Mic Simulator The mic simulator is a modeling effect that can transform a sound recorded on a conventional dynamic mic giving it the character of a sound that was recorded on an expensive con denser mic special studio mic or vintage mic InMic Input Mic Type Vo Dy Mit Dy Line Selects the mic that was used for record ing OutMic Output Mic Type Vnt Dy Mit Cn Selects the mic to be simulated Pc Cn Whale Vo Cn Vo Tb BDr Dy Set Setting Close On Off Far Mic setting Trim Trim Meeeeeremecenereecrere ences 0 100 Sets the adjustment level Input Mic Type Vo Dy Adynamic mic frequently used for vocals that brings the sound to the forefront and is also resistant to popping and feedback Mit Dy A dynamic mic usable for a wide range of applications including most instruments and vocals with a crisp and well defined character Output Mic Type Vnt Dy A simulation of a vintage mic known for its warm and rich tone and is ideal for vocals Milt Cn A simulation of a general purpose studio condenser mic with
372. the NO CANCEL key 7a SelectExp CompMode Fast Mid Best Selects the conversion mode for expansion compres sion Fast Processing will be performed as quickly as possi ble Mid Mid way between Fast and Best Best Audio quality will be maintained as high as possi ble However this setting has no effect if SelectPitch is set to Variable 7b SelectPitch ccccccsseees Fixed Variable Selects whether the playback pitch will be affected by the expansion compression command Fixed The pitch will not change Variable The pitch will change Editlype CopyWholeTrack Copies the entire copy source track the currently selected virtual track from beginning to end to the specified virtual track of the copy destination track A This operation overwrites the data of the destination track SourceTrack R DestVTrack a h 3 ee execute f 0071 01 000 B 1 CopywholeTrack_ 2 1 Zz a erie tere Edit Tek Thport f export eee 2 SOURCE OG sarsc cere evsseetnjeeeisssessnsenee ees 1 12 1 2 11 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the copy source track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 112 3 Destak sesen tse eee 1 12 1 2 1 1 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the copy destination track For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 4 DestVTrack ccccccccsssscccccssssssccccccsssce
373. the CDRW 1 Use either a blank disc or a disc that has not yet been finalized D Access the CD CDR RW tab page MIDI USB Drive Data oon be Rhythm i a Effects Mixer pns w Upgrading the system 65 Make sure that CD R RW Information indicates BlankDisc or CD track number BlankDisc CO Monitor ae Seea F Execute writing e Select the WriteToCD button and press the ENTER key e Select the writing speed For this example select 8X to select 8X speed writing In order to use 8X writing the disc must both support 8X writing e The Obey Copyright Rules message will appear WriteToCD TrackAtOnce Al Obey Copyright Rules Are vou Sure Prepare gCOR RW Speed xs Ce ves e Carefully read the owner s manual section COPY RIGHT WARNING gt p 1 and if you accept the terms press the YES OK key e An image file will be generated e i ile 27 Finished amp Ee aking Image File tH Prepare CORR If you select the Abort button and press the ENTER key creation of the image file will be aborted e CD writing will begin The data will start being writ ten to the CD E Writing CD 31 Finished Mh ae Prepare COR RW While the data is being written you can select the Abort button and press the ENTER key to abort writing to the CD In the case of a CD R the disc will be come unusable If you are using
374. the case of MeasTap or sixteen times in the case of BeatTap to input up to the beginning of the fifth measure Then press the STOP key If you input taps only until mid way through the song the tempo of the last input measure or beat will be auto matically copied to the end of the song Specify the tempo track as the tempo source Access the RHYTHM SetUp tab page select Tem poSource and turn the VALUE dial to choose Tem polrk Move to the beginning of the song and press the PLAY key to play back the song and check the tempo Operation The Recorder V Recording U UUU UUU You can connect audio sources such as guitar and keyboard to the input jacks make mixer settings to assign these audio input sources to tracks of the recorder and then record them The D1200 has twelve recording playback tracks and each of the twelve tracks has eight virtual tracks INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Chl 6 Ch7 12 The following pages explain how to record audio on these tracks 1 1 Basic recording Here s how to record the audio signal that you specified in 1 Inputting audio to the mixer p 35 If you want to create a new song for recording set refer to 1 1 Creating a new song p 31 1 Check the recording mode Access the BOUNCE RecMode tab page Set Select RecMode to Input record the input audio inputon ffs 9001 01 000 Te Select Fe
375. the first take and recover disk space Execute the Optimize Track command on track 1 from the beginning to the end of the song When this is exe cuted only the audio data of the 1st take Intro 2nd take A 2nd take B and 1st take Break will be kept This means that the 1st take A and 1st take B data will no longer occupy disk space a bBe r IN OUT OptimizeTrack Bex a Je Example 3 You recorded A and B on track 1 as the first take As the second take you overwrite recorded the Intro A B and Break Es ee 1st take 1st take ee 2nd take intro Aa B Break In this case the first take A and B remain beneath A and B but since the audio data of take 1 is not used at all once you finished recording take 2 there is no need to execute the optimize command Deleting the Undo data Even if you use the drive space efficiently as described above examples 1 2 3 the old data will be kept on the drive for use by the Undo function If you want to delete this Undo data you can restart the D1200 When the D1200 is restarted all Undo data will be deleted and the unused drive space will be recov ered Sharing event data If you use the Copy Track operation to copy track data to another track e g virtual track or another song this audio data will be shared so that the drive capacity will not decrease However if you execute the Optimize Track operation on the copy de
376. the scene was stored 9 Recall eoru A ees Recalls the settings that are registered in a scene If you recall a scene and edit the EQ etc and then press the Recall button to recall the scene the state prior to your editing i e the mixer settings registered in the scene will be recalled TOON r Overwrites the current mixer settings onto the selected scene number Use this when you want to make fine adjustments to the scene or replace it with a different scene ED EE E This indicator will appear if the parameters of the scene have been edited from the state in which they were reg istered MixView Viewing pan and fader scene data ate 61 000 Lews 052 BESSHEW SCENE 1 Pan Balance Pan1 Pan6 Bal7 8 Bal1 1 12 Displays the currently selected pan and balance settings When you select an icon the channel number and parameter value will appear in the upper left 2 Level Lev1 Lev6 Lev7 8 Lev1 1 12 Displays the currently selected channel fader settings When you select an icon the channel number and parameter value will appear in the upper left If the level is unity gain the display will indicate rFad SceneNumber scccccsssssccccesees 001 Pan fader guide Lttdettosetece Displays a symbol to indicate the difference between the actual fader or pan position and the value that is regis tered in the scene When you recall
377. them p 43 2 Lower the MASTER fader of the D1200 to Set the volume of externally connected device to the minimum position Objects in the display and Parts and their function their function Basic operation Preparations Listening to the demo song 16 3 Turn off the power of devices such as a monitor system or MD recorder to which the audio from the D1200 is being sent 4 Press and hold the D1200 s POWER key until the power off confirmation dialog box appears If you press the YES OK key the song will be saved automatically and then the power will be turned off If you press the NO CANCEL key you will return to the previous screen a N EE aie A E N Seison Turn off the power of external input devices such as keyboards The Restart function In the power off confirmation dialog box you can select the Restart button and press the ENTER key to restart the D1200 This clears the Undo data in order to recover hard disk capacity 3 Display 3 1 Adjusting the angle You can lift the upper part of the display to adjust the angle Adjust the angle for easiest viewing To adjust the angle Raise the upper part of the display to adjust the angle Do not use excessive force to move this 3 2 Adjusting the contrast The readability of the screen will depend on the height of your line of sight or the temperature so adjust the contrast as necessary T
378. them for use whenever necessary Up to 100 scenes can be registered in a song The following mixer parameters can be registered in a scene MixerChannel EQ Effect Send 1 and 2 Aux Send Pan Balance Chan nel Fader and Pair On Off InsertEffect only if Assign is Trk Effect Type Insert To Effect Number MasterEffect Effect Number Effect Return FinalEffect Effect Number ReadDel Switch scene playback on off and edit scenes Scene iter Te BLEW SCEME ae Ai EEE 6 I Sceneheakott 1 HE SceneRead Off EditLoc Delete 7 2 7 J Cpt SE Fecal TT 9 41158 3 1 ScemeRead cccccccssssssscccccccsssssscees On Off Switch scene playback on off On Scene playback will be enabled When playback reaches the location at which a scene is registered that scene will be recalled and the mixer set tings will change automatically If this is On the SCENE key will light Off Scene playback will be disa bled You will be able to recall scenes as general purpose settings whenever you want regardless of the time p 40 3 3 Recalling a scene Ds TANGER p A E You can use the scene filter to prevent specific mixer parameters from being changed by a scene When you register a scene the filter settings you make here will be registered for that scene When you play back a scene these filter settings will apply to all scenes SceneheadsOn Select SceneFilter
379. tion with activities which constitute fair use under copy right law If you are not the copyright holder have not received permission from the copyright holder or have not engaged in fair use of the works you may be violating copyright law and may be liable for damages and penalties If you are unsure about your rights to a work please consult a copyright attorney KORG TAKES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY INFRINGEMENT COMMITTED THROUGH USE OF KORG PRODUCTS Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice e Company names product names and names of formats etc are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Table of Contents Introduction 9 Man ea e e caterer inlet are ieieacnreaeremae eee 5 Conventions in this Mantual cccsscceesseeeeeeeeeeeteeees 6 Parts and their fUnction c cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 Toppinen a cuamun romraabeuniaiee arate 7 Front pane lerrora T A 10 Rear Da hoea e a N N sees 11 Objects in the display and their function 12 BaSIC OPGlallOMcisavinveavsvnerwusmecxisarwweamreesaneeae 13 1 DEIECHING a Modron AE 13 2 Selecting a TAD page zoeiry anaE A 13 3 Selecting and editing a parameter c eee 13 PIOParallOnS orire wan pebens as 14 Tes Connec Hon Soons eE E E fides tees 14 2 Turning the power on off sssissisatssisiiasnoa 15 Ds DIS DAY eias A 16 Listening to the demo SONG
380. to open the dialog box Select U USB DOS and press the YES OK key 6 Check the backup destination drive and file name The name of the song being backed up will be the file name Make sure that Destination is set to U song name 6 Edit the file name If you want to edit the file name select the Rename button and press the ENTER key Edit the file name in the RenameFile dialog box p 31 If an identically named file already exists on the USB drive you will be unable to save You will need to re name the file D Back up the data e Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key A screen will ask you for confirmation e You can specify the date and time that the file was created Select the Date button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box use the cursor to select the date or time that you want to set and use the VALUE dial to specify the date and time e When you press the YES OK key backup will begin Effect user data will also be backed up at this time Effect user data will be saved using the same file name that you specified in steps and followed by the suf fix DFX This data cannot be saved if an identically named file already exists on the USB drive You will need to rename the file 1 2 Restoring song data Here s how you can restore previously backed up song data so that it can be played Restoring If you are restoring data fro
381. tor Rotor Ratio Stop 0 50 2 00 Adjusts the low range side rotor rota tion speed Standard value is 1 00 Selecting Stop will stop the rotation HrnAcc Horn Acceleration 0 100 How quickly the horn rotation speed in the high range is switched Horn Horn Ratio sicesecinens Stop 0 50 2 00 Adjusts the high range side horn rota tion speed Standard value is 1 00 Selecting Stop will stop the rotation HRBal Horn Rotor Balance Rotor Sets the level balance between the high 1 99 Horn range horn and low range rotor MicDst Mic Distance 0 100 Sets the distance between the micro phone and rotary speaker Spread Mic Spread 0 100 Sets the angle of left and right micro phones Mix Wet Dry s s s asasan Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Horn Acceleration Rotor Acceleration On a real rotary speaker the rotation speed is accelerated or deceler ated gradually after you switch the speed The Horn Acceleration parameter sets the speed at which the rotation is accelerated or decelerated Mic Distance Mic Spread This is a simulation of stereo microphone settings 38 LS7 Center Canceller When a stereo music source is input to this effect parts that are panned to the center such as vocals and lead guitar will be erased In addition you can control the pitch Pitch Pitch areetannccienccai
382. track When you execute this operation track data that follows the inserted blank will be moved toward the end of the song DestTrack ar ann DestTrack De DESO o see eee ee 1 12 1 2 1 1 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the track into which blank space will be inserted For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 3 Exec Execute ccccccccscccssscccccscssccccssscccceeees Executes the track editing operation Displays the waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT more precisely p 108 EditType Copy Track EditType EraseTrack Erases the track data in the IN OUT region of the erase des tination track When you execute this operation the IN OUT region will contain silence IN OUT DestTrack DestTrack i I Blank 2 DestTrack sscsexsseceseesvececeessvaecccssiuiedesetarsssensssseseees 1 12 1 2 1 1 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Selects the track in which data will be erased For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 3 Exec Execute cccccccssscccssssccccscsccccccsscccceees Executes the track editing operation 10 MASTER RYTM Tuner 11 co yaounce ENA VD erect ea INSERT I Moneual COUNTER erect EFFECT EFFECT INPUT OUTPUT SOLO O METER AUTO IN OCI SYSTEM UNDO TRACK VIEW SCRUB TRIGGER LOOP PUNCH SCENE MARK ENDOG SONG TRACK USB Displays t
383. track editing may not be possible if there is insufficient space on the song drive You will need to allocate enough free space for the track editing opera tion equivalent to the IN OUT or TO END time 3 1 Preparations for track editing e In order to perform track editing you must first register the region the area of time that you want to edit e Move to the counter location that you want to register e Press the STORE key and then press one of the follow ing keys to register the time in that key p 33 IN LOC1 key IN time OUT LOC2 key OUT time TO LOC3 key TO time END LOC4 key END time e Select a virtual track gt p 53 3 2 Track editing procedures Copy a track CopyTrack This command copies the specified region IN OUT of track data to another location TO e The IN OUT region can be copied once or multiple times in succession e You can copy data from one track or from multiple tracks simultaneously e By using the clipboard you can copy track data to a dif ferent song Here are some ways in which you can use this command e Repeatedly copy a phrase of several measures such as a drum pattern to create a track that extends the entire length of song e Copy the first verse of a song to create the second verse e Record a favorite phrase from a track and copy it toa different track or song Copying track data within the same song Here s how the IN OUT region of track 1 can
384. track to send its signal to the master effect The master effects are used to add depth to the overall mix or improve the balance The D1200 provides two master effects MstEff1 and MstEff2 and they can be used simultaneously The depth of each effect is adjusted by the send level that is sent from each track to the effect Use AUX send when you want to apply an external effect For details on using master effects refer to the Quick Start Tutorial gt p 27 3 Using the final effect The D1200 provides one stereo in out final effect It is ap plied to the master LR signal The final effect is used mainly for dynamic processing such as compression to regulate the overall level You can achieve high quality results by applying a master ing effect such as a multi band limiter to add a finishing touch to the sound during mastering 4 Access the FINAL EFFECT FinalEff tab page EffectNumber E 001 01 000 Feet 2 Select an effect program Select EffectNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select an effect program Play back the song and listen to the master LR output to hear the result of the effect 4 Editing an effet You are free to edit any effect program used as an insert ef fect master effect or final effect If you switch the EffectNumber or turn off the power without saving your edited effect settings will be lost If you want to keep your edited effect settings you must save them
385. tracks in the clipboard di Select the copy destination track number Rhythm i a Effects Mixer r and w N 5 N e Q Q oz lt F MIDI USB Drive Data Dai Upgrading the system 5 7 58 Use DestTrack to select track 2 2 Specify the number of times that the data will be copied Set Times to 1 If you selected two or more tracks for SourceTrack you must specify the same number of tracks for Dest Track 3 Select the Exec button and press the ENTER key When the display asks AreYouSure press the YES OK key to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will indicate Completed Press the YES OK key The copied data will be overwritten onto the copy des tination track Check the results of the editing operation Press the TO LOC3 key and play back from the TO location to verify that the data was copied correctly If you are not satisfied with the results you can use Undo to return to the previous state gt p 126 Insert blank space InsertTrack This command inserts blank space into the specified region IN OUT of a recorded track Track data following the in serted space will be shifted toward the end of the song e You can insert space into one or more tracks simultane ously This can be used in ways such as the following e If you want to add a phrase to the middle of a
386. u execute this operation the destination track will be overwritten IN OUT SourceTrack TIMES States egies ae y oC ywoy DestTrack TO Ds SOURCE MOCK oa 1 12 1 2 11 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Clip 1 Selects the copy source track 1 Clip can be selected only if the clipboard contains data indicates the number of tracks 1 2 4 6 12 in Reference the clipboard You can use Clip to copy data from a track of a different song If you copy between songs of different bit rates the data will be handled as 16 bit data at the copy destination For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 Be DSS TGC Nees sce E E 1 12 1 2 11 12 1 4 9 12 1 6 7 12 1 12 Clip 1 Select the copy destination track 1 indicates the number of tracks in the clipboard You can use Clip to copy data to a track of a different song If you copy between songs of different bit rates the data will be handled as 16 bit data at the copy destination For a 24 bit song you will be able to select tracks 1 6 A a E E EAA 1 99 Specifies the number of times that the data will be cop ied 5 Exec Execute ccccccccscscccsscsccccscsccccsscscccees Executes the track editing operation Displays the waveform of the track audio Here you can set the editing region IN OUT TO more precisely This can be selected when the cursor is at SourceTrack or Des
387. u remove the CDRW 1 3 Insert the CDRW 1 Push the CDRW 1 into the D1200 s drive bay until the front panel of the CDRW 1 is aligned with the side panel of the D1200 Make sure that the drive is oriented in the correct direction when you insert it into the D1200 Press in the direction indicated by the arrow until you hear the internal connector click into place 149 Block diagram Index Rhythm Pattern List Effect Program List D1200 specifications About the CDRW 1 Messages Troubleshooting MIDI implementation chart 4 Check the installation Turn on the power of the D1200 and verify that the CDRW 1 is detected in the startup LCD screen If the CDRW 1 was detected KORG D1200 Digital Recording Studi If the CDRW 1 was not detected RD RG Wersion 1 00 D1200 gt Digital Recording Studis instavable A If the D1200 does not detect the D1200 try pressing strongly once again on the areas indicated by the arrows in step or re install the CDRW 1 To remove the CDRW 1 Slice the EJECT switch located on the bottom panel of the D1200 and the CDRW 1 will be ejected from the D1200 Gently pull out the ejected CDRW 1 A This procedure must be performed with the power off To fasten the CDRW 1 in place By using the screw that is included with the CDRW 1 you can lock the EJECT switch of the D1200 to ensure that the CDRW 1 does not come out ac
388. ue to that location By using the Play From function in conjunction with the Play To function you can find a time location with greater accuracy e Slow Play function When you press the FF key half speed playback will begin from the location at which you are currently stopped Press the STOP key to stop playback and return to the previous location The sound will play slowly at a pitch one octave lower than normal You can use this function by itself or in conjunction with a pitch shifter to learn difficult or rap idly played phrases When this is On the VALUE dial is used only for Scrub playback and cannot be used to set parameter values 1 Loc Locate 000000000000000000000 000 00 000 Changes the current time location You can turn the VALUE dial to move the location while listening to the sound and viewing the waveform 2 TrackSelect ccccccccsssscccccsssssccesees Trk1 12 Selects the track that will be played and whose wave form will be displayed You can also press the E button and choose from the list 3 Zoom In Out Up Down Adjusts the size of the waveform display and the play back speed Expands the waveform display vertically x Shrinks the waveform display vertically d Expands the waveform display horizontally H Shrinks the waveform display horizontally 124 Reference METER TRACK VIEW Here you can view the pre fader level mete
389. ulti track recorder In a compact package the D1200 provides the studio quality sound that you expect from Korg with 24 bit recording and 16 24 bit uncompressed playback at a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz A maximum of 12 tracks can be played back simultaneously for 16 bit data and up to four tracks can be recorded simultane ously Recording time is a maximum of approximately 186 hours when recording one track at 16 bit resolu tion Each track provides eight virtual tracks so you can record as many as 96 tracks in one song XLR connectors with 48 V phantom power analog inputs dedicated guitar input jack and digital connectors All analog inputs of the D1200 use high performance balanced head amps in order to take full advantage of the audio quality provided by full digital processing The two XLR input jacks provide 48 V phantom power and have high quality mic preamps allowing condenser mics to be connected directly All phone jack inputs are balanced TRS types and also support unbalanced input Input sources for a range of levels from mic level to 16 dBu higher than professional level can be connected A dedicated guitar input jack is also provided The S P DIF digital input contains a sampling rate converter which automatically converts 48 kHz and 32 kHz sources to 44 1 kHz allowing them to be recorded Mixer section provides three band EQ with sweepable mid range 100 scene memories and mixer data transmis sion rece
390. unch out Now you will again hear the track play back 7 Press the STOP key to stop When you have finished recording move the current location to a point slightly earlier than where you began recording and listen to the re recorded performance Using a foot switch for manual punch in out You can switch between playback and recording by pressing a PS 1 foot switch sold separately This lets you punch in out while you perform or when the D1200 is located at a distance Connect a foot switch to the FOOT SWITCH jack Access the SYSTEM USB Control tab page OES FootSwFunction E 000 _ ion Fol CtriCha Contro E MDT A Sunc A Me Je ORe Di 3 Specify the function of the foot switch Set Func FootSwFunction to PunchIn Out 4 Perform steps 6 and of Manual punch in out but press the foot switch instead of the REC key You may use the foot switch and REC key in conjunction with each other You can also use the foot switch to record from the be ginning of the song To do so set Func in step to Play Stop At the beginning of the song press the REC key the LED will blink and then press the foot switch to begin recording Auto punch in out The auto punch in out function automatically performs a punch in and punch out at pre specified locations 4 Access the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page In the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab p
391. up1 Song Backup the selected song and effect user data execute A00 01 000 i gt Backu 1 Son He gt 2 SOURCE oo scscsedsesccsstwsteensnvssvaneseysascecs 001 100 Indicates the backup source song number This shows the number of the song that is selected in the SONG SelSong tab page p 116 Selects the backup destination drive The drive ID drive information type and capacity and format type will be displayed S HDD Hard disk song drive This item cannot be used to backup or restore data C CD CD R RW drive U USB DOS USB drive of the hard disk a S HO038 86 CEI AMUSE DOS 3a 3a Format Type cssseeees B D16 B Audio Indicates the format type of the CD R RW disc B Backup Type D1200 or D12 backup CD D16 B D16 or D1600 backup CD Audio Audio CD 4 Destination C U CDx01 99 SONG001 100 Indicates the backup destination drive and drive infor mation C CD x required number of discs or U SONG l When backing up to CD R or CD RW you must use blank discs 3 KEDOME noeste REEE If you set Drive to U USB DOS you can change the name of the backup destination file gt p 69 You can input a filename of up to eight characters Also symbols and lowercase letters cannot be used Smee F Cancel TORREA cm 6 Exec Execute ccccccccscccssssccccccsccccccssccceeees Executes the backup Effect user data
392. ura Daisuke 2002 KORG Inc all rights reserved Quick Start Tutorial a This Quick Start Tutorial is designed to familiarize you with many of the features of the D1200 as well as with the many recording procedures that can be performed using the D1200 While the Operation and Reference sections of this manual will explain every feature and control in great de tail this step by step tutorial will allow you to learn by doing as we take you through the entire process from recording your first track to mastering a CD Step 1 Quick recording Connect your guitar record your performance on tracks 1 and 2 and play it back Step 2 Overdubbing While listening to the guitar performance that you recorded in step 1 connect a keyboard and record overdub your performance on tracks 9 and 10 Then record a vocal on track 3 D E p O Q 2 x faci o 2 rr Step 3 Mixing Apply effects to each track and adjust the volume and EQ Use the mas ter effects to apply effects to the entire song while you mix Step 4 Mastering Create a two track master track from the song that you mixed down in Step 3 Write the master track to CD R to create your own original CD Step 2 Overdubbing Step 1 Quick recording 1 Getting ready amp If you will be using the separately sold CDRW 1 refer to About the CDRW 1 p 149 and install the CDRW 1 before you con tinue with the steps below
393. ure must be performed with the power off Manual eject hole Appendix 5 Using the CDRW 1 For details on how to back up and restore using the CDRW 1 and how to use the CDRW 1 to create an audio CD refer to Operation l When using the CDRW 1 you must operate the unit in a level position in a location that is not subject to vibra tion Playing back an audio CD 4 Here s how to play back an audio CD and listen to it through your headphones or monitor speakers Connect headphones to the PHONES jack or monitor speakers to the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and turn down the level knobs for each jack to the minimum vol ume Insert an audio CD in the CDRW 1 Press the eject button of the CDRW 1 open the disc tray and insert the audio CD Play back the audio CD Access the CD CDR RW tab page Use the cursor to select the CDR RW transport key and press the ENTER key Press the CD Monitor button and gradually raise the PHONES or MONITOR OUT L R volume level Recording the sound of an audio CD O CRG Q Here s how to assign the L channel of an audio CD to track 1 the R channel to track 2 and record the sound of the CD Insert an audio CD in the CDRW 1 Assign the audio output from the CDRW 1 to tracks 1 and 2 Access the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO Ch1 6 tab page select the Ch1 icon and use the VALUE dial t
394. various patterns of complex effect sounds Mode Mode Normal X Fback Switches the left and right delay routing X Pan1 X Pan2 T1Time Tap1 Time msec 0 680ms Sets the Tap1 delay time T2Time Tap2 Time msec 0 680ms Sets the Tap2 delay time TIL Tap1 LeVel csccsescsecesees 0 100 Sets the Tap1 output level Fdback Feedback ccccee 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount HiDamp High Damp ceeseee 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp cceseee 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range Spread Spread ccsceeeceees 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Mode The left right panning of the delay can be modified by changing the connections of the left and right delay Be aware that different sounds must be input to the left and right channels in order for this parameter to be effective Tap1 Level This parameter sets the output level of Tap1 Setting a different level from Tap2 will add a unique touch to a monotonous delay and feed back 128 11 DL4 St Modulation Delay Stereo Modulation Delay This stereo delay uses an LFO to sweep the delay time The pitch also varies You will obtain a delay sound with swell and shimmering LFO LFO Waveform cscccccee TRI SIN Selects LFO Wa
395. veform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0Hz Sets the LFO speed LPhase L LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the phase obtained when the left LFO is reset RPhase R LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the phase obtained when the right LFO is reset LDepth L Depth csscsscseceeees 0 200 Sets the depth of the left LFO modula tion RDepth R Depth ccccscscssceesees 0 200 Sets the depth of the right LFO modula tion LTime L Delay Time msec 0 500 Sets the delay time for the left channel RTime R Delay Time msec 0 500 Sets the delay time for the right channel LFback L Feedback 00 100 100 Sets the feedback amount of left delay RFback R Feedback 00 100 100 Sets the feedback amount of right delay Mix Wet Dry cceccceceees Wet 1 99 Dry Sets the balance between the effect and 1 99 Wet dry sounds L LFO Phase degree R LFO Phase degree L LFO Phase and R LFO Phase specify the phase difference between the two LFO s when they are reset This allows the pitch change of the sweep to be set independently for left and right 12 DL5 St Dynamic Delay Stereo Dynamic Delay This stereo delay controls the level of delay according to the input signal level You can use this as a ducking delay that applies delay to the sound only when
396. will also be backed up at this time B U RstType BackupAllSongs Backup the hard disk song drive and the effect user data This backup data can be saved only to a CD R RW disc SelectDrive E 000 00 000 E Ds Sore ara sees ALL Indicates that all songs will be backed up 3 Drive ccccccsssssssccccssssccccccssscccccssssceeees S C U Selects the backup destination drive gt p 103 Select C CD in this case A Destination cccccccsscccsssscees C CDx01 99 Indicates the backup destination drive and drive infor mation C CD x required number of discs 5 Exec Execute cccsccsccesecivseoevstscesesndesasoceseesedesesesss Executes the backup Effect user data will also be backed up at this time BGs SPCC ee sacessscsisccctessesseans 1x 2x 4x 6x 8x When backing up to CD R RW you can specify the writing speed p 94 Only the writing speeds supported by your drive will be displayed Press the YES OK key to begin the backup B U Rstlype BackupUserData Backup the effect user data CD R RW All effect user data can be backed up at once USB drive Effect user data can be backed up all at once or individually Execute E 001 01 O00 1 fe Backup User Data Eff All 2 4 5 2 SourceEffNo 0000000000000 EffAIl Ins001 1 Mst001 032 Fin033 064 Indicates the backup source effect number If you have selected the CD R RW drive only EffA
397. x On Off When an audio CD is inserted into the installed CDRW 1 this setting specifies whether the audio output of the CD will be sent to the monitor bus On The sound of an audio CD inserted in the CDRW 1 will be output to the monitor bus At this time other audio will not be output from the monitor bus CED Monitor Off CD monitoring will be off The sound of the CDRW 1 will not be output to the monitor bus If you have made settings in the INPUT OUTPUT SOLO tab page to assign the CORW 1 audio output to mixer channels you will be able to hear the CD even if CD Monitor is turned off In this case the sound will be routed through the mixer EQ and effects etc will be applied Fe CD ETERNE E Abs Track Abs Total Selects how the CD R RW playback counter will be dis played CO Monitor Select TimeDisp Type f Abs Track Abs Total Abs Track Display the elapsed time for one song Abs Total Display the elapsed time for the entire disc 8 CD R RW transport keys These keys let you play stop and select songs on the audio CD If in the middle of a track move to the begin ning of the track If at the beginning of a track move to the beginning of the previous track Move to the beginning of the next track Oo Play or stop the track Reference Here you can use the built in tuner to tune an instrument connected to the INPUT 1 GUITAR IN jack l You cannot select this pa
398. x 4x 6x 8x When backing up to CD R RW you can specify the writing speed p 94 Only the writing speeds supported by your drive will be displayed Press the YES OK key to begin the backup Backing up to the USB drive e a i Data Date Are vouSure m n Eea ites Backup User ro oF Do ene ne ee eo A E ee ne ee ere Input the date and time Press the Date button to access the dialog box and specify the date and time for the file Move the cursor to the field you want to edit and use the VALUE dial to specify the date and time File Date Lor oa Hi aL AG AG AG Cancel Press the YES OK key to begin the backup A The backup data cannot be saved if a file with the same name as the data to be backed up already exists on the USB drive Either use a different filename or delete the existing file from the USB drive B U RstType Restore This operation restores previously backed up song or effect user data to the song drive of the hard disk e From a USB drive or CD to which you performed Backup1Song that song and effect user data will be restored 104 From a CD to which you performed BackupAllSong you can choose to restore one song or all songs Effect user data will also be restored From a USB drive or CD to which you performed Back upUserData the effect user data will be restored When restoring one song or all songs you can select w
399. x and select the editing command you want to use Select EditSoang Type Copy Move Protect Delete Reference Each type of song editing command is explained sepa rately below Editlype CopySong Copies the selected song to the song number you specify execute 0071 01 000 B 2 SOUrCESONG ccccssssrrrcccsssssseeeees 001 100 Indicates the copy source song number If you want to change this select a different song in the SONG SelSong tab page 3 DESTSONGizssccozecoietesecnceceneecesssveeseesses 001 100 Selects the copy destination song number Here you can select a number in the range from 001 to existing song number 1 4 Exec Execute ccccccccsccssscsccccsscccccscscecsccees Executes the copy When you execute the song will be copied to the copy destination song number DestSong Even if Dest Song is an existing song number it will be inserted not be overwritten Subsequent songs will be renumbered upward by one amp Undo is not available for this operation Editlype MoveSong Moves the selected song to a different song number execute 001 01 000 B 1 Move Song i Eren 4 2 SourceSong ssssseseeesssoocseeesssooceeesss 001 100 Indicates the move source song number If you want to change this select a different song in the SONG SelSong tab page 3 DestSong ssccsccs
400. xpression pedal or external MIDI controller to control certain insert effect parameters in realtime For details on the effect parameters that can be controlled re fer to Effect Parameter List p 127 Using a pedal to control an insert effect 4 Connect an expression pedal such as the optional EXB 2 foot controller or an external MIDI controller p 14 2 Access the SYSTEM USB Control tab page e In Device CtrlChgDevice select Pedal if you want to use an expression pedal for control _ 001 01 000 a CtriChes Dew poe Asst InsEff1 Footsi Control HOT Sone A ARC JEUNE If you want to use MIDI to control the effect select the MIDI message In order to use MIDI messages for con trol you must set the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page GlobalCh Global Channel setting to match the MIDI channel of the external MIDI device that will transmit the messages 3 Chose which insert effect will be controlled Use Ass CtrlChg Assign to select InsEff1 InsEff4 as the insert effect that will be controlled 4 Assign an effect program Go to the INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 InsEff4 tab page and select the insert effect that you selected in step e Select Effect Number and turn the VALUE dial to select the effect program If the selected effect contains a control function and can be controlled a symbol will be display
401. y For this example select 16Bit 12Track and New 4 Press the YES OK key Editing the song name A new empty song named NEWSONG will be created gt p 31 MakeNewSong 3 001 01 000 IE t 882 HEWSONG H Tempo Manu 126 a4 64 Metrod Sel Sor Hl Be 4 Using the modeling mode Modeinomiede pa Press the MODELING key select Guitar from the three catego ries and press the ENTER key The LEDs of the MODELING key and the CH 1 and 2 TRACK STATUS keys will light red fWEms 2 Check the input level Press the METER TRACK VIEW key METER TRACK VIEW 5E wi gys 678 9101112 d 1 LEL Select the button and press the ENTER key to open the dialog box Select DisplayMode Pref aderLey E CST rkMiew1 6 CT rkView1 12 PostFaderLey OT rkView 12 Select the PreFaderLev radio button press the ENTER key and then press the YES OK key As you play your guitar watch the Ch1 and Ch2 meters and adjust the INPUT 1 TRIM knob You will not be hearing the guitar signal at this point EJ PreFdr PkHold S 00 00 004 ube Adjust the level as high as possible without allowing the level meter s CLP indicator to light when you play most strongly In general you should adjust the TRIM knob so that the peak indi cator the LED near the TRIM knob lights when you play your loudest passage Now let s listen to the audio signal
402. y order For details on the settings and procedure refer to p 56 118 Select TimeDisp Type 1s Abs Song JAbs Taotal Selects the counter display type Abs Song Display the elapsed time for one song Abs Total Display the elapsed time for the entire pro eram To confirm the setting you have selected press the YES OK key To cancel your selection press the NO CANCEL key ProgramPlay List sssccssscsssceseees 01 99 Arrange songs in this list to specify the playback order The songs will play back in the listed order from top to bottom Each line of the list indicates from the left the playback order song number and song name If a song in the list cannot be found it will be skipped and the next song in the play list will be played Locations within a song that you register to the IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 and END LOC4 keys are used by the following functions e Locate point move to the registered time when you press a key Loop playback in out point Auto punch recording in out points Track editing points In out playback When you hold down the IN LOC1 key and press the OUT LOC2 key this function plays from the IN time registered in the IN LOC1 key to the OUT time reg istered to the OUT LOC2 key This is useful when you want to play back the IN OUT region of the song to verify the contents of the region Locate functions IN LOCI The time location t
403. y with feedback is also provided you can create special effects in which the pitch pro gressively steps upward or downward Mode Mode 000 Slow Medium Fast Pitch Pitch Shift 1 2tone 24 424 Fine Fine Cent csscesecees 100 100c DTime Delay Time msec 0 500ms FbSel Feedback Position Select Pre Post Fdback Feedback scccces 100 100 HiDamp High Damp sssse 0 100 Mix Wet Dry 000 Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Mode Switches Pitch Shifter mode Sets the pitch shift amount in steps of a semitone Sets the pitch shift amount in steps of one cent Sets the delay time Switches the feedback connection Sets the feedback amount Sets the damping amount in the high range Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds This switches the operating mode of the pitch shifter Slow will produce the least tonal change Fast will provide the fastest response Medium is between these two It is best to use Fast when only a small amount of pitch shift is needed and Slow when you wish to shift the pitch by a large amount Mode Fine If Cntrl is controlling Pitch and you change Modes or the Fine tun ing you must once again use Cntrl to readjust the Max and Min parameters Feedback Position Select Feedback When Feedback Position Select is set to Pre the output of the pitch shif
404. you input signals at a high velocity or only when the volume level is low Contrl Control Target None Out FB Selects from no control output and feedback Polrty Polarity acid cdesrsasettiamestemiuns veined Reverses level control Thrshl Threshold cccscceeeeees 0 100 Sets the level to which the effect is applied Offset ONSEN i vac lanislcntisaietnveresainn 0 100 Sets the offset of level control Attack Attack ccccssesceesesssseees 1 100 Sets the attack time of level control Relse Release csscssssseeneen 1 100 Sets the release time of level control LTime L Delay Time msec 0 680ms Sets the delay time for the left channel RTime R Delay Time msec 0 680ms Sets the delay time for the right channel Fdback Feedback ssse 100 100 Sets the feedback amount HiDamp High Damp ssse 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp ssssssee 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range Spread Spread cccescceccees 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Mix Wet Dry cccee Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Control Target This parameter selects no level control delay output control effect balance or feedback amount control Polarity Threshold Offset Attack Release The Offset parameter specifies
405. you want to play back press the TRACK STA TUS key to select PLAY LED lit green For this example set tracks 1 and 2 to PLAY 2 Select the recording tracks For each track that you want to record press the TRACK STATUS key to select REC LED lit red For this example set tracks 9 10 to REC 3 Mute the tracks you are not using For each track that is not being played or recorded press the TRACK STATUS key to select MUTE LED dark so that you will not hear tracks that are not being recorded or played Step 4 Mastering 23 24 4 In the BOUNCE RecMode tab page make sure that Select Rec Mode is set to Input inputon fs 9001 01 000 Te Select Fechlode 6 For this example we will start recording from the beginning of the Counter display gt p 32 song 001 01 000 or 000 00 000 If you are not at the begining hold down the STOP key and tap the REW key to return to the begining of the song 6 Enter record ready mode Press the REC key the REC and PLAY LEDs will blink D Begin recording Press the PLAY key the REC and PLAY LEDs will light Begin playing the keyboard When you have finished Stop recording recording check to be sure When you have finished performing press the STOP key the REC that your performance was and PLAY LEDs will go dark recorded correctly 9 Listen to the overdub Return to the begining of the song

Korg D1200 Musical Instrument User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents